;O

•CO

•^•IH^B^^HH

m^PPW-

illpi^

SHASTRI INDO-CANADIAN INSTITUTE

156 Golf Links, New Delhl-3, India

HO GRAMMAR

(WITH VOCABULARY)

BY

LIONEL BURROWS, B. A.

Bengal Provincial Civil Service.

Calcutta:

PRINTED AT CATHOLIC ORPHAN PRESS,

3 & 4, Portuguese Church Street. 1915.

Y/

printed by M. Apel for tlie Author,

At the Catholic Orphan Press,

3 Portuguese Church Street,

Calcutta.

1915.

t

PREFACE.

Sine-- I lirnan writing this (Jrammar, I have constantly encotnu the mistaken impression that tlrSre is no material difference he; . Mundari and IIo and that, inasmuch, as there are several grammars dealing with the former, it would he almosUi work of supererogation to compiles separate grammar on the latter It is certainly an accepted historical fact that the Santals, Hos and Mmvlas originally belonged to the same ahoriginal race, and it has been amply demonstrated that they still represent the same ethnic type with a strong linguistic affinity between the dialects they use. The language of the original ancient race was not, however, written so far as is known, and there is therefore no classical standard by which its various surviving forms can be measured and compared. Max Miiller has pointed out that "all savage tribes, with no letters to fix their tongues, alter their speech much more rapidly than civilized nations" and, in another place, he remarks that all unwritten languages are " in a state of continual com- bustion." The causes of this constant state of change are numerous, and some of them are curiously interesting. For instance, a missionary observer quoted by Max Miiller has reported that " when a chief or priest utters a witticism or invents a new phrase, it is at once caught up and passed current ; mispronunciations, imperfect articulations of words arising from loss of teeth in old men who, from their former rank or prowess, are entitled to respect, sometimes give rise to similar changes." Again, economic progress leads to the adoption of a new process or implement, the word for which may be coined differently by tribes speaking cognate dialects, but living apart, or may be borrowed by each from different adjoining races as " loan- words." Though, therefore, the three dialects Santali, Mnndari and Ho of the so-called Munda family of languages do contain marked features of comrnon descent, they have, by the action of time and separate environment, drifted apart on many points of usage, vocabulary and pronunciation. No one has ever questioned the necessity For separate grammars on*the Santali and Mundari dialects, and, as between Mundari and Ho, there are many differences, particularly in vocabulary, which though not perhaps sufficient, as in the case of French and Spanish, to exalt Ho to the dignity of a distinct language, are certainly sufficient to justify its separate treatment. The alterations and marginal notes I had to make in the Mundari Grammar which I used in learning Ho, made it look more like corrected proof-sheets originally set up by a mad compositor than the finally approved pages of a published volume.

2. It was in order to remove the heavy handicap on the acquisition of Ho from the Mundari text-books that the present work was undertaken. Since then, Babu Bhim Ram Salanki of the Singhbhum Deputy Commis- sioner's office has, I understand, published a Ho Grammar in English. T have not yet seen a copy of his book, but, as I had practically finished mine before I heard of his, I can only hope that there is room for another work on(tho same subject. My grammar doefe not pretend to be as scientific an exposition of the Ho dialect as the Rovd. J. Hoffman's book is of Mundari. It is merely a comparatively simple and popular manual based on a first- hand acquaintance with its subject acquired during three years of service as the officer in charge of the Kolhan, and it will have served its purpose if it is of practical use to fellow Government officials and other* who wish to study Ho.

L. B. B.

VlSHNUPOR,

1st September, 1914.

" \

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Li<'iit.-( 'oloiii-l S. If. Tickdl's jiMjicr on the " Grammatical cou^t ruc- tion of the Ho language" in the Journal of th.- Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. IX. Part II, ot 1840, reprinted at Appendix G to Vol. XXXtt,

Part II of 1866.

i

'2. Mr. Justice Campbell's paper on, " The Ethnology of India," with

Appendices 15 and F, in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. XXXV, Part II, , Supplementary Number, of 1866.

3., John Beames's "Outlines of Indian Philology" Wyman Brothers,

Calcutta, 1867.

4. Sir W. W. Hunter's " Comparative Dictionary of the Non-Aryan

Languages of India and High Asia " Trubner and Co. London, 1868.

5. Col. E. T. Dalton's " Descriptive Ethnology of Bengal," 1872,

6. Rev. J. C. Whitley's " A Mundari Primer" Bengal Secretariat Press,

Calcutta, 1873.

7. Sir George Campbell's " Specimens of Languages of India" Bengal

Secretariat Press, Calcutta, 1874.

8. Rev. J. De Smet's " Rudiments of a Mundari Grammar " Catholic

Orphan Press, Calcutta, 1891.

9. F. Max Miiller's " The Science of Language " Longmans, Green &

Co., London, 1899.

10. Rev. J. Hoffman's " Mundari Grammar " Bengal Secretariat Press,

Calcutta, 1903.

11. Rev. A. Nottrott's "Grammar of the Kol Language" G. E. L.

Mission Press, Ranchi, 3905.

»

12. Dr. G. A. Grierson's " Linguistic Survey of India," Vol. IV, Introduc-

tion, and Parti Supdt., Govt. Printing, Calcutta, 1906.

13. Rev. J. Hoffman's '' A Mundari Grammar with Exercises " Catholic

Orphan Press, Calcutta, 1909.

14. Mr. L. S. S. O'Malley's " ttinghbhum, Seraikela and Kharsawan

Gazetteer," Vol. XX, Bengal District Gazetteers, Bengal Secretariat Book Depot, Calcutta, 1910.

TABLE OP CONTENTS.

PARA.

Chapter I. ... Introduction ... ... 1 to ,4

Quantities of Vowels ... ... 5 7

Quantities of Consonants ...* ... 8 &

Chocked Vowels ... ... 10

Chiipti-r PI. .. Gender ... ... ... 11 & 12

Number ... ... ... 13 to 15

' Case ... ... ... 16

Chapter ITT. ... Added Postpositions, Simple and

Compound ... ... 17

Chapter IV. ... Declension of Nouns ... ... 18 & 19

Chapter V. ... Adjectives and their Comparison ... 20 to 25«

Chapter VI. ... Personal Pronouns ... ... 26 30

Neuter Pronouns ... ... 31

Demonstrative Pronouns ... 32 & 33

Interrogative Pronouns ... ... 34

Indefinite Pronouns ... ... 35

Possessive Pronouns ... ... 36 to 40

Other Pronouns ... ... 41 & 42

Chapter VII. ... Tense Suffixes ... ... 43 to 45

Pronominal Subject-Signs ... 46

Direct and Indirect Object-Signs. ... 47

Chapter VIII. ... Present Tense, Indicative Mood, of

Transitive Verbs ... ... 48 to 50

> Imperfect Tense, Indicative Mood, of

Transitive Verbs ... 51

Examples on the Present and

Imperfect Tenses ... '52

Future Tense with Examples ... 53 to 56

Chapter IX. ... Perfect Tense with Examples ... 57 5<j

Past Tense with Examples ... 60 6^

Pluperfect Tense with Examples ... 64 & 65

VI

PARA. Chapter X. ... Conjugation of Indicative Mood of

Intransitive Verbs ... 66

Difference between Transitive and

Intransitive Verbs ... 67 to 69

Use of the verb dai to be able ... 70

Use of the Imperfect Auxiliary ... 71

Examples on Chapter X ... 72

'Chapter XL ... Subjunctive M(ood ... ... 73

Conditional Mood ... ... 74 to 76

Examples on Subjunctive and

Conditional Moods ,f. « 77

Chapter XII. ... Imperative Mood ... ... 78

Prohibitions... ... ... 79

Invitations ... ... ... 80

Negations ... ... ... 81

Interrogations ... ... 82

Examples on Chapter XII. ... 83

Chapter XIII. ... Participial Forms ... ... 84

Participial Adjectives ... ... 85 & 86

Participial Nouns ... ... 87 to 90

Conjunctive Participles ... ... 91

Chapter XIV. ... Passive Voice with Examples ... 92

Chapter XV. ... Reflexive Verbs ... ... 93 & 94

Reciprocal Verbs ... ... 95 & 9g

Chapter XVI. ... Irregular Verbs— A and Mend ... 97 to 99

Bano ... ... 100

Men and Metd ... 101

Holdo ... ... 102

Kd ... ... 103

t

Chapter XVII. ... Impersonal Verbs with Examples ... 10k to 106

Chapter XVIII. ... Compound Verbs with Examples ... 107,, 110

Chapter XIX. ... Cardinal Numerals ... ... Ill & 112

Ordinal Numerals ... ... 113

Proportional Numerals ... ... 114

Distributive Numerals ... ... 115

Fractional Numerals ... ... 116

Approximations ... •••

Vll

PARA.

('li:i|)t.-r XX. ... Chronology ... ... 118

Months of the Year ... ... 119 & 120

Days of the Week ... ... 121 <fc 122

Parts of the Day ... ... 123

Coins, Weights and Measures ... 124

Points of the Compass ... ... 125

Chapter XXI. ... Separate Postpositions ... ... 126

>

Chapter XXIT. ... Adverbs of Tim* and Place ... 127

Adverbs of Manner ... ... 128

Chapter X.XIII. ... Conjunctions ... ... 129

Interjections... ... ... 130

Miscellaneous Particles ... ... 131

Chapter XXIV. ... Terms of Relationship ... ... 133 to 135

Caste and Tribal Names ... ... 136

Short Pieces for Translation.

English Ho Vocabulary

Ho English Vocabulary

Index.

CHAPTER I.

INTRODUCTION AND QUANTITIES OF VOWULB AND CONSONANTS.

Arc.. riling to Hunter, many of the non-Aryan peoples of India take their tribal designations from their respective words for " man " and, aiming these. //<> is OIK- of the- oldest and most widely spread roots having that in. -aning. At the Census of 11)01, the number of people speaking the llo language \vas returned at 371,860. Five years later, Dr.* (iri'-r.-on estimated the number at' 383,120, and the Census of 1911 showed 420,000. Excluding about 12,000 who have emigrated to Assam and otlW parts as labourers, all these people live in the district of Singhbhnm and in the neighbouring Native States, of which Gangpur «fnd Mourbhanj contain the largest numbers. The habitat of the Hos is, however, the Kolhan Government Estate situated in the south-west of the district of Singhbhum. They are, together with the Mundas of the Hanchi district and the Santals of the Santal Parganas. the principal survivors of an originally compact race of aboriginals which, according to history and tradition, supplied the earliest settlers in the Gangetic« Valley. Compared with the prehistoric tenure of these Kols, as they are commonly called, the Aryan Hindus are intruders of last month, the Mahomedans of last week, and the British of yesterday. The word " Kol " is now a generic term applied to all the aboriginal tribes of Chota Nagpur, including the Uraons, whose language is Dravidian though they belong to the same ethnic stock, and it is impossible to say to which tribe or tribes it should properly be applied. Its origin has been variously derived from the root ho the phonetic change from h to k being very common and the generic suffix li seen in words like Santali and Bengali ; from the Santali hdr a man ; from the Sanskrit kola a pig; from the Kanarese kallar—o. thief ; and from the ordinary Hindi kuli a bearer of burdens. Sir George Campbell had " little doubt " that the latter deri- vation was correct, but Ur. Grierson does not so much as mention it, and it would be idle to speculate between the several alternatives *when such an authority as the latter has said that " we do not know anything really certain about the original meaning of the word." The empire of this primitive race was broken up by the Aryan advance and traces of it may be found in Assam and even in Burma. The main body concentrated on the Chota Nagpur plateau, however, and there found a more or less secure asylum to which other aboriginal tribes subsequently resorted. A portion of the race then moved southward from the higher steppes of the plateau, and eventually established itself in what is now known as the Kolhan after driving out the Bhuias and Jains, who were the first settlers. This

« ( 2 )

offshoot has retained its hold on the same tract of country ever since and is the Ho tribe of to-day. At first, they were nominally subject to the Singh Rajas of Singhbhum and, though they were in fact independent, it was in connection with tho claims to suzerainty urged by these Rajas that the Hos first came into contact with the British. Three attempts to subjugate them had been made previously by various Hindu chiefs, but the Hos had not only repulsed these invasions, but had also pursued a vigorous policy of reprisal on all sides. British expeditions in 1819 and J.821 were more or less successful, but they could not bo followed up owing to more important concern? elsewhere, and the Hos openly dis- regarded their engagements to pay tribute to the Hindu chiefs. They were always in demand where fighting was to be done and we*e never backward in responding to such demands, thus«amply justifying The name of Larkd or fighting Kols which has apparently always been attached to them by foreigners. They naturally took a hand in the Munda insurrec- tion of 1831, and this led to their ultimate subjugation in 1836-37. It was recognised, however, that they could not be forced to submit to the Hindu Rajas and they were therefore brought under the immediate control . of British officers whose administration was based on the indigenous system of village communities under hereditary headmen. That system is still in force and the rules framed in 1837 for the administration of civil justice are still applied every day. The rebellion of the Raja of Porahat during the Mutiny affected a considerable section of the Hos living on the borders of his State the last remnant of fidelity to a quondam suzerain but they were easily subdued and have given no trouble since. The Raja did indeed attempt to tamper with the Hos in the Kolhan proper. When the mutinous sepoys looted the Treasury, it so happened that there was no British officer at Chaibassa. Pending the arrival of Capt. Birch, how- ever, certain loyal Mankis took charge of all Government property in Chaibassa, and it was one of these men who brought Capt. Birch the arrow that was being circulated amongst the Hos as a call to arms by the Raja's agents. Capt. Birch summoned all the Mankis and, by firm and tactful treatment of the situation, regained the waverers and prevented any general outbreak. Cut off from the surrounding Aryans by "radical differences in race, religion and habits of life, the Hos had, even before the advent of the British, always abstained as far as possible from any intercourse with them. Since they have come under British protection, the tide of Aryan aggression, whether mercantile or territorial, which has been responsible au fond for almost all aboriginal risings, has been kept 'back, and the natural inclinations of the Hos towards exclusiveness have been sedulously fostered. They have thus advanced from barbarism to comparative civilization under more favourable conditions than their

( 3 )

•intes of Chota Nagpur. Their progress has not linen retarded by the disturbing element of a prejudiced foreign domination in the most ordinary occupations of life, nor have they, a* a whole, come into close contact in other respects with the Aryan races. This, while it has probably resulted in the intellectual backwardness evidenced by an obtuseness that is often extremely irritating, has also preserved certain moral qualities, such as independence of character and a strong sense of sell'-iv^pect, which appeal peculiarly to the British imagination. As communications improve and mutual enlightenment progresses, this polic/ of isolation is, however, becoming not only more anachronistic, but also more difficult to enforce in practice. It must in all probability be aban- doned eventually, but it may be possible to maintain it long enough to enable education to perform For the Hos the same service as the hard hi-hool of experience has rendered to the Mundas and the Uraons of the Ranchi district who are now able to hold their own with the more advanced Aryan races. Meanwhile, as the Census figures show, the Hos are far from being a dying race and, as the number speaking Ho only falls short of the total number in the tribe by less than two thousand, it is evident that there is no immediate danger of their language, disappearing.

2. The language spoken by the Hos is a Munda or Kolarian dialect to which Mundari and Santali are nearly allied. The use of the word " Kolarian " in this connection is objected to by scientific writers, such as Miiller and Grierson, who prefer, and employ, the word " Munda." The former is perhaps too wide because the Dravidian Uraons are included among the Kols, but the latter is certainly too narrow because the Mundas are only one among several tribes using these dialects. The words in every language are made up of roots expressive of primary ideas, and inflections used with those roots to indicate various modifying rela- tionships. The degree of cohesion between these two components, known also as predicative and demonstrative roots or radical and formal elements, varies from mere juxtaposition to complete amalgamation, and is the basis on wlych languages are classified for the purposes of comparative philo- logy. In the earliest stage, known variously as the Radical or Isolating Stage, the inflections are themselves roots capable of being used as independent words, and undergoing no phonetic change when joined to other roots to effect modifications of the primary ideas expressed by such roots. The inflections are either prefixed or affixed to the root and may bear a different meaning from that which they have when used alone , although no alteration takes place in their form. The Chinese language is still in this stage and is, as Max Miiller puts it, language comme il faut.

. ( 4 )

The next step, known as the Agglutinative or Terminational Stage, occurs when the inflections have lost their meaning as separate words b*y a process which is known as ': phonetic decay." The roots are still complete words to which the inflections are agglutinated in order to express modifications of the primary ideas such as are signified, for example, by our declensions and conjugations. The root and its several inflections can, however, be readily distinguished and the whole word reduced to its component parts at a glance. The Turkish language te agglutinative, and so also are most of the Austro-Asiatic family of languages of which the Munda or rlolarian group is a member. The Organic or Inflectional Stage is reached when, by a further process of phonetic decay, inflections have not only lost their original forms as separate words, but have become so completely incorporated ^vith the root which they modify as to be no longer capable of identification and separa* tion into their original forms except by skilled philological analysis. In the more advanced languages of this stage, the laws governing phonetic changes in the interests of euphony are in full operation and affect both the primary root and the secondary inflection. All trace of the inflection .is gradually lost, and with it goes the modification of sense effected by it, until eventually additional roots have to be utilised to retain these modi- fications, the most advanced languages being thus made to resemble those

7 O O O

in the earliest stage of development. Examples of organic languages are Greek, Latin, Bengali, Hindi and English.

3. It would be beyond the scope of this work to attempt to catalogue the principal characteristics of each of the three morphological classes into which languages are divided. This would in fact be impracticable because there is no definite line of demarcation between one stage and another, and because the characteristics of two languages in the same stage may differ widely according as they approximate to an earlier or a later stage of development. The most that could be done in any case is to give the characteristics of the various language families in each stage, but, for present purposes, we need only consider the Munda or Kolarian group of the Austro-Asiatic family. As already stated, this group belongs tto the agglutinative stage, and it may be added that it is nearer the isolating than the organic stage. Its principal characteristics are :

(I) Unchangeable primary roots, generally monosyllabic, which can be used as nouns, verbs or adjectives.

(II) The modification of these roots by constant inflections or

secondary roots, many of which have lost the power of separate existence, the various relationships thus expressed

( 5 )

equivalent to those signified bv the declensions and conjugations of more advanced hin^ua-

(III) Three nuinhers singular, dual and plural and a distinction

between animate beings and inanimate objects correspond- ing to, hut not coinciding with, the gender of organic languages.

(IV) Two forms for personal pronouns foil and shortened or

separate and snffixeoj each of which is used in accordance with definite rules.

'(V) Two further forms for the first personal pronouns, one of which includes, while the other excludes, the person addressed.

(VI) Absence of relative pronouns, accompanied by extensive use of participial forms.

(VII) Expression of direct and indirect objects by pronominal signs which are infixed in the verb.

(VIII) Use of postpositions instead of prepositions to indicate rela- tions of time and space.

(IX) Comparative inaction of the laws of euphony which, in any case, only affect the inflections or secondary roots and leave the primary roots intact.

•4. As adults can seldom catch sounds by the ear alone, experts are agreed^that, in studying a living language, the initial step is to determine familiar phonetic signs which will represent accurately and invariably the different sounds of that language. In the case of an unwritten language such as Ho, it is not a question of finding Roman equivalents for existing characters, but literally one of representing sounds by familiar Roman letters. It does not really matter very much what system is adopted for this purpose, as long as it correctly represents the original sounds and is consistently used. All officials will approach Ho rid the departmental vernacular examinations, and to them the method of spelling adopted in this work will present no difficulties. As regards others, the following notes on the quantities of vowels and consonants will help them to pronounce, with a fair degree of accuracy, Ho words seen for the first time in Roman characters, and will also enable them to reduce to familiar letters similar words heard for the first time in conversation. It is, I am aware, dangerous to dogmatise about the quantities of vowels and consonants without some knowledge of

( 6 )

phonetics which teach one, not only how to pronounce, but also to Ifear accurately, and record correctly, what is spoken in an unknown language. Such knowledge cannot, however, be acquired readily, and I do not expect therefore to be able to give anything more than an imperfect practical guide to the sounds heard in the Ho language. It is besides evident that, in the matter of phonetic pronunciation, there is considerable latitude for personal opinion between, on the one hand, the extreme of over-elaboration involving possible confusion and unnecessary labour, and, on the other, that of excessive simplicity incurring a risk of inadequacy. The Ho language will not be studied for literary purposes and, so far as speaking is concerned, teaching by a Ho is so infinitely more effective tha^t there is nothing to be gained by a complicated system of notation in, a grammar.

5. There are six simple Vowel sounds in Ho which may be re- presented by the letters a, a, e, i, o, and u.

A is equivalent to the sound of " a " in " rural ", and occurs in ape three, hambal heavy, and tasad grass.

A equals the " a " in " father," and occurs in dji elder sister,

Idndd to laugh, and bd a flower. This is the only vowel that need be inflected in representing the vowel sounds of the Ho language.

E equals the " e " in " grey ", and occurs in engd mother, sen or seno to go, and hende black.

/ equals the " i " in ;: police ", and occurs in ir to reap, lijd cloth, and giti to sleep. It is perhaps open to question whether a shorter sound equal to the " i " in u in " does not rfccur in some words such as iril eight, and ginil a wall, but I think that the longer one is the proper sound in all such words. The first " i " in ini that person, and in ir to rub, is certain- ly short, but this is exceptional and the sound is too rare to

justify the adoption of a separate sign to represent it,

i 0 equals the "o" in " no ", and occurs in ondo and, lolo hot,

and bo the head.

V equals the " u " in " rule ", and occurs in ub hair, sukuri a pig, and busu straw.

6. Besides these simple sounds, there are certain other vowel sounds which may be represented by combined Roman vowels or diphthongs. According to Hoffman, though any two vowels may stand side by side in Mundari, each retains its original sound, fusion of two vowels into a new

( 7 )

soun 1 never occurring. Such fusion doos occur in I ID, MI- rather, to jmt the matter in :i logical manner, there aro vowel sounds in the I ID language which cannot be represented \>y any of tlie six simple vowel equivalent! nor by any two of them pronounced separately.

,!/ eijtials the " ai " in "aisle", and occurs in ainl —evening, / lift

to work, and sadai common.

*

An equals the " ou " in " out ", and occurs in ami not yet, Liulnin to be in a hurry, and bauu elder brother.

Oi equals the " oy " in " oyster", and occurs in oidr to swim, hoio the wind, and moi to bud.

7. All other complex vowel sounds can be split up into single vowels and represented by the appropriate Roman equivalents. There is no necessity to employ a diaeresis to indicate that such equivalents are to be pronounced with separate efforts of the voice because all combinations other than ou, an, and oi must be so pronounced. Examples are der to precede, aed seven, 2(i yes, oe a bird, od a house, tumid six, did a lamp, kuam the chest, ked to call, and meang the day after tomorrow. It will thus be seen that the law of harmony of vowels, which operates so strongly in English, is not of any great importance in Ho. Euphonic elisions do occur occasionally, but, as already explained, the idiom of an agglutinative language requires that secondary roots acting, for example, the part of case and tense-suffixes shall not in any way affect the primary root; and when an agglutinative language is but little removed, as Ho is, from the isolating stage, the primary roots do not act phonetically on the secondary roots either to any extent.

8. Turning to the Consonants, the sounds ordinarily represented by the Roman letters c, f, q, v, w, x, y and z, either do not exist or are adequately represented by other consonants. Thus, s represents the sound of " c" in " cistern," and k that of " c " in " cold ". Ch pronounced as in " chimney " is, however, common, but the " ch " in " chord "'must be rendered by k. According to the ordinarily accepted system of translit- eration, " f " must always be rendered by ph. The sound does not, however, exist in proper Ho words, and, in such Hindi words as have been adopted into the language, the aspirate has been dropped, e. <i. pliaujddri criminal, and phursat leisure, become in Ho paujddri and pursat respectively. The nearest approach to the sound of " x " in " box " is represented by the ks in the Hindi loan-word mtksdn to destroy. The sound does not exist in any indigenous word so far as I know, nor do those indicated by " v ", " w " and " z ". A sound similar to the familiar

( 8 )

"y " does undoubtedly oxist in many Ho words. Whitley uses it in. the spelling of all Mundari words where the sound can be traced, e. g. he writes dyub evening, deyd the back, diyd a lamp, lioyo the wind, and tuyu a jackal. Hoffman says that " y " is rare, but adds that it is used instead of " e " where the latter occurs between two vowels. He cites loyonq (Mundari for ' a rice field ') as an example, but at page 34 of his «" Mundari Grammar with Exercises Part I " he renders the same word loeony, and he spells all the examples given above without the " y".

* DeSmet has no rule on the subject, but generally omits the " y " except in the Mundari word for the numeral " one " which he spells both moiad and moyad. This example shows clearly that, if oi is pronounced as in para. 6 above, both renderings will be spoken alike. Tn the samo way, the "y" sound in other words may be represented by the conjunction of two vowels. For example, both Hoffman and DeSmet write tuiu (a jackal) and not tuyu. There is no Ho word beginning with the sound of " y " and this makes it certain that the sound is foreign to Ho except in so far as it is caused by the conjunction of two or more vowels. I have there- fore refrained from using the consonant " y " at all and experience will, I

' think, show the reader that perfectly correct pronunciations of the following examples are obtained by spelling them as I have done, and as both Hoffman and DeSmet do in several instances : aiub evening, did a lamp, doed the back, hoio the wind, moid five, maiom blood, meang the day after tomorrow, sded to breathe, taiom after, and tuiu a jackal. This method of spelling results in vowels coming together in a manner which would be repugnant to organic languages, but which, as explained in para. 7, is natural in an agglutinative language.

9. All the other English consonants occur and do not call for any special mention except in the following cases :

D and t without any diacritical marks are pure dentals, and occur in dub to sit, idi to take, teng to weave, and giti to

sleep.

J? and t are cerebrals, and occur in dudi a bridge, hende black, tote to shoot, andjete sunshine. This distinction should be carefully attended to from the beginning as it may sometimes make all the difference in the meaning of a sentence, e.g. med— -the eye, and med iron, seta a dog, and seta morning.

G always represents the " g " in " gate ", and occurs in geled ten, sengel fire, and idang dawn. The sound of " g " in " gem " is represented by ;' as in jodr to greet.

( 9 )

// i< sounded ut the be^innin^ of Ho words, r. </. her (to sow) :md not , •/-. /il.sl (twenty) and not /.-•/', hut not in tho middle, ,-../. /'/ (u feather) and not /A/7. Such words as <///-///('/>///• (west; and MiiAorrf (to journey) are obviotu compounds, tin- element- of which must retain their original form. Similarly, loan-words taken from other vernaculars retain the initial " h ", Imt drop the one in the middle, e.<j. lu'ijir to be present, and ImLinn to order, but kdn'i a story, and mdri<i—a. water-course, instead of the Hindi forms k<i/i<ini and nin/turid. This applies to the* aspirate standing by itselt. When compounded with another consonant, it is, with one exception, dropped in loan-words, e.;/. ij/Ktr becomes ijdr to take evidence, phaujddri becomes IKinjddri criminal, thik becomes tik proper, and ndlisli becomes ndlis to bring a case. The single exception is ch pronounced as in para. 8, the sound of which occurs both in indigenous and exotic words, e.g. chanab the end, cJiauli rice, kecho tiles, and pichd to follow.

N may be noticed in connection with a common diacritical sign, the effect of which is exactly the same as that of the Bengali chandrabindu, i.e., the preceding vowel is strongly nasalized. Thus, dyr a yoke, pena'm a weaver, and rdrisd to rejoice.

l\ the cerebral ' r ' does not occur in Ho and is elided from all Mundari words in their Ho form. Thus, horo becomes ho a man, ord becomes od a house, and a rand i becomes dandi to marry. The ordinary ' r ' is retained, however, as in diri a stone, herel a husband, and uri cattle.

10. The checked vowels common to all Kolarian languages are thus described by Hoffman : " The pronunciation of a vowel, commenced in the ordinary way, is suddenly checked by a rapid partial contraction of the muscles used in its formation, and then, by a relaxation of those muscles, the breath or sound is allowed to flow out without receiving any furthot modulation. This process gives to the vowel the soun^ of two vowels of which the first is very distinct, smart and short, whereas the second sounds somewhat like a slight short echo of the first." These checked vowels undoubtedly occur in Ho, and the question is whether a distinct diacritical mark should bo adopted to indicate them. Whitley, DeSmet and Hoffman each uses a different sign for this purpose, but they are not consistent in its application, and it seems to me that, in a usage of ' this sort, which is not regulated by ascertained rules, and which is in fact applied arbitrarily by the people themsolvo.s, it is bolter to do without any

( 10 )

diacritical sign. In words, such as huju (to come) and da (water), which are in every-day use, this peculiar pronunciation will be readily acquired by the student, but further progress can only be made very gradually, and the use of a diacritical sign will, if he pays any attention to it, only make the beginner's difficulties more acute without being of any real assistance to him. I may add that I never paid much attention to

these checked vowels, except in the commonest words, and that I had no

difficulty in making myself understood. Nor have I ever met anybody knowing either Mundari or Ho whose practice and experience were not the same. The only cases in which* the matter is really of practical importance occur in the spelling of words which differ entirely in meaning, but only slightly in sound, according as a checked vowel is used or not. For example, rd pronounced ordinarily means "to* untie", but pronounced with the vowel checked as described above, it means " tt> cry ". In all such cases, the difficulty may be circumvented by spelling the checked vowel phonetically, the word meaning " to cry " being rendered rda. Further examples are d (the mouth) and da (to release), bau (to mould) and bauu (elder brother), uru (a beetle) and uruu (to remember).

CHAPTER II.

GENDER, NUMBER AND CASE.

11. In Ho, the ordinary grammatical distinction between Genders is replaced by the distinction between Animate and Inanimate Objects. The fact that any particular noun denotes a male or a female being does not affect the construction of a sentence, but the question whether it denotes an animate or inanimate object is of material importance in that connection. As a rule, the same word expresses both the masculine and the feminine, as, e.g. sddom meaning either a stallion or a mare, sim either a cock or a hen, and kuld either a tiger or a tigress ; but, if an explicit designation of sex is desired, this can be secured by prefixing the words sdndi and engd, as, e.g. sdndi sim (a cock) and engd sim (a fowl). Sometimes the feminine form is indicated by a separate word, as, e.g. Mrd (a bullock) and gundi (a cow). Again, the words ho and kod (masculine) and era and kui (feminine) are used sometimes to indicate the sex of animate beings, as, e.g. ddsi ho (a male servant) and ddsi era (a

( 11 )

servant), AW Aon (a son) and kuili»n (a daughter^. The masculine and feminine forms for the common animals are as follows :

A dog A cat A goat

MASCULINE. sdndi seta sand i bil<ii (or) pusi

FBHININR. ... enyd Sftd.

. . . 1'ni/d I'i/'ii (or) putt.

A sheep ,

i

A buffalo

A buffalo calf., A cow calf A capon

A pig

baidd merom (castrated) ... paled merom (one that has

not had kids.)

bodd merom (uncastrated)... engd merom. rudd merom ( )...

baidd mindi (castrated) ... pated mindi (as above).

rudd mindi ) ., , . ,.

> (uncastrated) enya mindi.

yorrd mindi * sdndi kerd

sdndi kerd hon ddmkom miu yaid sim

baidd sukuri (castrated)

enyd kerd (or) bitkil. nauki kerd (one that has not calved). enyd kerd lion.

petan miu.

kdluti sim (one that has not laid eggs).

kdluti sukuri (one that has not farrowed). engd sukuri.

The 'only other words denoting sex are the various terms of rela- tionship which will be dealt with later (Vide Chap. XXIV).

12. The distinction between animate and inanimate objects regulates the use of Number in nouns, pronouns and verbs. " Animate" is not synonymous with " living " because it only covers animal and intellectual, and not natural, life. Thus trees, flowers and plants are treated as inani- mate. Nor does it exclude all " neuter " nouns, because celestial bodies, such as the sun, moon and stars, and natural phenomena, such as lightning, rain and wind, are classed as animate objects.

13. There are three Numbers in Ho the Singular, the Dual and the Plural. The Singular is always the original root, to which the suffixes kiny and ko are added to form the Dual and Plural respectively. This only takes place in the case of nouns denoting animate objects. E.y. ko a man, liokiny two men, lioko three or more men ; ipd a star,

( 12 )

ipilking two stars, ipilko three or more stars ; but ddru one or more trees according to the context.

Note— Nouns denoting family relations insert te before the Dual and Plural suffixes, e.g. misi a younger sister, misiteking two younger sisters, misteko younger sisters.

14. The dual and plural suffixes may only be used with inanimate * nouns when it is desired especially to emphasise the number of objects

indicated. This is, however, uncommon and the form of the verb is not in any event affected. In Mundari, the plural suffix is used in enumera- tions of inanimate objects, as, e.g. Bulungko tamdkuko ad chauliko kiringeme. Buy salt, tobacco and rice. This usage is permissible in Ho, but is not usual, the common form for the same sentence being either Bulung, sukul ondo chauli kiringeme or Bulling, sukul, chauliko kiringeme.

15. Apart from the use implied by its meaning, the Dual Number is employed as a general sign of respect among the Hos. I believe that its use was originally confined to the father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, sister-in-law (husband's elder sister or younger brother's wife), and brother-in-law (husband's elder brother or younger sister's husband), but it is now used in addressing, in the presence of others, any relative to whom it is desired to show respect, e.g. a wife or a mother. Outside relatives, the dual is also employed, as an acquired usage, to express respect among the Hos themselves. A Ho will address any European of position in the second person singular with the addition of Gomke (master), but will usually, though not necessarily, address a clerk in the dual it' the latter is a Ho. If he is a Mahomedan or a Hindu, he will be addressed in the singular. The only Indians whom a Ho will address as Gomke are those whom he is actually serving.

16. The Case-suffixes of organic languages such as Latin do not exist in Ho, but the same relations between words are obtained bv the use oE compounds consisting of the root and an added postposition. The effect of these postpositions is to produce forms which are in all essentials' the equivalents of organic cases, and which can therefore be used in the declension of nouns.

( 13 ) CHAPTER III.

ADDED POSTPOSITIONS SIMPLE AND COMPOUND.

17. Postpositions are for all practical purposes the same as preposi- tions, the only difference being, as is implied by their name, that they are phuvd after the word they are USIM! with. Tim [.resent chapter treaty only of those postpositions which are joined to the preceding word so as to form a new compound with a distinct moaning, i. e. which perform the * function of declensional inflections.

SIMPLE POSTPOSITIONS.

>

(i) A is one of the Genitive Case signs and indicates either the Possessive or the Partitive Genitive, i. e. a relation either of ownership or of component parts. Pdtord hon Pa tor's son. Kdnded od Kande's house. Bdyx/id ti Bagun's hand. Meromd ub The goat's hair. Ddrud sakam The leaves of the tree.

Note The partitive relationship may also be expressed without the use of this postposition. Thus, in the last two examples, Merom ub and Ddru sakam would be equally correct, as would Ddrured sakam (see asii below) also.

(it) Re is the Locative of Rest indicating primarily the place or time at which something occurs. Its meaning must not, however, be restricted to the equivalent of the English " in ".

Ne hdture Mundd tainde The Munda lives in this village. , Ape chdndure Somd rudde Soma will return In three

months. Sddomte komoro ememe Put the blanket on the horse.

(6) Re is also used to signify price and is then equivalent to " for ".

Jdi tdkdre moi pati chaitlhn tidnied For one rupee you will get ten seers (one pati equals two seers) of rice.

Bar fikire ne lijde klringkedd He bought this cloth for eight annas (one siki equals four annas).

(tit) Td and Pd are also Locatives of Rest indicating the place where something occurs, but are rarely found in their simple forms. Td denotes the exact spot, while pd indicates proxi- mity generally and is comparatively indefinite.

Ale bdndd baikedtd kuld gititande The tiger is sleeping

where we made the bdndh.

i

Aivd od Dongolpd mend My house is in the vicinity of Chaibassa.

Note In both these sentences, the compound postpositions tare and pare (see below) would have beeii equally correct and would be more generally employed.

(iv) Te is the Locative of Motion and indicates motion towards a particular point.

Aind lijdred-odte ne did idieme Take this lamp to my tent.

Marang Gomke Chakdte holde senoeand The Deputy Com- missioner (literally, " the big master ") went to Chakarda- pore yesterday.

(b) Te is also the Instrumental Case sign and indicates the agency or means by, with or through, which any act is done. When the agent is a human being, the separate postposition hordte is used. (Vide Chap. XXI).

Relte ondo dongdte kuliko Asdmteko senod Coolies go to Assam by rail and by boat.

Tite Hoko mdndiko jomed The Hos eat cooked rice with their hands.

Kdldte urue tegdgoekid He crushed the beetle with his foot. « t

Urihote ne disumrenko sied The inhabitants of this country

plough with cattle.

\ " Hdsutee rdatand He is crying on account of the pain.

(c) Te is further used to signify price in the same way as re. It is really more logical to use te than re in this connec- tion because, if the relationship between the words is analysed, it will be found to be nothing more than the instrumental.

Moi tdkdtt Ddso ndmd mine kiringkid Daso bought a new calf for five rupees.

( 15 )

(w) Lo does not correspond to any caso sign. It denotes associa- tion or combination either at rest or in motion and is used with animate nouns only.

Mnktd Pdsingloe hujulend Mukta came with Pasing. Ainglo netdre tainmd Remain with mo in this place.

COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS.

(<•/) Ete is the Ahlative Case sign and indicates motion away from

a definite place.

*

Tamdreteng hujuakand I have come from Tamar.

» Kerdko pieteko adeand The buffaloes strayed from the > maidan (pi either an open plain or high-lying terraced o cultivation).

(6) Used in relation to time, ete may be translated by " since," « from the time of", " for ".

Jidtdtdete lloko bir aminkete oteko bated From the time of their ancestors, the Hos have cleared the forest and made cultivated land.

Holdete kding jomtadd I have not eaten since yesterday.

(c) Ete is also used to express comparison, but this will be dealt with in a subsequent chapter (Vide Chap. V).

(vie) Pdre is the Locative of Rest like re, but is indefinite as compared with the latter.

Amd hdtu okonpdred Whereabouts (in what direction) is your village ?

Dongolpdreng taind, mendo odtaing Chakdreo mend I live somewhere near Ohaibassa, but I also have a house in Chakardapore.

(vm) Pdte Bears the same relation to te as pdre does to re, i. e. it

, indicates the Indefinite Locative of Motion towards*.

>

Okonpdtee senoeand In what direction did he go P Birpdtee nireand He ran towards the forest. (i.«) Pdete similarly indicates indefinitely motion away from.

Okonpdeteko hujulend From whereabouts did they come ? -Kavchipdete From somewhere near Ranchi.

Note ^s mentioned in sub-head (m) above, td is the definite form of pd. Tdre, tdte and tdete are therefore equivalent

V 16 )

respectively to the simple forms re, te and ete as expressing rest in, motion towards or motion away from, a definite place ; and they are in fact so used occasionally, especially with participial clauses, e.g. Bdbdko iretantdte ainglo hujume Come with me to the place where they are cutting paddy. Owing pro- ( bably to possible confusion with the forms mentioned

in sub-head (.?) below, tare, tdte and tdete are not, however, used in this sense with single nouns denot- ing space or place.

(#) Tare tdte and tdete are ordinarily used with precisely Che same connotation as re, te and ete in connection only with nouns and pronouns denoting animate objects. The td seems to be equivalent to the Hindi pas.

Aletdre isu purd bdbd mend With us there is very much paddy, i.e. We have a great deal of paddy.

Gomketdte ned entorsd idieme Take this to the master at once.

i Gurucharan Penaintdete mindiking kumbukid. The two men

* stole a sheep from Gurucharan Tanti.

(6) Tare and tdte are also used to indicate an animate indirect object when the latter is not expressed in the verb, tare being used when motion is not implied. (Vide rule in Note 4 to para. 47). For example, " He gave me medicine " may be translated Aingtdre rede emkedd or aing rede emadingd. This point will be better under- stood after the verb has been studied.

(xi) lien is the Locative Genitive Case sign used only with nouns denoting animate objects. The relation is one of place so to speak, and the postposition is equivalent to " dwelling in ", t " belonging to ".

. . ' Hdturen ho or hdtureni A man belonging to the village.

* Gardren hdkuko Fishes dwelling in the river, i. e. river fish.

(6) Ren may also be rendered by " worth ", " aged ", " measuring ", in connection with animate nouns.

Hisi tdkdren gundi A cow worth 20 Rs. Turui sirmdren sitid A child six years old.

Upun mukdren kuld A tiger measuring six feet (mukd equals half a yard roughly).

(<•) I'm is also equivalent to "the wife of". This is really only a variety of the Locative Genitive, the wife bein^ considered as belonging to the husband.

A/ J>«i-i<ir,n era or Boredreni This is the wife of Bonn.

) /it -d forms the Locative Genitive of inanimate nouns only. //.i/ in-, ii mi Tin- houses of the village. ii,trdr,d (id The water of the river.

(h) Jted signifies worth, age, dimension and material in relation to inanimate objects.

.]/«'/ tdkdrfd dndu An anklet worth 5 Rs.

>

/.<n sinndrt-d jojo ddrn A very old tamarind tree. Munngred hard A day's journey. Kddsomred pin da A dhoti made of cotton.

(<•) Red meaning "regarding", " concerning ", "about", is attached both to animate and inanimate nouns in the same form.

Sddomred kdji A story regarding the horse. Paulusred kitdb A book about Paulus. Otered darkds A petition concerning land.

CHAPTER IV.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

18. With the help of the postpositions dealt with in the preceding chapter, we can now decline Ho nouns y> the manner familiar to those whose knowledge of grammar is based on the forms of organic languages. The number of cases is large, but against this may be set the fact that there is, so to speak, only one declension.

CASES. CASE-SUFFIXES. ANIMATE NOUNS. INANIMATE NOUNS.

Nominative root ... gomke, a (or the) mas- gard, a (or the)

ter ... river. '

Accusative root ... gomke, a master ... gard, a river.

Dative

t root ... gomke

\ fdre, tdte (with gomketdre

animate nouns gomketdte

where indirect

object is not

included in the

verb.)

to a master

GASES.

CASE-SUFFIXES. ANIMATE NOUNS. INANIMATE NOUNS.

Instrumen- te (with animate gomke hordte, by or gardte, by or

tal

nouns other than persons and with a 1 1 inanimate nouns)

through the agency of a master.

through means of a river.

f Definite ete, tdete gomketdete, f r o m a gardete, f r o m a

Ablative.,

master.

river.

* Indefinite pdete gontkepdete, from the gardpdete, from the vicinity of a master. vicinity of a

Genitive.

Possessive a

river.

»

Partitive o

. gomked, of or belong-

.

ing to a master. gardd, of or form-

. gomked, of or forming < ing part of a part of a master. river.

, gardren, (animate

Locative ren, red, gomkeren, (the wife) J objects) of a of a master. J river.

gardred, (inani- mate objects) of

Locative of \ Rest (

Definite re, tare... gomketdre, in (with) a master.

a river. gardre, in a river.

Indefinite pare ... gomkepdre, in the vi- gardpdre, in the cinity of a master. vicinity of a

river.

Locative of ( Definite te, tdte... gomketdte,toa.msi9ter, gardte, to a river. Motion ... ( Indefinite pdte ... gomkepdte, to the vici- gardpdte, to the vi-

nity of a master. cinity of a river*

Vocative... ated,ate

ated gomke, 0 master

19. The above is of course only the singular number, but it is un- necessary to decline the dual and plural numbers at length. In the case of animate nouns, the dual and plural signs (king and ko) are added to the roots before the postpositions, the latter remaining precisely the same as in the singular number, e. g. gomkeking, two masters ; gomkekingd, of or belonging to two masters ; gomkekopdete, from the vicinity of three or more masters. In the case of inanimate nouns, the dual and plural numbers are exactly the same as the singular.

CHAPTER V.

ADJECTIVES AND THEIR COMPARISON.

20. There is no Article in Ho. The context must show in each case whether the definite or indefinite article is to be used in translating a Ho sentence into English, e. <i. /«>// gnjotnmie may mean either " a child is dying " or " the child is dying". The numeral miad (one) is often* prefixed to a noun with the force of an indefinite article. This is especially the case in narratives. E. g. Musing betar miad ho (mido) luikend Once upon a time there was a certain man.

21. > Ho adjectives are invariable, i. e. they are not affected by the gender or num'»er of the noun they qualify. E. g. Bugin dpu a good father ; bugin engd a good mother ; bugin engdkodpuko good fathers and mothers.

22. Most Ho adjectives may without any change of form be used as nouns or verbs, or, to put the matter in its correct sequence, the original root can be used as a verb, noun or adjective without the addi- tion of any secondary root to denote that its meaning has been altered. Thus, hende to blacken, blackness, and black ; chakad to deceive, deceit, and deceitful.

JWote As adjectives are necessarily limited to words denoting qualities, and as the words etkan (bad) and bugin (good) are used so as to embrace most vices and virtues, the operation of this rule is more common as between nouns and verbs, e. g. od a house, to make a house ; jdrom an egg, to lay an egg. Other parts of speech may be used as verbs in the same way. Thus, ed (yes) means also " to agree ", j>drom (across) means also " to cross " and der (before) means also " to precede ". This trans- ferability is one of the features of the language and is extremely useful in practice.

23. Adjectives do, however, undergo a change of form softietimes, though such cases must be regarded as exceptional. Thus the suffixes n and an are added to a few verbs and nouns to form adjectives. E. g. etkd (to be bad) becomes etkan (bad) ; gonong (price, value) becomes gonongan (valuable) ; bisi (poison) becomes bisian (poisonous^; and pe (strength) becomes pean (strong).

Rote A similar n is occasionally used to form nouns from verb roots, the n being inserted after the first vowel which is then repeated. Considering how simple this method is,

( 20 )

it is strange that it is not more resorted to, the expla- nation being probably that the aboriginal mind not only cannot rise to abstractions, but is unable to think even of concrete things apart from the actions which give rise to them. The only common examples of the usage referred to are onol (a writing) from ol (to write) ; handling (a « share) from hating (to divide) ; gonoe (death) from goe

(to kill) ; enete (a beginning) from ete (to begin) ; kenesed (an obstruction) from fcesed (to impede) ; ranakab (a steep slope) from rakab (to climb) ; handrub (a cover) from hdrub (to cover) ; chanab (an end) from chdbd (to finish) ; and randpid Can eyelid) from rapid (to blink).

24. A large class of words equivalent to English adjectives «?s formed from verb roots by the addition of the tense-suffixes. These are participial forms and will be better understood when that branch of the subject is reached (vide Chap. XIII).

25. The Comparison of Adjectives is effected in a way very similar to that familiar in Hindi. The comparative degree is formed by adding the ablative case-sign ete to the noun with which the comparison is made, and the superlative degree is formed by prefixing the adjective saben (all) to the compound formed by the addition of ete to the object of comparison. In neither case does the adjective take any suffix as in English.

Kuiete ho marangd A man is bigger than a woman. Kerdete sddom dnjdtee nired A horse runs faster than a buffalo. En ddruete ned salangid This tree is higher than that one. . Saben joete uli bugind The mangoe is the best of all fruits. Sabenkoete Somd Idndidd Soma is the laziest of all. Sabenete ne kdpi leserd This axe is the sharpest of all.

CHAPTER VI.

PRONOUNS.

I— PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

26. All the personal pronouns have two forms which may be called the Full Form and the Shortened Form respectively. Hoffman has an abstruse discussion as to which of these forms is the original one in Mundari. I do not propose to follow him into the intricacies of the question, because the consideration that seems to me to militate entirely against the conclusion he comes to is the fact that the shortened form is

I 21 )

parasitical and that, whenever the various personal pronouns stand by tlieinselves, the full form must bo used. The question is, however, a more or less academic one and, for all practical purposes, it will suffice to know when each form should be used.

27. Before enumerating these forms for each of the three personal pronouns, it may be as well to explain that the dual and plural numbers of the first personal pronoun are further sub-divided into two distinct forms which may be called the Inclusive and the Exclusive respectively.* It is strange that a primitive language should, in this respect, be more precise than our modern tongues, but the fact remains that the En^li>li pronoun*" wo" takes four distinct forms in Ho. The beginner will be well-advised *o get into the habit early of using these forms instead of the vague " we." They are as follows :

The Inclusive Dual denotes the speaker and the person addressed, and is equivalent to " thou and I" or "you and 1" according to the form which usage has sanctioned.

The Exclusive Dual denotes the speaker and some third person other . than the person addressed, and is equivalent to " he and I " or " she and I."

The Inclusive Plural denotes the speaker and two or more persons addressed, and is equivalent to "you and I."

The Exclusive Plural denotes the speaker and two or more third prrsons other than the person addressed, and is equivalent to " they and I."

28. The full and shortened forms of the personal pronouns may now be noticed.

Full- Form.

( Indus, alang, thou & I ... abu, you & I. 1st Person ani<i, I {

I Exclus. almif, he or she & I aleftaej & I.

Shortened Form.

SING. DUAL. PLURAL.

Indus, alang, thou & I ... abu, you & I.

if,

2nd ,, a in, thou ... al>en, you two ... ape, you.

3rd <(/', he or she... aking, they two ...«/•<», they.

f Indus, lam/, thou & I ... bit, you & I. 1st Person ing, I I _, ' , ,., VPTJ iv AT

I Exclus. liny, he or she & I le, they & I.

2nd m, em, me, thou ben, you two ... pe, you. 3rd i, he or she ... king, they two ... ko, they.

( 22 )

It appears therefore that the shortened Form is obtained by the elision of the initial a from the full form, or, if Hoffman's view is correct, that the full form is obtained by prefixing an a to the shortened form, which, in that event, might properly be called the simple form.

29. The uses of these two forms are most important. The full

form is used (t) when the pronominal subject of a sentence is to be

*emphasised, e. g. in answer to the question Ned okoe rdpudkedd who

« broke this ? a Ho would say aing rdpudkedding I broke it, If he was

merely making a statement of fact»in the course of a narrative, he would

say rdpudkedding only (see below under shortened form).

(ii) Whenever a pronoun is declined, i. e. whenever* it is used

in connection with the added postpositions dealt with in a preceding chapter.

Amtdteng dgued I will bring it to you.

Aid od hdndiakand His house has fallen down.

Aletdete jdnd kdam ndmed You will not get anything from us.

(Hi) When a pronoun stands as an indirect object and is inserted in the verb. In such cases, the full form becomes a suffix, but it is only used as such to avoid confusion with the direct pronominal object for which the shortened form is inserted. The sentence " I will give you a horse" may be translated Amtdte sd doming emid or Am sddowinq emamd. The second rendering illustrates the inserted indirect object and the first the inserted direct object, the indirect object being expressed by the dative case (c./. para. 17 (#) and Note 4 to para. 47).

Note The above rule only holds good for the present, imperfect and future tenses of the Indicative Mood, and for the Impera- tive, Subjunctive and Conditional Moods.

The shortened form is used (z) when a pronoun stands as the subject of a sentence. The Ho idiom requires that a pronominal subject must be suffixed either to the verb or to the word immediately preceding it, and it is for this purpose that the shortened form is used. E. g. Huju- tanding. I am coming ; gapding hujud. I will come tomorrow. The following rules should be noted in this connection :

(a) The singular of the first personal pronoun contracts to ng after words ending in e. E. g. Dongolteng senotand I am going to Chaibassa. This is a purely phonetic change, and there is nothing to account for it being limited to this vowel beyond the fact that the law of harmony of vowels

( 23 )

is generally inoperative in agglutinative languages and that any I'vitli-no' of its action imi.-t be regarded as exceptional.

(/>) The singular of the second personal pronoun is regulated by the following considerations :

(1) The shortened form 7/1 is used when the verb, or the word preceding it, ends in a vowel, its effect being to % alter a long vowel into a short one. E. y. Goletanam you are whistling ; choiiuin hujnd when will you *

come ? The vowel does not shorten when the word preceding the verb is the negative kd, nor is the

shortened form of the pronoun used. The compound is always rendered kdant, the second a being pronounced very lightly.

(2) The form em is used when the verb, or the word preceding it, ends in a consonant. E. g. Ne sunvmem lenledd chi did you press this oil ? As a matter of fact, no part of the verb (except the imperative, regarding which see the next rule) ends in a consonant, so that this rule only refers really to the preceding word as in the example given.

(3) The form me is used with the imperative mood and in the conjugation of the verb mend (to be, to exist) and its antonym bano. E. g. Dubnte sit down ; mendmed you are present ; and bangmed you are absent. (C.f. Chap. XVI.)

(c) The third person singular becomes e when suffixed as a subject. E. g. Hujulende he came ; sddome kiringkid he bought a horse.

(a) The second use of the shortened form occurs when a pronoun stands as the direct object of a transitive verb. Such objects "are in- variably inserted in the verb in accordance with rules which vafy with the tenses and will be fully treated later. (Vide Chaps. VII, VIII and IX). For present purposes, it will be sufficient to say that the shortened forms, as given in para. 28, must be used for such insertions, the form for the second person singular being invariably me.

Somd danddtee tdmkedinyd Soma beat me with a lathi.

Gapding nelmed I will see you tomorrow. Aivd sddom sdlime Hold my horse.

( 24= ;

(m) It follows, from the note under the rule above dealing with the use of the full form for the inserted indirect object, that the shortened form must be used when an indirect pronominal object has to be inserted in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses of the indicative mood. This also will be better understood at a later stage (see Chap. IX) and I will merely add the following examples here.

Sddome emakadingd He has given me a horse. &ddoming emadmed I gave you a horse.

30. The full forms of the personal pronouns may be declined in the same way as nouns. One example will suffice.

Nominative ... ... aing, I.

Accusative ... ... aing, me.

( ainqtdre. ) A

Dative .. < f to me-

I aingtdte. )

Instrumental ... ... aingte, by me.

i ainytdete, from me. Ablative ... ..< .

( ainc/paete, rrom near me.

Genitive ... .. we a, mine.

Locative ... ... ^ ainc/tare, in me.

of Rest ... ... i aitiypdre, in my vicinity.

Locative of ... ... , aingtdte, to me.

Motion ... "'\ aingpdte, to my vicinity.

II— NEUTER PRONOUNS.

31. The neuter or, as he calls it, impersonal, -pronoun in Mundari is, according to Hoffman, d it, which, as it represents an inanimate object only, does not alter in the dual and plural numbers. It is certain that, when it stands as a direct object to certain tenses of the verb, the suffix-fprm of this pronoun is e, as in ndmeding I will get it, where " it " is any yianimate object. The only authority I can find for the fbrm d is that it is added to demonstrative, interrogative and other adjectives to form the corresponding pronominal forms for inanimate objects. ( Vide paras. 32, 34 and 35 below).

Ill— DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

32. These pronouns are formed from the demonstrative adjectives ne (this), en (that) and ter (that far away, yonder) by the addition of the shortened personal forms i, king, ko, when animate objects are denoted,

and by (ho addition of the neuter form •< whon inanimate ul>j«-< indicated. Certain euphonic changes occur, but the formation- generally regular.

DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE.

( Ne, this

i

A'//, that ...

7Vr, thut youder i

Ne, this ...

i

En, that ...

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONODN. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. ,

)ii, this animate being ... niking neko, niku.

nil. fill, that animate being ... inking,

enking enko.

ten, that animate being yonder terking terko.

ned, this thing ... ... ned ' ... ned.

end, that thing... ... end ... end.

7Vr, that yonder terd, that thing youder

terd

terd.

The forms ten, terking and terko are not in common use. Nor are the animate compounds formed from terlekd in the next paragraph.

The above pronouns may be declined in the same way as nouns and personal pronouns. E. g. Nitdete moi tdkd idierne Take five rupees from this person.

Inid holong etkdd That man's flour is bad.

Nedre bdbding ukukedd I hid the paddy in this (box).

33. .The word lekd (Jike) is very commonly added to the demonstra- tive adjectives to form compounds which are also demonstrative adjectives. Thus we get nelekd (like this), enlekd (like that), and terlekd (like that yonder). By adding the simple personal forms i, king, ko, and the demonstrative pronouns m, niking, neko, we obtain a further useful class of pronouns which Hoffman calls qualificative, and De Smet qualitative, pronouns, but which are really only compound demonstrative pronouns.

SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

flilekdi nilekani

\ an animate being like ) this one

t niiekdkiiKj \ nilekanking

nilekdko. ... nilekanko.

inilckdi inilekani

}an animate being like that one

( inilekdking I inilekankiiiy

I nilekdko. inilekanko.

terlekdi terlekaiti

\ an animate being like ) that one yonder

f terlekdh'uuj \ teriekankiny

... terlekdko. tt'ilekanko.

( 26 ) The corresponding inanimate forms are nedlekd, endlekd and terdlekd.

Note The forms for the compound pronoun give other forms for the demonstrative adjectives, viz, nelekan, enlekan and terlekan, and these are the forms that are commonly employed. Care should be taken to distinguish between Nelekan kdpi an axe like this, and ne kdpilekd like this axe.

IV— INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

>

34. The ordinary interrogative pronouns are okoe who (animate), okond and chikand what (inanimate) and, less commonly, chilekahd what sort (inanimate). The adjectival forms are okon, chikan ami chilekan, all used before animate and inanimate nouns alike.

Okoe ne paitie paitikedd Who did this work ?

Chikande kdjietand What is he saying ?

Okon Mankitdeteng dgued From what Manki shall I bring it ?

Chilekan hoko en hdtureko taind What sort of men live in that village ?

Note 7. These pronouns are declinable like the others already dealt with, but it should be noted that the dual and plural forms of the animate interrogative pronoun are okoeteking and okoeteko respectively.

2. In Mundari, the adjective okon is, according to Do Smet, placed before animate nouns only, chikan being used with the same meaning before inanimate nouns. In Ho, okon

O *

and chikan are used indifferently before animate and in- animate nouns. Thus, " what village is this ?" may be translated either Ned okon lidtu or ned chikan hdtu.

V— INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

35. Indefinite pronouns are formed from the indefinite adjectives^ (any at all), jdn (any) and eta (other, another) in the same way as demonstrative pronouns are formed from demonstrative adjectives.

ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

f jai, jdige, anyone at all ... joking . . . jdko. Ja, any at all ...< " .

( jad, anything at all ... jaa ... jda.

ADJECTIVE. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

SINGULAR. DDAL. PLURAL.

f /dni, anyone ... idnkimi ... idnko.

Jan, any ... •?

I /a//a, any thing ... jdnd ... yam!.

f etdi, another one ... etdkint/ ... etdko.

/-,/<«, other, another-;

I c/aa, another thing ... etdd ... etn'i.

» Note 1. The </,' \\\ jn'ni,' is merely an enclitic.

2. ./a/// may take either^a singular or a plural verb, but the

former is more common in Ho. E. g. Jdni hujulende chi did anyone come ?

•>'.' There are certain other indefinite adjectives which may be used as indefinite pronouns without the addition of any suffix. E.g. Tdrdmdrd some ; purd many, much ; and Imringlekd some, a few, a little. Their meanings indi- cate that they can only be used as plural pronouns, but, as such, they are common.

Purdko mendkod Many persons (or any other animate beings) are present.

Huringlekdko niddreko senoeand A few persons went away in the night.

VI— POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

36. The ordinary possessive pronouns are formed by the genitive case of the personal, demonstrative, interrogative, and indefinite pronouns, e.g.awd mine, akod theirs, nikingd these two's, okoed whose, and jdnid anybody's. These forms precede the noun indicating the object possessed and are invariable. E. g. Aivd sddom my horse, aid od his house, akod hdture in their village.

37. Possessive pronouns are also formed by suffixing ta followed by the shortened forms of the personal pronoun to the animate or inani- mate object possessed. These compound forms are very common and are given in full in the table below.

38. When the animate object possessed is a relative, these com- pound forms change somewhat. Instead of tainq, tarn and tae for my, thy, and his or hers, ing, me or m (after a vowel) and te are used. Thus, " my horse " is sddomtaing, but " my father " is dpning ; " his house " is odtae, but " his younger brother " is undite. The changes in the dual and plural numbers will be found below.

39. The three kinds of possessive pronouns referred to in the pre- ceding paragraphs may be grouped as follows to facilitate reference, the object possessed in each case being singular in number.

1st Person

f Singular

f Inclusive , ! Dual \ , •\ I Exclusive

f Inclusive

Plural {„"•,. ^ ( Exclusive ,

f Singular 2nd Person < Dual

I;

{'

Plural Singular

3rd Person ^ Dual (.Plural

FULL FORM

FORM

SUFFIX FORM

PRECEDING

SUFFIXED

WHEN OBJECT

OBJECT

TO OBJECT POSSESSED IS

POSSESSED.

POSSESSED

A RELATIVE.

. aind

t aing

ing.

. alangd ...

talang . . .

talang.

,. alingd ...

taling . . .

ingtaling.

,. abud

tabu

tabu

. aled^ ...

tale

i'Mgtale.

. amd

tarn

me* m. *

. abend ...

taben

metaben, mtaben.

. aped

tape

metope, mtape.

,. aid

tae

te.

.. akingd ...

taking . . .

tetaking.

, . akod

tako

tetako.

Note 1. There is no difficulty about using the above forms when the object or relative possessed is singular, or when the possessor of dual or plural objects or relatives is singular. But when the possessor and the relative possessed are both dual or both plural, or one is dual and the other plural, the Hos avoid the complications of the suffix forms and use the full prefix forms.

Engdingtale Our mother. A led engdteking Our two mothers. Undim Thy younger brother.

Akod unditeko— Their younger brothers.

Akingd unditeking Their two younger brothers.

Aled uriko Urikotale

Amd uriko Urikotam

Our cattle

cattle

Akingd uriko \ The cattle Urikotaking / of the two.

2. There are a few exceptions to the rule stated in para. 38. Thus, hon (a child"), kodJion (a son) and kuilion (a daughter) may take either of the suffix forms in all persons of the singular number, as, e. g. hontaing or honiny (my child), kodhontam or koahonme (thy son), and kuihontae or kuihonte

( 29 )

(his daughter), /./a ci wife) becomes aivd era in the first person singular and is never , i-<i/>iin:/ or trdtny. The secoml person singular may be (imn < i<i or . . but never eram; and tlio third person singular may be aid erd, ,-i-iitae or erdte. Lastly, housed (a nephew), honerd (a niece), gekod (a nephew) and cjekui (a niece) insert, instead of suffixing, the possessive signs. Thus, honingsed (my nophew), lioinnt'ini (thy niece), geteltod (his nephew) and getekn'dckiny (her two nieces). The subject of this note and the next one are more fully noticed in Chapter XXIV.

» 3. The compounds formed by the addition of the possessive , suffix to nouns indicating family relations. may be declined ., with the usual case-suffixes. Thus, undite (his younger

brother) becomes unditetdte (to his younger brother), imditetdete (from his younger brother), undited (his younger brother's). The dual and plural suffixes are those mentioned in the note to para. 3, viz. teking and teko, and the full declension is therefore nnditeteking (his two younger brothers), uvditeteko (his younger brothers), unditetekopdete (from the vicinity of his younger brothers). As stated in Note 1 above, the dual and plural suffix forms are generally avoided, and this is particularly the case when they have to be declined. For example, " their mothers " is akod engdteko and " from their mothers "is akod engdtekotdete.

4. Juri (a friend) and sdki (a namesake) are treated as terms of relationship by the Hos and take the possessive suffix forms used with relatives. E.g. Jurim (thy friend) and sdkite (his namesake).

40. The word " parents " is expressed in Ho by the compound engd-dpu (literally " mother-father"). When the parents of a single personfare referred to, the dual for nouns indicating relationship is used, but the possessive suffix is inserted after both parts of the compound. E. g. Engding-dpuingtekinci my parents, engam-dpumteking thy parents, and engdte-dputeteking his parents.

(«) When two or more persons with the same parents are alluded to, the prefix possessive forms are used and the ordinary dual suffix is added to the compound.

Alangd engd-dpuking hujuakandking Our (thy and my) parents have come.

( 30 )

Aped engd-dpuking Dongolreking taikend Your parents were in Chaibassa.

Akingd engd-dpukinging nelkedkingd I saw their (of the two) parents.

(lit) When the reference is to the parents of two or more persons who are not brothers and sisters, the prefix possessive forms are used similarly, but the plural suffix is added to the compound.

Abud engd-dpuko bangkod Our (your and my) parents are not present.

Abend engd-dpuko Asdmteko senoeand The parents ot you two went to Assam. "

Akod engd-dpuko kuld goekedkode A tiger killed their parents.

VII—OTHER PRONOUNS.

41. There can be no doubt that the Ho language was originally without either Relative Pronouns or relative clauses, but the influence of other vernaculars may be traced nowadays in the use of the personal and demonstrative pronouns as relatives and correlatives. There are no separate forms for relative pronouns, and they will be more fully noticed in dealing with the original and idiomatic usage which compresses a whole relative clause into a single participial form used either as an adjective or a noun. (Vide Chap. XIII).

42. There are no Reflexive Pronouns either, though the enclitic ge, added to personal pronouns, produces a kind of reflexive pronoun, as e, g. Aingge I myself, amge thy thyself, aige he himself, apettietege from you yourselves. These are, however, only emphasised forms of the personal pronouns really, the reflexive idea being expressed by insert- ing n and en into the verb. (Vide Chap. XV).

CHAPTER VII.

\

TENSE-SUFFIXES.

43. In dealing with the Munda family of languages in his " Linguistic Survey of India", Dr. Grierson points out that the most that can be said of any word in these languages, of which Ho is one, is that it performs the functions of a noun, adjective or verb, and not that it is a noun, adjective or verb. This is of course true, but, in the absence of any other recognised set of terms, one has to fall back

( 31 )

on the grammatical terminology of more advanced languages, and deal with the ivhitionship between words tinder the headings of the commonly- nccepted parts of speech. It has already been noticed (see para. 3 6 ante) tliut, in the case of nouns, compounds can be evolved by the use of postpositions which perform all the functions of case-suffixes and result, when grouped together, in a conventional declension. In the same way, although there is not in Ho any conjugation in the ordinary sen s^ of the term, compounds exist which denote the same relations as the tenses of an organic language, and which may therefore be utilised in* framing a conjugation. '

44. > As stated in para. 21, the original root can be used indifferently as a noun1, adjective or verb. When used as a verb, it is equivalent to the ordinary infinitive mood and is the form in which the meanings of words are expressed in the Vocabulary at the end of this work. This root may be conjugated by the formation of compounds consisting of the root, the tense-suffix and the copula or verbalising agent a. Thus, the present tense of the verb giti (to sleep) is formed by giti (the root) -f tan (the present tense-suffix) -f a (the copula). This form itititand is incomplete l>y itself, but is at once rendered intelligible by the addition of the shortened form of the first personal pronoun as a subject-sign in the manner explained in para. 29. Thus, gititanding I sleep or am sleeping.

45. The tense-suffixes of the indicative mood, both active and passive, may be grouped as follows. It will be seen that the forms differ somewhat in the case of transitive and intransitive verbs, and the student will find it necessary carefully to distinguish between these two kinds oE verbs, the distinction being quite as important for practical purposes as that between animate and inanimate objects.

TENSE. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE.

!.• Present

2. Imperfect

3. Future

4. Perfect

5. Past

6. Pluperfect

By adding these tense-suffixes to any root we arrive at, what Hoffman calls, the " bare tense-form " which, as will be seen later, is ix complete word in itself capable of being used adjectively or substantively. The

TRANSITIVE

INTRANSITIVE

tan

tan

gtan

tan taiken ...

tan taiken ...

otan taiken.

o

akad, tad ...

akan

akan

ked

ken, can

ean

led

len

len

( 32 )

addition of the copula a to the tense-form (in the case of the active future, the copula is added to the root there being no tense-suffix between) verbalises it and only the subject and object signs are wanting to the construction of a complete sentence.

46. It will be remembered (vide para. 29) that, when any personal pronoun is the subject of a sentence, the shortened form is affixed either to the verb or to the word immediately preceding it. In the same ' way, when a noun denoting an animate being stands as the subject of a sentence, the shortened form ?of the third personal pronoun corres- ponding in number with it is added to the word immediately preceding the verb, unless that word happens to be the subject itself, In which case the pronominal subject-sign is added to the verb. E.g.kHujutanding I am coming, gapding hujud I will come tomorrow ; and choilam hujud* when will you come ? illustrate the usage when a personal pronoun is itself the subject, whereas sddom Jwjutande the horse is coming, ddsi gapde hujud -the servant will come tomorrow, and kuldkwg Jioldking hujulend two tigers came yesterday, illustrate the usage when an animate being is the subject.

Note—I. The addition of the pronominal subject-sign, even when the subject is already expressed in the sentence by a distinct noun, is one of the idiomatic usages of the language which should be strictly observed. It will be found that its omission is not uncommon in conversation, particularly in short sentences where there can be no doubt as to the meaning. Thus a Ho will say : Mundd hujittand the Munda comes, though this is really as incorrect gramma- tically as it would be to translate the sentence into English as " the Munda come".

?. The addition of the subject-sign to the verb, instead of to the word preceding it when that word is the subject, avoids confusion and repetition. Thus, if the subject-sign was c invariably added to the word before a transitive verb, the

sentence Aputee goekid might mean either " His father killed him" or " He killed his father ". Applying the rule, it can only have the latter meaning, because the former would be rendered Apute goekide. Again, the

sentence : " The two raiyats have come " is rendered

c J

Parjdking hujuakandking under the rule, because the addi- tion of the subject-sign king to the word before the verb would give Parjdking king hujuakand. Such repetitions

( 33 ) .

must, however, occur where the animate direct or indirect object, and the subject, are both in the dual or plural number, and there is no other word in the sentence to place before the verb. /.'. ,,. I'usilco chufukoko goekod— Cats kill mice.

3. A noun denoting an inanimate object and standing as the subject of a sentence is not followed by any subject-sign,* e. g. Aid od (or) odtae lotand his house is burning ; dudi, , tising rdpndeand the bridge was broken to-day.

47. > Tho next initial difficulty in the Ho verb is the insertion of direct and ' indirect objects. In Chapter VI, para. 29, the student has already seen how the shortened or full forms of the personal pronouns are inserted into the verb when such pronouns stand as the direct or indirect objects of a sentence. It is only necessary to add here that the shortened or full form of the third personal pronoun of the same number is similarly inserted into the verb when a noun denoting an animate being stands as the direct or indirect object of a sentence. As in the case of the pronominal subject-sign, this insertion takes place even when the direct or indirect object is already expressed by a distinct noun. E. g.

Agmtanding I am bringing him.

Nelkedkingde He saw the two men.

Emaingme Give it to me.

Ddsie tdmitan taikend He was beating the servant.

Paulus bdrid setdkinge kedkedkingd Paulus called the two dogs.

Sddoming emama I will give you a horse.

Sddomko tasadem emakod You will give grass to the horses.

-1. The rule regarding the insertion of the indirect object has been stated above in general terms which do not, however, apply to the perfect, past and pluperfect tensfes. The manner in which the indirect object is inserted in these tenses will be noticed when they are dealt with seriatim (see Chap. IX).

2. The position which the inserted direct and indirect objects* occupy will also be most readily understood if each tense is considered in turn in the first instance. Tho following table is given hero for purposes of reference after the

several tenses have been worked through in the succeeding chapters.

) Root + Direct or Indirect Object-sign + Tense- / suffix + Copula + Subject -sign.

Tense. Full Verb showing position of direct and indirect object-signs.

Present Imperfect

Future ...Root + Direct or Indirect Object-sign + Copula + Subject-sign.

Root + Tense-suffix + Direct or Indirect Object- sign + Copula + Subject-sign.

Perfect Past

Pluperfect

3. When a noun denoting an inanimate object stands as the direct object of a transitive verb, the neuter pronominal form e (see para. 31 ante) is inserted into the present, imperfect and future tenses in exactly the same way as the shortened forms of the third personal pronouns are inserted when the direct object is an animate being. The form does not alter in the dual and plural numbers, and does not occur in the other tenses of the indicative mood. E. g.

Birsd dide dguetand Birsa is bringing a lamp.

Apia hitding bided I will plant three seeds.

Ddruete joee godkedd He plucked fruit from the tree.

4. When a sentence contains both a direct and an indirect object, it is more idiomatic to insert the indirect object-sign in the verb in its proper place, leaving the direct object to occupy a separate position as a distinct word outside the verb. There can be no doubt, however, that the insertion of the direct object-sign in the verb is also admissible, the indirect object being indicated by the use of the post- positions tdte and tdre according as motion is implied or not. Thus, the sentence : " I will give the master a horse " may be translated either Gomke sddoming emaid or Gomketdre sddoming emid, the former being preferable. Cf. paras. 16 (a?) (ti) and 29 (in).

( 35 ) CHAPTER VIII.

INDICATIVE MOOD OF TRANSITIVB VERBS.

48. We can now consider the conjugation of the verb more fully. For this purpose, I have selected the verbs dyu to bring, and em to give. Both are transitive verbs, but the former will illustrate the inser- tion of the direct, and the latter that of the indirect, object.

PRESENT TENSE.

Sing., 1st Person ... dgu-e-tan-d-ing, I.bring or am bringing.

2nd ... dgu-e-tan-a-m, Thou bringest or art bringing.

. ( dqu-e-tan-d-e, He or she brings or is bringing.

I agu-e-tan-d, It (any inanimate object) brings.

/) / i A f dcju-e-tan-d-lang, Thou & I

dgu-e-tan-d-ling, He or she & I I bring or are bring-

2nd ... dgu-e-tan-d-len. You two 3rd ,, ... dgu-e-tan-d-king, They two

ing.

Pluralist { -^n-d-bu You & I 1

dgu-e-tan-d-le, They & I I bring or are bring-

2nd ... dgu-e-tan-d-pe, You 3rd ... dgu-e-tan-d-ko., They

ing.

Note 7. It should be borne in mind that, in an ordinary sentence, the subject signs are transferred to the word before the verb unless that word is itself the subject.

t 2. As regards the e between the root and the tense-suffix, see Note 2 to para. 49 below.

49. In the present tense, both the direct and indirect objects are inserted between the root and the tense-suffix. Thus :

Agu-me-tan-d-ing, I bring or am bringing thee.

Acn-i-tan-d-ing, ,, ,, ,, him or her.

Agu-e-tan-d-ing, it.

Agu-ben-tan-d-ing, you two.

Agu-king-tan-d-ing, them two.

Agu-pe-tan-d-ing, ,, you

Agu-ko-tan-d-iny, ,, ,, ,, them.

Note 7. The subject-sign of the first person singular may be replaced by the subject-sign of any other person or number in the

( 36 )

above examples and, in this way, the insertion of the direct object-signs can be practised in an almost indefinite number of variations, it being always borne in mind that, whenever the subject and the direct object are one and the same person, the ordinary forms cannot be used. Thus, " I bring myself " is not dguingtanding, but must be expressed by using the reflexive verb which will be encountered later (Vide Chap. XV). Examples of the transpositions suggested are :

Agu-ing-tan-a-m, Thou bringest or art bringing me.

Agu-ko-tan-a-m, ,, . them.

Agu-e-tan-d-e, He or she brings or is^ bridging it.

Agu-king-tan-d-e, thpm

two.

Agu-me-tan-d-ko, They bring or are bringing thee.,* Agu-i-tan-d-ko, ,, ,, ., ,, ,, him or her.

2. In the absence of an animate object requiring the appro- priate object-sign to be inserted, the neuter pronominal object-sign e is inserted into the present, imperfect and future tenses of all transitive verbs, (i. e. all verbs which take the transitive tense-suffixes) whether any inanimate object is expressed in the sentence or not. E. g.

Kdjietande. He speaks. Ldnddetandko. They laugh.

This peculiarity will be noticed further in dealing with the intransitive verbs Vide Chap, X, para. 67.

50. The indirect object is inserted as follows :

Em-am-tan-d-ing, I give or am giving to thee.

Em-ai-tan-d-ing, ., ,, ., ,, ,, him or her.

Em-aben-tan-d-ing, ,, ,, ., you two.

c Em-aking-tan-d-ing, them two.

Em-ape-tan-d-ing, }} ,, ,, ,, ,, you.

Em-ako-tan-d-ing, ,, them,

Note As with the direct object, the insertion of the indirect object can be practised by using any of the other pronominal subject-si,o-ns in place of ing, it being remembered that a coincidence of the subject and the indirect object must be rendered by the reflexive verb in this case also. Examples

( 37 )

of Midi 1r;m«jM»siti(Mis. \\hich lli.- -ttid.-iit rm .-unli'miM for himself, iin- :

/•Jin-iiiiHi-t<ni-(i-iii, Thou givest or art giving to me. &m-a&o-lan-a-m, ,, ,, ,, ,. them. /:'in-(ii-tan-<i-e, He gives or is giving to him or her

(some third person).

Hm-aking-tan-d-e, ,, ,, them two. Em-am~tan-d-ko, They give or are giving to thee.

Em-ai-tan-d-ko, ,, ,, ,, him or

i

her.

IMPERFECT TENSE.

, 51. The student has only to add taiken between the present tense- suffix and the copula to arrive at the imperfect tense, which can then be conjugated in precisely the same way as the present tense. Thus, Ayu-e-tan taiken- d-ing I was bringing, Agu-e-tan taiken-a-m Thou wert bringing, etc. The direct and indirect object-signs are inserted between the root and the tense-suffix as in the present tense. E. g.

Agu-e-tan taiken-d-ben. You two were bringing it. Agu-i-tan taiken-d-ko. They were bringing him or her. Em-am-tan taiken-d-king. They two were giving to thee. Em-ai-tan taiken-d-pe. You -were giving to him or her. Em-ako-tan taiken-d-bu. You and I were giving to them.

Note In this tense, the pronominal subject-sign is often seen in the middle of the tense-suffix between tan and taiken. Thus Agu-i-tan-ko taiken-d and Em-ai-tan-pe taiken-d are, if anything, more idiomatic than the regular forms given in the preceding examples, which are, however, quite permissible. The reason is that taiken is really only an auxiliary carrying the present tense-suffix into a comparatively past time.

52.» The following examples on the present and imperfect tenses should be mastered before the student passes on to the future tense. He would be well-advised to cover the English translations on the right of the page, and try to work out the meanings of the Ho sentences for himself with the help of the Vocabulary at the end.

1. Kuld amd gundi-e goe-i-tand ... The tiger is killing your cow.

2. Birre Somd ddru-e md-e-tan

taikend ... ... ISoma was cutting trees in the

forest.

( 38 )

3. Nddo uriko tasad-ko jom-e-tand The cattle are eating grass now.

4. Hord kutire parjdko mdndi-e-tan

taikend ... ... The raiyats were cooking rice at

the side of the road.

5. Hisi tdkdre ne miuko-e dkiring-

ko-tand ... ... He is selling these calves for

twenty rupees.

6. Ddsiko sddomko busu-ko em-ako-

< »

tana ... ... The servants are giving straw

to the horses.

7. Panchdred chakad kdji-e kdji-e-

tand ... ... He is telling falsehoods about his

rent.

8. Hdtete simko hola-m kiring-ko-tan *

taikend ... ... Thou wert buying fowls from

the market yesterday.

9. En hdm ho Ad-ing idi-ai-tand \

En Mm hotdte dd-ing idi-e-tand } l am takin« water to that old man*

10. Ne sdn Dongolte-ben idi-e-tand chi Are you two taking this wood

to Chaibassa ?

11. Amd otere Somd dputed uriko-e

gupi-ko-tand ... ... Soma is grazing his father's

cattle on your land.

12. Ne kuliko ndld-le em-ako-tand ... They and I are paying wages to

these coolies.

13. Aid otere (otetaere) chikand-e

her-e-tand ... ... What is he sowing in his field?

14. Nelekan kdpite engdte-e goe-i-tan

taikend ... ... He was killing his mother with

an axe like this.

15. Undiingd odete merom-e kumbi-i-

tan taikend ... ... He was stealing a goat from

my younger brother's house.

16. Mundd hoko renge hoko baba-ko

em-ako-tan taikend ... The rich men were giving paddy

to the poor men.

17. Bauumd setdking aid mindiko-

king hud-ko-tand ... Your elder brother's two dogs

are biting his sheep.

18. Akod tite hdturenko dumang-ko

ru-e-tan taikend ... ... The men of the village were

beating drums with their hands.

HI.

I loin kot<i-lni

int'iitlo tisliiij l»i-lnt

t,tik,-n<i,

20.

tienoean chdndure Jamddrenko Inrkerdko dsar sarte-ko sanyar- ko-tan taikend ; nddo knliiko jdlomte-ko tdb-ko-tand,

V.-t.Til:iy yon an i I wen- cut- ting tliM lu-uMclnvs but today we are picking up tho flowers.

Last month the residents of Jamda were hunting bison with bows and arrows ; now they are catching tigers with traps.

FUTURE TENSE.

53. There is no tense-suffix for the future tense, which is formed by adding the copula to the root, the neuter object-sign being placed between as explained in Note 2 to para. 49.

Sing. 1st Person 2nd

3rd

Dual 1st

2nd 3rd'

Plural 1st

2nd 3rd

... dyu-e-d-iny

dyu-e-a-m ( dyu-e-d-e " \ dyu-e-d

( dyu-e-d-lany ' \ dyu-e-d-liny dyu-e-d-ben dyu-e-d-kiny

i dyu-e-d-bu ' \ dyu-e-d-le . . . dyu-e-d-pe . . . dyu-e-d-ko

I will bring. Thou wilt bring.

He or she ) .,,

It | will bring.

Thou and I He or she and I You two They two

You and 1 They and I You They

will bring.

will bring.

54*. Direct and indirect objects are inserted between the root and the copula. Thus,

Ayu-me-d-iny I will bring thee.

Ayu-i-d-iny

Ayu-e-d-iny

AyU'ben-d-iny

Ayu-kiny-d-iny

Ayu-pe-d-iny

Ayu-ko-d-iny

him or her.

it.

yon two.

them two.

you.

them.

( 40 ) And for the indirect object :

Em-am-d-ing I will give to thoe. Em-ai-d-ing ,, him or her. Em-aben-d-ing ,, ,, you two. Em-akiny-d-ing ,, ,, ,, them two. Em-ape-d-iny ,, you. Em-ako-d-iny ,, ,, them.

Note As with the present and imperfect tenses, the insertion of the direct and indirect object-signs can be practised in an indefinite number of forms by using the other pronominal subject-signs in turn. The following examples will suffice :

Ayu-iny-a-m Thou wilt bring me.

Agu-ko-a-m ,, them.

Agu-e-d-e He or she will bring it.

Ayu-king-d-e them two.

Agu-me-d-ko They will bring thee.

Agu-i-d-ko him or her.

Em-aing-a-m Thou wilt give to me.

Em-ako-a-m ,, ,, them.

Em-ai-d-e He will give to him or her (some third

person).

Em-akiny-d-e them two.

Em-am-d-ko They will give to thee. Em-ai-d-ko ,, ,, him or her.

55. Besides its ordinary use to imply futurity, the future tense is used, where we would use the present tense in English, to express

(z) Universal truths and natural phenomena, e.y.

Sabenko misd misd ehakadko kdjied All men speak falsely

.

sometimes.

«

*• Gdrnd bdbde hdrdichied Hain causes the paddy to grow.

(z'z) The existing customs, occupations and habits of animals, individuals, castes or tribes, and also constantly recurring actions and events. E.g.

Teliko sunumko lened The Telis press oil. Bingko sonedko Snakes hiss.

Aid era lagite Ho gononge emed A * Ho pays bride-price for

his wife.

ji'iituLo /.mnd The Unions an- in the h:il)il of anything.

,/uji'ikod Tliis man grazes cattle.

ll,>ki> lijiiko k'n-iinj.'d The Hos buy cloth from the Tantis.

.\ /, Strictly <|>r;ikin<r. the use of the present tense should be confined to actions or states which are continuing at tin- moment of speaking. Thus, Aid of ere chik" he refund means " AVnat is he actually sowing in his field?" \vhil<> Aid otar <-ltik<nide hered means "What does he usually sow in his field?" Though this distinc-

tion is fairly generally observed, instances are not uncommon where the Ho will not use the future when it ought to be used. Thus, for " 1 pay three rupees rent," he will say Ape tdkd panrhdiny emetand, which really means " I am paying (at the moment of speaking) three rupees rent." Such examples of careless usage should not he imitated by the student, who will always , find himself readily understood if he adheres to the . proper grammatical form.

56. The following are examples on the future tense generally :

1. Gapd sepedko hapdnumko bdko

emakod ... ... The young men will give flowers

to the young women tomorrow.

2. Huju chandure Somd gunguinge

dandiid ... ... Soma will marry my maternal

aunt (mother's elder sister)

next month.

3. Nedete salanyi od kdlominy bated I will build a higher house than

this next year.

»

4. Ne meromlany pordid ondo

jilulunt/ hdkded ... ... Thou and I will skin this goat and

hang up the flesh.

5. Set are Malidtireni a lane/ layitee

topanyed. ... ... The wife of Mahati will chop uy

wood for us (thou and 1) in the morning.

. ( 42 )

6. Kunkalko chdtuko baled ... The Kumhars make earthenware

pots.

7. Singi maskalre ne hdti aled

porsoe jomed ... ... This elephant is in the habit of

eating our jackfruit in broad

daylight.

*

8. Aind erd alingd honkoe (honko-

talinge} saitibdkod ondo tikin

dipli mdndioe dguainyd ... My wife looks after our (her and

my) children and aljo brings me my cooked rice It noon.

9. Siddre Hoko birko dmined, ente

oteko bated ... ... First the Hos clear the jungle;

then they make land for cultivation.

10. Hdtuete tuiuko saben jobrdko idled Jackals take away all the refuse

from the village.

i

11. Ne hdturen Mundd chikan paitie

paitied ... ... What work does the Munda of

this village usually do ?

1 2 . Parjdkotdete Sarkdr lagite panchde

asuled ... ... He realises rent from the raiyats

on behalf of Government.

13. Diangem nued chi ... ... Art thou in the habit of drinking

rice-beer ?

14. Chimin tdkdre en marang sukuri-

pe dkiringed .. ... For how many rupees will you

« sell that big pig ?

«

15. Engdte-dputeteking aid ndldete

itade emakingd chi ... Will he give a portion of his

wages to his parents ?

( 43 ) CHAPTER IX.

INDICATIVE MOOD OF TRANSITIVB VBBBS (contd.) PERFECT TENSE.

57. The transitive tense-suffix is akad and the conjugation as follows : ,

Singular -'1st Person . 2nd » -

3rd

dguakadam

( dguakaddf I dyuakadd

- I have brought.

- You have brought.

He or she

- It

>has brought.

r. e duuakaddlanq - You and I

Dual - 1st Person - J

( dguakaddling - He or she and I I nave

,, - dguakaddben - You two f brought.

, - dyuakaddking - They two

2nd 3rd

( dguakaddbu - You and I Plural - 1st Person - \

I dguakaddle - They and I

2nd ,, - dguakaddpe - You

3rd ,, - dguakaddko - They

f have ( brought.

Note 7. .The student will notice that the obsolete " thou " has been dropped. He ought now to be able to distinguish between the numbers without its assistance.

2. The form as conjugated above is the correct one, because transitive verbs do not insert the inanimate object-sign in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, even when a direct inanimate object is expressed in the sentence, e.y., Joe dguakadd He has brought fruit.

58. In this tense, the direct and indirect objects are inserted between the tense-suffix and the copula. There is, however, one important difference between it and the three tenses treated in the preceding chapter. The simple forms of the personal pronouns are inserted as the signs both of the direct and indirect objects, and the context and circumstances must show in each case whether the object is direct or indirect. The

( 44 )

following conjugations, in which the third personal subject has been used to avoid reflexive forms, will illustrate the point :

Agu-akad-ing-d-e, ") c me

Agu-akad-me-d-e,

Agu-aka-i-d-e,

Agu-akad-d-e,

Agu-akad-lang-d-e,

Agu-akad-ling-d-e,

Agu-akad-ben-d-e,

Agu-akad-king-d-e,

Agu-akad-bu-d-e,

Agu-akad-le-d-e,

Agu-akad-pe-d-e,

Agu-akad-ko-d-e,

Em-akad-ing-d-e, Em-akad-me-d-f , Em-aka-i-d-e,

Em-akad-lang-d-e,

Em-akad-liny~d-e,

Em-akad-ben-d-e,

Em-akad-king-d-e,

Em-akad-bu-d-e,

Em-akad-le-d-e,

Em-akad-pe-d-e,

Em-akad-ko-d-e,

)• He h;v3 brought

He has given

J

you

him or her ( some third person ) it

you or me him or her and me you two them two * you and* me them and me

you them

me

you

him or her ( some third

> *

person ) you and me him or her and me you two them two you and me them and me

them

Note 1. The form of the third person singular should be noticed.

It is a contraction in which the "d" of the tense-suffix

disappears, the " a " and the " i " being pronounced to-

gether with the ordinary diphthong given in para. 5 of

Chap. I.

2. The alternative tense-suffix tad is very commonly used instead of akad. It takes animate direct and indirect objects quite regularly and in the same position as akad, a similar contraction taking place in the third person singular, e. g. dgutadingde he has brought me, dgutadmede he has brought you, dgutaide he has brought him or her, emtadlangde he has given you and me, emtadkingde he has given them two, emtadkode he has given them.

( 45 )

Tho use of tail with an indirect object is not, however, usual.

59. Examples on the perfect tense are :

1. liiiian fiint/ t>nkint/t> /mdakad- A poisonous snake has bitten both

kingd. those men.

2. Toraiteko yuuakadingd They have wounded me with

swords.

3. Jdimi kudlaming emakaid I, have given him a new spade.

4. Nidirko aind odred saiuko The white ants have destroyed

nnlfsdnakadd the thatch of my house.

5. , Kajiakadkode He has spoken to them.

6. Johan unditeko isu purde Johan has helped his younger

dengdakadkod brothers very much.

7. Knmbulf sdbakaid ondo am We ( they & I ) have caught the

tamanangrele dguakaid thief and brought him before you.

8? Jidtalang bar tdkd bar sikired Our (your and my) grandmother bdru ddrit gel tdkdtee kiring- has bought a kusum tree worth akadd Rs. 2/8/- for Rs. 10/-

9. Holdete ne sitiam abungakaid Have you washed this child since chi ? yesterday ?

10. Chikanred hdturen dindd kuiko Why have the unmarried girls of akod ubre bd tisingko em- the village put flowers in their altadd ? hair today ?

PAST TENSE.

60. The transitive tense-suffix is ked and the conjugation as follows :

Singular '- 1st Person - dgukedding - I

2nd - dgukedam - you

^ brought ( dgukedde - He or she

I dgukedd - It

( dqnkeddlana - You and I

Dual - 1st Person -</,,,.. -n- , « T

l aguk&laltng - He or she & 1

_ > brought

2nd ,, - agukedaben - You two

3rd - dgukeddking - They two

( dqukeddbu Plural - 1st Person - \ * I agukedale

- You and I - They and I

2nd - dgukeddpe

- You

3rd - dgukeddko

- They

brought

61. Direct objects are inserted between the tense - suffix and the copula, and the conjugation is quite regular except in the third person singular, where the "d" of the tense - suffix disappears, as in the perfect tense, and the preceding vowel "e" is also elided.

Agukedmede, Agukide,

Agukedde,

Agukedlangde,

Agukedlingde,

Agukedbende,

Agukedkingde,

Agukedbude,

Agukedlede,

Agukedpede,

Agukedkode,

}- He brought

me you

him or her ( some third person ) it

you and me he or she and me you two

them two

you and me them and me you them

62. Indirect objects are also inserted between the tense-suffix and the copula, the simple forms of the personal pronouns being used as in the perfect tense. The tense-suffix ked is, however, completely altered to ad, the "d" of which disappears in the third person singular.

Emadingde, Emadmede, Emaide,

Emadlangde,

Emadlingde,

Emadbende,

Emadkingde,

Emadbude,

Emadlede,

Emadpede,

Emadkode,

He gave

me you

him or her ( some third , person )

you and me

him or her and me

you two

them two

you and me

them and me

you

them

( 47 )

63. Examples on the past tense are ;

1. Itdmlii kdjl kdjiadingd. He told me an amusing story.

'2. Durk'in Minit/d naffo <iiny. Darkan Munda and I recognised kumbuling wlurumkid, the thief.

3. Tfi- h/rtc kcrdko holdle hdr- We (they and I) drove the buffaloes /•.-'//••"». to yonder forest yesterday. *

•i. Tdtdti- .\\tiki sdmomred sdkome Her grandfather gave Naiki a gold

enutid. bracelet.

5. Enking filing liairte mintfiking Those two men tied np the sheep

folk-id, with a long rope.

6. ChikanmeAte honko ue taiadrem Why did you collect the children

lin/idikedkod. in this place ?

7. Hold n'uldre /</<•/<//' isn purde Last night the lightning flashed

hiehirkedd. very much.

8. Ente diuri pundi rime bongdkid. The village priest then sacrificed

a white fowl.

$. Aiumkedingde ondo aind hukum- He heard me and understood my e samjaukedd. orders.

10. Bdnddred dd d%ri pairkedd The water of the bandh overflowed ondo aled ote topdkedd. the embankment and submerged

our fields.

PLUPERFECT TENSE.

64. The transitive tense-suffix is led and the ordinary conjugation is quite regular, e. g. dguledding I had brought, dguledam you had brought, etc. The rule regarding the insertion of direct and indirect objects is precisely the same as in the perfect tense, the simple forms of the personal pronouns being inserted as the signs of both classes of objects, leaving the context and circumstances to show which object has been used. The third person singular has a contraction exactly similar to that occurring in the past tense.

Aguledingde, Aguledmede, Ayulide,

Aguledde, Aguledlangde, Aguledlingde, Aguledbendt,

f He had brought "

me yon

him or her ( some third person ). it

you and me him or her and me . you two

Aguledkingde,

Aguledbude,

Aguledlede,

Aguledpede,

Aguledkode,

Emledingde,

Emledmede,

Emlide,

! them two

you and me had brought -{ them and me

you

I them f me

you

him or her ( some third person \

you and me

him or her and me

you two <

them two'

you and me

them and me

>• He had given -(

Emledlangde,

Emledlingde,

ET , •» ,

Hiinledbenae,

Emledkingde, Emledbude,

Emledlede, Emledpede, Emledkode, [_

Note Though the proper function of this tense is to denote an action prior to another action or event which is also pas,t, but which is the subject of conversation at the time, the student will often find it employed by the ordinary Ho when the past would be the proper grammatical tense to use. Thus, he will hear " aguledkoae " with the simple past meaning " He brought them," though its proper meaning is " he had brought them" or " he brought them " before some other past action or event took place. ,

65. The following are examples on the pluperfect tense, the precise connotation of which should be borne in mind in considering them :-

1. Chdtoming emlid

2. Ikir sudre movrdko ukuledd

[ had given him an umbrella.

They had hidden the dead body in a

deep well. She had shown the mad dog to us

(him and me). *

He had beaten his mother in-law with a bamboo ( also 'his mo- ther-in-law had beaten him with a bamboo'.)

Marang Gomkege bdrpdrenkinge The Deputy Commissioner had spok- kdfiledkingd. en to both parties himself.

3. Bald-bdlu setae udubledlingd

4. Hdndrte inddtee tdmlid

5.

( 49 ) CHAPTER X.

INDICATIVE MOOD OF INTRANSITIVE VERBS AND USB OF IMPERFECT AUXILIARY.

66. The tense-suffixes used with intransitive verbs have been given in para. 45. The conjugation of the various tenses is given below, the singular number being sufficient for all practical purposes.

PRESENT 'TENSE.

1st Person - gititanding - I sleep or am sleeping. 2nd - gititanam - You sleep or are sleeping. 3rd ,, - gititande - He or she sleeps or is sleeping. gititand It sleeps or is sleeping.

IMPERFECT TENSE.

1st Person - gititan taikending I was sleeping. 2nd - gititan taikenam You were sleeping. 3rd - gititan taikende He or she was sleeping. gititan taikend It was sleeping.

FUTURE TENSE.

1st Person - gitiding - I

2nd - gitiam - You

3rd „• - gitide - He or she

gitid - It

PERFECT TENSE.

1st Person - gitiakanding - I

2nd ,,, - q'diakanam - You .

> have (has) slept. 3rd - gittakande - He or sh«

gitiakand - It

PAST TENSE.

1st Person - gitikending or gitieanding 2nd - tiitikfiiam gitieanam 3rd - liitiki'in'ic ., iiififumii'

gitieand

I

£

< ( 50 ) PLUPERFECT TENSE.

1st Person - gitilending - I

2nd - gitilenam - You

3rd - gitilende - He or she h

gitilend - It

Note 1. Intransitive verbs do not of course present any of the difficulties encountered in the transitive verbs in connection with the insertion of direct and indirect objects.

2. In the imperfect tense, the pronominal subject-sign is often

placed between the two parts of the tense, suffix, e. g., gititaning taikend - I was sleeping. See Note tt> para. 51.

3. Of the two past tense-suffixes, ean is ordinarily used with

most intransitive verbs. The tense suffix ken is used also with transitive verbs in reply to the question : " What have you (or he, or she, or they, or any other person or persons) been doing ? " which is itself rendered Chikanam chikdkend ? Hoffman makes this a separate tense in Mundari and calls it the Incomplete Past, but in Ho it cannot be limited to an action that " has been interrupted or broken off before it was completed ", nor does it generally imply " an intention of resuming and completing the action ". It more often denotes a recently completed action, and is an idomatic usage rather than a distinct tense form. It does not infix

direct or indirect object-signs.

i

Simrdeteng sikend - I have been ploughing since

cockcrow.

Hdkukoe jdlomkend - He has been catching fish in a

net.

Tdkd koetankole emkend - We (they and I) have been

giving money to the beggars.

4. The three verbs huju - to come, seter - to reach, to arrive,

and tebd - to reach, to arrive, always form their past tenses with the pluperfect tense-suffix, e. g. Hujulende - he came, seterlending - I arrived.

5. The ordinary connotation of the pluperfect tense-suffix is

to indicate a state which has since altered. E. g. gitilending - I slept (but am now awake again).

( 51 ) »

67. Though the difference between the transitive and intransitive verbs is much the same in Ho as in English, there aro many Ho words used with tho transitive tense-suffixes which we should class as intransitive. Common examples are :— Sded - to breathe, bu - to bark, gerang - to groan, clidb - to open the mouth, ku - to cough, durang - to sing, hutir - to snore, rda - to cry, rapid - to wink, and oidr to swim. Words like Idmld - to laugh, logor - to grumble, and satiny - to have patience, also take the transitive tense-suffixes and insert direct object-signs, e.g., Ldnddkedingdko - they laughed at me, chikanam logoretand - what are you grumbling about ? A few words which we would class as transitive are used intransitively in Ho. Common instances are : de - to sit a- stride, ri<Vs and rakab - to climb, ascend. Thus, Sddome deeand he rode the horse, burwng rakabeand - I climbed the hill. The student must always bear in mind this distinction between transitive and intransitive verbs, and remember that the two essential differences are ( i ) the different tense- suffixes in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, and ( ii ) the non- insertion of direct and indirect object-signs, and particularly the non- insertion of the impersonal direct object-sign in the present, imperfect and ordinary future tenses of intransitive verbs. .

S.

68. A large class of intransitive verbs may be converted into tran- sitive verbs by the use of the causative suffix icJii. For example, hard means " to grow " and is intransitive, as in the sentence : Birre ne ddru hdrdeand - This tree grew in the forest. Hdrdichi means " to cause to grow " " to grow " ( actively ), and is transitive, as in the sentence : Sirmd mutid bdbde hdrdichied - He grows paddy every year. Other common verbs which may be so converted are : clidru - to sink, chdtom - to float, jdrom to ripen, to get ripe, jitd - to stick, ol - to issue- to go out, rukit - to shake, ter to melt, and sur - to drown. When converted into tran- sitives by the addition of ichi, these words are conjugated quite regularly in the present, imperfect and future tenses, but commonly drop the ichi in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses, which are otherwise conjugated like ordinary transitive verbs. The following examples will demonstrate the point :

Ote rukuiand - The ground shakes, i. e., there is an

earthquake.

Homotaing hdsute rukueand - My body shook with fever. ,

Hoio sakame rukuichietan taikend - The wind was shaking the leaves. Kurkur dpu hontee rukvkid - The angry father shook his son.

Entf sdmd kuchuing rukukedd - I then shook the empty bag.

( ( 52 ) Ne rupd choilam sericliied - When will you melt this silver ?

Note 1. The student will find this peculiar use of the transitive tense-suffixes with intransitive verbs rather confusing at first, and he is apt to be misled into thinking that the roots are transitive. The way in which the present, imperfect and future tenses must be expressed when a transitive tense is to be conveyed, will, however, set him right. It should be remarked also that the elision of icM in the three past tenses is not imperative, though it is usual colloquially.

2. The suffix ichi is permissive as well as causative1, and it may be added in either sense both to /ransitive and intransitive verbs. Thus, Rudichikode may mean either '• He will cause them to return ' or " He will allow them to return", and dkiringichiiding may mean either " I <.vill make him sell " or " I will allow him to sell ". In both cases, the context and circumstances must show which is

the correct rendering, i

69. Though not strictly pertaining to the present chapter, this will

probably be the most convenient place to remark that there are several transitive verbs with which the full forms of the personal pronouns are used as direct animate object-signs, inanimate objects being indicated by the usual impersonal pronominal sign e. These verbs will be treated more fully in Chapter XVII, and the following examples will suffice for the present : Boro - to fear, Kurkur - to be angry with, Sdri - to believe, and Suku - to like, love. Thus Boroamtanding - I fear you, Kurkuradinc/de - He was angry with me, Sdriaidko - They will believe him, Sdrietandko - They believe it, Sukuakadbendlang - We ( he and I ) have loved you two.

70. The use of dai - to be able, with transitive verbs is exactly similar. Considered by itself, dai is of course intransitive, and it con- tinues to*be intransitive when used with intransitive verbs ; 0. <?.,. En oe apirdaidf - That bird can fly, Md isii sangmging nirdaieand - I could run very far last year. When used with transitive verbs, it becomes transitive and takes the full pronominal forms for direct animate objects, inanimate objects being indicated by the usual impersonal object-sign e. Thus, J$ eldaiamtanding - I can see you, Hold purd erdkoling kiringdaiakadkod - We (he and I) could have bought many wives yesterday.

Note The future is the correct tense to use for "can" or "am able to", unless the capability is being exercised at the

( 53 ) »

muim-nt of -peaking, as in the example .NV///-/M/, - I can see you (/. e., an I speak). In fact, though //•// may really be regularly conjugated with the usual tran- sitive and intransitive tense-stillixes, the student will soon notice that the ordinary Ho, with an umi-ual sacrifice of exact ness to convenience, uses the future tense to express all the shades of meaning of "can" and " could," whether referring to present, future or past time. Thus, he will say : A/a isn M/nginging nmfatd, instead of the form given in the second example above, and this usage is so general as to be almost idiomatic. Asa rule also, he will not infix any object-signs, either expressing the object by a separate word or omitting it altogether if it is an imper- sonal pronoun. The following examples show the com- monly-heard forms before, and the grammatically-correct forms after, the English rendering :-

Aminy neldaid I can see you - Neldaiamtanaing. Iddkvkuiny jdlomdaid I can net fish - Hakukoing jalomdaiakoa. '

Oding baidaid - I can build a house - Oaing baidaiea. Soandaidmy - I can smell it - Soandaietanaing.

71. Before leaving the Indicative Mood, it is necessary to notice certain modifications of the regular tenses which are in common use, and which are formed by the addition of the generic imperfect auxiliary taiken. We have already seen (para. 51 ante ) how the present tense is converted into the ordinary imperfect by the use of this auxiliary, and it only remains to be added that the other tenses of the indicative mood, both of transitive and intransitive verbs, may be similarly converted into separate tense-forms, bearing the same relation to each of them, as the imperfect does to the present. The simple future cannot of course have any corresponding imperfect form, but the future when used to express existing customs, occupations and habits ( vide para. 55 )• adds the imperfect auxiliary in order to express customs, occupations and habits which are now extinct and no longer followed, e. </., Hoko ddvri erdkoko dtarko taikend - The Hos used to burn witches. As appears from the preceding example, the effect in all the tenses is merely to transfer the copula to the end of the imperfect auxiliary, the conjugation continuing quite regularly as regards the insertion of pronominal object-signs. The subject-sign always comes after the copula when there is no other word besides the subject before the verb. The full forms for each tense are therefore :-

' ( 54 )

IMPERFECT OF THE FUTURE. Ague taikending - I used to bring it. Emai taikending - I used to give him. Giti taikending - I used to sleep.

IMPERFECT OF THE PERFECT.

Aguakad taikending - I have been bringing it. Emakai taikending - I have been giving him. ' Gitiakan taikending - I have been sleeping.

IMPERFECT OF THE PAST.

Aguked taikending - I have been bringing it. <

Emdi taikending - I have been giving him, t

Gitiean taikending - I have been sleeping.

IMPERFECT OF THE PLUPERFECT.

c>

Aguled taikending - I had been bringing it. Emli taikending - I had been giving him. Gitilen taikending - I had been sleeping.

72. Examples on the rules and usages explained in this chapter are given below.

1. Nimir salandi joroakdn taikend The roof has been leaking lately.

2. Jetete sabenkole balbaltan taikend We were all perspiring from the

heat.

3. Tising Munddtdte panchding em- I can pay my rent to the Munda

daied today.

4. Somd kuihontee nelichimed chi Will Soma allow you to see his

daughter ?

5. Sengel mede serichied Fire melts iron.

6. Hdtyren salen sitidko Idnddi tai- All the children in the village used

kendko to make fun of him.

»

7. Singi-hasur taiomteko seterlend They arrived after sunset.

8. Tdld niddre amd odrem gititan Were you sleeping in your house at

taikend chi midnight ?.

b

9. lueanding, mendo jdni kde aium- I called out loudly, but no one heard

kedingd me.

10. Gardre Paulitsko surkid (sitr- They drowned Paulus in tne river. ichikid)

( 55 )

11. ('lii/.;i,i,i,n,>,itf ,ilnm

nuir,tii>i let r<i l»k,t.i,

Why is our (your and my) biggest buffalo limping ?

12. Sdriadingdko, ni,',/,ln enreoko They believed me, but yet they

boroaid feared him.

13. Tikinjokd gar<i inn lidritan taikend The river was flowing very swiftly

until midday.

14. Chikande chikdkend ?. l\mn- What has he been doing ? He has

bukende. been stealing.

i

15. Niddre danddkuld senbdlen tai- The hyena had been wandering here

ktnde and there daring the night.

16. Od chetanreliny rakabeand ondo We (he and I) climbed on the top

saiuling dalkedd of the house and thatched it.

17. Amd odtele hujulend, mendo ka- We (they & I) went to your bunga-

cJieritem senlen taikend low, but you had gone to Kacheri.

18. Hold nidd hoiote aind yond hdn- My cow-house fell down in last

dieand night's wind.

19. Ne otered gusind rdmtide here The owner of this plot of land used

taikend to sow sirguja.

20. Mdnki hujuakande chi ? Ed, Has the Manki come ? Yes, he has

bdrre isu ydrie tinyuakan been standing outside for a long

taikend. time.

CHAPTER XI.

>

SUBJUNCTIVE AND CONDITIONAL MOODS.

73. The Subjunctive Mood of transitive and intransitive verbs is formed by adding to the root the modal sign k followed by the copula d. The direct and indirect objects of transitive verbs are inserted between the root and the modal sign in accordance with the rules explained in dealing with the Indicative Mood. »

1st Person - Ayuekding - I may bring it, may I bring it, let me bring it.

2nd - Aguekam - You may bring it, etc.

3rd - Ayukde He or she may bring it, etc.

1st Person - Emaikdiny - I may give it to him, may I give it to him, let

me give it to him.

2nd - Emaikam - You may give it to him, etc. 3rd - Emaikde - He or she may give it to him ( some third

person J, etc.

' ( 56 )

1st Person - Gitikding - I may sleep, may I sleep, let me sleep.

2nd ,, - Gitikam - You may sleep, etc.

3rd - Gitikde - He or she may sleep, etc.

Note 1. The above conjugations only give the singular number with the insertion of the direct inanimate object and the indirect animate singular object, but the student should by now be able to continue the conjugation in the dual and plural numbers, and to transpose object-signs so as to produce an unlimited number of variations of meaning. The following examples will suffice :

Aguekdko - They may bring it, etc. «

Aguikdben - You two may bring hinj, etc*.

Emalangkdking - They two may give us (you & I) etot Emamkde - He may give you, etc.

Gitikdpe - You may sleep, etc. t

Gitikdko - They may sleep, etc.

2. The Subjunctive Mood indicates that the speaker is asking

or granting a permission, favour or concession, and must not be used when mere probability or doubt is intended. The latter is expressed in Ho by the future indicative followed by the word torang. Thus, Agueding torang - I may bring it (or) I will perhaps bring it.

3. The Subjunctive Mood is used also in sentences introduced

in English by such words as " in order to ", " in order that ", « but ", etc.

74. Redo is the sign of the Conditional Mood and any tense of the indicative mood, both of transitive and intransitive verbs, may be con- verted into the corresponding tense of the conditional mood by the sub- stitution of the sign redo for the copula a, direct and indirect objects being inserted in transitive verbs in exactly the same way as in the regular indi- cative .forms. The following are the first person singular forms of each tense j

PRESENT.

dguetanredoing - If I bring (or) am bringing it -\

I (at the present emaitanredowg - It I give (or"1 am giving him >

j TC T i I moment.)

gititanreaoing - If I sleep (or) am sleeping

IMPERFECT.

dguetan taikenrtdoing - If I was bringing it emaitan taikenredoing - If I was giving him. gititan taikenredoing - If I was sleeping.

( 57 ;

emairedouni (jitiredoing

dgitakadredoing

emakairedoing

gitiakanredoing

FUTURE,

- If I will bring it.

- If I will give him.

- If I will sleep.

PERFECT.

- If I have brought it.

- If I have given him.

- If I have slept.

PAST.

emairedoiin/ gintanredoing

dyuledredoiny

emliredoiny

gitilenredoing

- If I brought it.

- If I gave him.

- If I slept.

PLUPERFECT.

- If I had brought it.

- If I had given him.

- If 1 had slept.

Note 1. The Imperfect Forms mentioned in para. 71 may similarly be used conditionally. E. g», Aguakad taikenredoing If I have been bringing it, Emai taikenredoing - If I have been giving him, Gitilen taikenredoing - If I had been sleeping.

2. The conditional clause usually precedes the principal sen- tence, and, when its subject is the same as that of the principal sentence, it need not be expressed by a subject- sign in both sentences, though it is always as well to put in the sign twice where there are several words in both sentences. Thus :

Hujuredoing, emamd - If I come, I will give it to you. Gititanredo, gitikde - If he is sleeping, let him sleep. Aj>um ne rede nueredo, - If your father drinks this medicine, sdben nidde gitid he will sleep the whole night.

75. The sign redo when used by itself indicates that the condition is realizable or probable. If the condition is one that has not been fulfilled, or is not realizable or probable, the word lionang is added at the end of the principal sentence. The following examples will illustrate J

' ( 58 )

the difference, a safe general rale being that honang should be used wherever " would " is used in the English verb :

Donyolteng senoredo, liisir kiringamd If I go to Chaibassa (as is possible

and probable), I will buy you a necklace.

Dongolteng senoredo., hisir kiringamd If I went to Chaibassa (which I lionang. cannot or will not do), I would

buy you a necklace.

Dongolteng senodairedo, hisir hiring- If I am able to go to Chaibassa (as amd. is possible, though not ^certain),

I will buy you a necklace.

76. Conditional clauses introduced by the words " even if ", " evftn although ", and similar expressions, take reo instead of redo, the other rules regarding the insertion of object-signs and the use of honing be"ing exactly the same. E. <?.,

ffujureom, kding senod Even if you come, I shall not go.

r Kedingreom, kding aiumed Even if you call me, I shall not

listen.

Gojotanreo, kding mdpmed Even if I am dying (which I pro-

bably am), I shall not forgive you.

Gojoreo, kding mdpmed honang Even if I were dying (which I am

not), I would not forgive you.

Note In all sentences, whether preceded by the conditional reda or reo, in which honang is used, the Hos have an alternate idiomatic construction in which ted is substituted for the copula d at the end of the principal verb. Thus, the last example given above might be rendered : Gojoreo, kding mdpmeted honang, and a similar alteration might be made in all the examples in the next paragraph in which honang is used. I do not pretend to understand the rationale of this idiomatic usage.

77. The following are examples on the rules considered in this chapter :

> 1. Ne mdndi dputee idiaikd. May he take this food to his father ?

2. Chitie emakadmeredo, okonred. If he has given you a letter, where

is it ?

( 59 ) , >

iJ. Kdam yitilenredo, l«i(td kd If you had not slept, the paddy

kuinbneand honang. would not have been stolen.

4. AsdiHti'iiy senoreo, chimin bode Even if I went to Assam, I would

hobd daidiny rudd honany. return as soon as possible.

5. Hold knlam yockirt'ilo, ••Itilt'kdte If you killed the tiger yesterday,

ondo miad yundi hold nidde how is it another cow was killed

yoeand. last night ?

6. Gitilenredoing, yoeeand honany. If I had slept, I would have been

* killed.

7. A'uAjtdre tdkd hobdoreo, en od Even if I had money, I would not

kainy /yrinyed honang. buy that house.

i? .' Ainytdre tdkd taikenreo, en Even if I had had money, I would

od kdiny kirinykedd honany. not have bought that house.

9. Entorsd hdtutem senlenredo, If you had gone to the village at

kumbukom sdbkedkod ho- once, you would have caught the

nany. thieves.

10. Hdsuinyreo (hdsuoreo), Ran- Even if I was sick, I would goto

chiteny senod honany. Ranchi.

CHA.PTER XII.

IMPBRATIVB MOOD AND USB OF PROHIBITIONS, INVITATIONS,

NEGATIONS AND INTERROGATIONS. 78. The Imperative Mood is formed by the additon of the simple

forms of the second personal pronoun to the root of intransitive verbs. E.y., Gitime sleep ( sing. ), Gitiben You two sleep, and Gitipe You (plural) sleep. In the case of transitive verbs, the inanimate object-sign e is always inserted ( c.f. Note 2 to para. 48 and Note 2 to para. 49 ), unless there is an animate object, direct or indirect, requiring the appropriate object-sign to be inserted between the root and the pronominal 'ending. E. y. Ayueme bring it, Purd Idkddyueme bring many rupees, Aynime bring him, Ayukinyme bring them two, Emaime give it to him, Emakom give them.

Note. The last example illustrates the usual euphonic contraction of the singular pronominal sign which occurs both after the direct and indirect animate object-signs of the third person plural. E. y. , Ayukom bring them, Ne lijd idiakom

' ( 60 )

take this cloth to them. A similar contraction occurs after the prohibitive particle dlo, the use of which is ex- plained in the next paragraph.

79. Prohibitions are expressed by the use of a special particle dlo, which is equivalent to "do not" and is followed by the indicative future. The simple pronominal signs are added to dlo, the direct and indirect object- signs being infixed into the verb in the same way as in the ordinary future tense. The following examples will show what is meant :

Alom gitid - Don't sleep.

Alom dgued - Don't bring it. f

Alom kedid - Don't call him. g

Aloben emaid - Don't you two give to him. .

Alope tdmkod - Don't you (plural) beat them.

Purd ddru dlope mded - Don't you cut many trees.

En kumbuking dlom sdbkingd- Don't catch those two thieves.

80. Invitations to one or more persons to join the speaker in doing something require the simple inclusive dual ( lang ) or plural ( bu ) of the first personal pronoun and the future tense, with or without the particle dold. If dold is not used, the pronominal form is added to the future tense like an ordinary subject-sign. If dold is used, it precedes the verb in the future tense, and the pronominal forms are added to it, the d of dold being elided before lang. E. g.,

Gitidlang or Dollang gitid Let us (thou and I) sleep.

Rdpudedlang or Dollang rdpuded Come, let us break it.

Sdbidbu or Doldbu sdbid Come, let us (you and I) catch him.

Idiakodbu or Doldbu idiakod Come, let us take it to them.

81. As will have been seen by some of the examples given in the preceding chapters, Negation is expressed by the particle kd, which is always placed immediately before the verb, and thus attaches to itself all animate subject-signs in accordance with the rule in para. 46. The construction is perfectly regular, except that the addition of the pro- nominal sign of the second person singular does not shorten the long vowel of kd-vide para. 28 (b). The following examples will suffice :—

' Kding dguetand - I am not bringing it.

Kdam emakaid - You have not given it to him.

Kde gitieand - He did not sleep.

( ei ) ;

Kdko hnjurido, kiil>" .•>, n»n - IF tlu-\ il<> not nnm-. \v i YOU ;ind I i will

not <£<>.

.\'e dtii-ii k<i <»>/,>(, am - This tree is not dyin^.

.Y.'/r. The negative of the inipcralivo mood is formed by the particle

<il<> us oxplainnl in para 79. The negative of

the subjunctive mood is -iinilarly formed, probably to

avoid confusion with the modal sign k. E. </., the negative

of dguekde (may he bring it) is not kde dgnekd, but

dlokde dyne which is merely an alternative form of dlo

dyuekde. The negative of the other persons and numbers

t is arrived at in exactly the same way, it being always

•remembered that the first form, in which the modal si<_m.

the copula, and the subject-sign are added to dlo, is more

idiomatic and more commonly used.

*

82. Interrogations are expressed by the particle chi, which is always placed at the end of the sentence and is spoken with a somewhat higher inflection of the voice than the rest of the sentence, which is not affected in any way. E.g.

Ainglom hujnd chi - Will you come with me ? Otee kiringakadd chi - Has he bought the land ?

83. The usual examples on this chapter are given below :

1. Alokdlang eperang Let us not quarrel.

2. Airjd ddruete Id dlom goded Don't pluck flowers from my trees.

ii. Huringlekd hurumsuku dgu- You two bring me some money. aingben.

4. Dollang kapdjid Come, let us talk together.

5. Kuihontam initdre dlom gongid Don't give yonr daughter in mar-

riage to that man.

6. Alokdko neling Let them not see me.

7. Aing dlom nelichikod Don't let them see me.

8. Ne cliatuete dd duleme Pour out the water from this pot.

9. Lili dlom kedid banredo turned Don't touch a hornet or else it will

sting you.

10. Hat tern senoeand chi ? Senoean- Did you go to the bazaar ? If so, redom, isudnjdtem rudakand you have returned very quickly.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS.

84. We have seen already that every Ho verb consists of at least three parts, viz. the root, the tense-suffix and the copula. The latter is the verbalizing agent, and its elimination leaves a participal form which may be used as an adjective as it stands, or be converted into a noun or a participle proper. The result is that the Ho language has as many parti- cipial forms as it has tenses, each of which may be used adjectively, substantively or conjunctively.

PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. *'

9

85. Participial adjectives consist ordinarily of the root plus <the tense-suffix. We know, however, that direct or indirect object-signs must be inserted into all transitive verbs. If no animate object is expressed in the sentence, the inanimate object-sign e is inserted in certain tenses whether an inanimate object is expressed or not. the sentence contains an animate object, whether direct or indirect, its appropriate

/ object-sign is always inserted in the verb. When, therefore, a tran- sitive verb is converted into a participial form, only the copula is elimi- nated and the object-sign remains. Thus dguetande - he is bringing it, and Idnddetande - he is laughing, become dyuetan ho - the bringing man or the man who is bringing it, and Idnddetan ho - the laughing man or the man who is laughing. The following series of participial adjectives will make the point clear :-

PRESENT.

dguetan ho - the man who is bringing it.

emaitan ho - ,, giving to him (some third person).

gititan ho - sleeping.

IMPERFECT.

dguetan taiken ho - the man who was bringing it. emaitan taiken ho - giving to him. yititan taiken ho - sleeping.

FUTURE.

' ague ho - the man who will bring it (or) who usually brings it.

emai hd - n give to him (or) who usually gives to him. ytti ho - }> }) sleep (or) who usually sleeps.

( 63 ) PERFECT.

ho - the man who has brought it. ' /<" - ,, given to him. /i() - » » », slept.

PAST.

/*<> - tho man who brought it. i ho - gave to him. iiitii-an ho slept.

PLUPERFECT.

dtjnled ho - Ihe man who had brought it. emli ho - given to him.

yitilen ho slept.

Note Where the subject of the subordinate clause is the same as that of the principal sentence, the subject-sign disappears from the former when it is expressed by a participial adjective. Where, however, the two subjects are distinct, the subject-sign of the subordinate clause appears before the participial adjective, either by itself, or at the end of the preceding word. In both cases, the participial adjec- tive is always placed immediately before the noun which it qualifies. Thus, the simple direct sentence : "Pator bought this horse" is translated Pdtor ne sddome kiringkid, and the compound sentence : "Pator, who bought this horse, has brought the money", is translated Ne sddom kir'uwki Pdtor tdkde dguakadd. But the compound sentence : " The horse Pator bought yesterday died today " is rendered Pdtor Jiolde kiringki sddom tisinge goeand. C.f. also Am kiringki sddom - The horse you bought, and holam kiringki- sddom the horse you bought yesterday.

86. In Chapter VII, para. 41, it has been stated that thete are no relative pronouns in Ho, and the preceding examples show that relative clauses must be expressed by the use of participial adjectives. This is beyond doubt the original idiomatic usage and, though the student may sometimes hear the interrogative pronoun or adjective used relatively^, with the demonstrative pronoun or adjective as its correlative, this is entirely an acquired usage seldom or never employed by the ordinary aboriginal. On the one hand, literate Hos will sometimes use the relative

f ( 64 )

I construction in imitation of more advanced languages, with which their

familiarity is thus manifested, while, on the other, Indians of different races will almost always employ it because it occurs in their own languages, and because it is easier for conversational purposes than the participial construction. For example, in translating the sentence : " The cows he bought last year have been stolen," a literate Ho might, and a foreigner probably would, say : Okon uriko mde kirinykedkod, en uriko ( enko ) kurn* buakandko, while the Ho cultivator would say : Mde kiringkedko uriko

•kumbuakand. The participial construction is the idiomatic one and, though it is certainly somewhafr difficult to acquire, the student should make it a rule to use it invariably from the beginning. If no other reason will suffice, he may be assured that, if he qannot use this construction himself, he will never be able to follow*a conversation between two Hos, and will have considerable difficulty in following sentences addressed to himself. Once he has mastered the principles of the construction, however, its clean diamond-cut results cannot but appeal to him, and should lead him on to persevere in its practical application until he has attained the necessary degree of facility in its use. Even after idiomatic self-expression has become fluent, it will often be found

/ extremely difficult to understand and follow the wealth of participial forms that drops from a Ho's lips. As Hoffman puts it : " Often and often, he ( i. e. any foreigner) will have to acknowledge to himself that he does not know what his interlocutor is driving at, though every word in the sentence sounds familiar to him". The following rule, which Hoffman gives, will be found useful in converting English sentences into Ho. It may appear rather roundabout, but experience will soon show that it is really the shortest and safest cut. " First, translate your subordinate clause into a complete Mundari ( we substitute "" Ho " ) proposition ; then, cut off the copula and the pronominal subject ; and finally, place the remnant thus obtained in its proper place in the principal proposition." As already stated, the pronominal subject-sign does not disappear altogether unless the subjects of the subordinate and principal sentences are identical.

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS.

87. Participial nouns are of two kinds, viz, animate participial nouns or nouns of agency, and inanimate participial nouns or instru- mental and objective noun.i. The first are formed by adding the simple £orms of the third personal pronoun to participal adjectives, and are used when such adjectives qualify pronouns of the third person instead of nouns. Thus :—

( 65 )

PRESENT. <t,,jiit'tnnk<i - He or she, they two, they, who is

or are bringing it. Emaitani, tmaitanking, emaitanko - He or she, they two, they, who is

or are giving to him. (lititiini, tyititanking, (jilitunko - He or she, they two, they, who is or

are sleeping, and so on through the whole series of participial adjectives given in

para. 85

Note 7. It is usual to use these participial nouns in place of participial

•» adjectives followed by the several numbers of the nouns,

ILO - man and kui - woman. E. #., A'umbu sdbkii ( instead

of sdbki ho) kde hujuakand - the man who caught the

thief has not come, Bugite isindaiko dnjdteko dandiod -

women who can cook well will be married soon.

2. In accordance with the rule in para. 55, the future form of the participial nouns must be used where the agent is is one whose custom, occupation or habit it is to do a particular thing, the object-signs invariably inserted in the future tense of transitive verbs being omitted. E. g. koei- a beggar, siui a cultivator, gupiko - graziers, disum bdgeko - emigrants.

3. Where the pronoun qualified is in the first or second person, these same participial nouns are used, but they must be preceded by the appropriate pronoun to indicate the meaning clearly. E.g. Aing dengdkedmei nddo dengd- ing dsietand - I who helped you, now ask for help, Am dengdk'd nddo dengam dsietand - You who helped him, now ask for help. Ape dengdkedpei nddope goeitand - You ( plural ) whom he helped are now killing him.

88. These animate participial nouns may of course be declined by the addition of postpositions in the same way as ordinary nouns.* Thus, Agukeditdte to him who brought, dguekote by or through the agency of those who will bring, emaikingtdete from those two who gave to him, emlikod of or belonging to those who had given to him, gititunipdre in the vicinity of him who is sleeping, gitieanknpdete from the vicinity of those who slept.

89. Inanimate participial nouns may be either instrumental or objective. Both classes are formed by the addition of ted to the participial adjectives, the difference being as follows. We have seen that, in the

, ( 66 ) I

absence of an animate object, all transitive verbs must insert the inani- mate object-sign e in the present, imperfect and future tenses, and that the forms of the participial adjectives corresponding to these tenses retain this object-sign. In the case of instrumental participial nouns, whether formed from transitive or intransitive verbs, this object-sign is omitted ; in the case of objective participial nouns, whether formed from transitive or intransitive verbs, it is retained. This only applies to the present, imperfect and future forms. As the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses do not insert the inanimate object-sign, the distinction between the instru- mental and objective nouns is indicated by using the intransitive tense- suffixes for the former and the transitive tense-suffixes for the latter, irrespective of whether the verb from which they are derived ^.s transitive or intransitive. There is, however, a slight difference bltween the mean- ing to be attached to these nouns when formed from transitive and intransitive verbs respectively. "When the verbal base is transitive, (i) the instrumental noun is formed by the addition of ted to the root plus the tense-suffix without the inanimate object-sign, in the present, imperfect and future forms, and to the root plus the intransitive tense-suffix in the perfect, past and pluperfect forms ; and it denotes a thing by means of which, or with which, an action is performed. E. g., jom to eat, becomes jomtanted a thing which is being eaten with at the time of speaking, and jomkented a thing which was eaten with at some past time.

(ii) the objective noun is formed by the addition of ted to the rflot plus the tense-suffix and the inanimate object-sign, in the present, imperfect and future forms, and to the root plus the transitive tense-suffix in the perfect, past and pluperfect forms ; and it denotes a thing which is the result of aa action, or the thing or material in respect of which an action is performed. E. g. jom becomes jometanted a thing which is being eaten, and jomkedted a thing which was eaten. When the verbal base is intransitive :-

(j) the instrumental noun is formed in exactly the same way as e described above, but it denotes not only a thing by means of which, or with which, an action is performed, but also a thing upon which an action is performed. E. g. dub to sit, becomes dubtanted a thing on which anyone is sitting at the time of speaking, and dubkented a thing on which anyone was sitting at some past time.

(ii) the objective noun is also formed in exactly the same way as described above, but denotes a thing caused to perform an

( 67 )

action. E. </. iln/> becomes duhctanted a thing which is being caused to sit down, and ilul>kt'<ltt'<i a thing which was caused to sit down. Tim apparent anomaly presented by the use of the object-sign and the transitive tcnsc--ufH.\ with i'-tnus de- rived from an intransitive verb, is explained by the fact that the full forms are really dubiohieUmttd and dubiclukedted, i<-lii being, as explained in para. 68, a causative suffix which has the effect of converting intransitive into transitive verbs.

90. The distinction between these two classes of nouns, and between their meanings when formed from transitive and intransitive verbs respectively, has been explained at length, because these nouns are very frequently *used,J5y the Hos, and because facility in forming them will often h»ve the effect of extending one's vocabulary opportunely. The following series will help towards the understanding of the preceding rules which are apt to be confusing by themselves. Idi to carry, will illustrate the rules as applied to transitive verbs, and rakab to climb, will illustrate their application to intransitive verbs.

I. N. Iditanted

0. N.

1. N. 0. N.

Idietanted

Rakabtanted

Rakabetanted

I. N. Iditan taikented

0. N.

1. N. 0. N.

I. N.

0. N.

1. N. 0. N.

Jdietan taikented Rakabtan taikented

PRESENT.

A thing by means of which carrying is

being done.

A thing which is being carried. A thing upon which anyone is climbing. A thing which is being caused to climb.

IMPERFECT.

A thing by means of which carrying was

oeing done.

A thing which was being carried. A thing upon which anyone was climbing.

Rakabetan taikented A thing which was being caused to climb.

Idited Idieted Rakabted Rakabeted

FUTURE.

A thing by means of which carrying will

be done or is usually done, < . //. a basket. A thing which will be carried or is usually

carried. A thing upon which anyone will climb or

usually climbs, e. y. a ladder. A thing which will be caused to climb or

is usually caused to climb.

I. N. Jdiakanted

0. N. Idiakadted

1. N. Rakabakanted

0. N. Rakabakadted

1. N. Idikented

0. N. Idikedted

1. N. Eakabkentfd 0. N. Rakabkedted

I. N.

0. N. Uiledted

1. "N . Rakablented 0. N. Rakabledted

( ( 68 ) PERFECT.

A thing by means of which carrying has

been done.

A thing which has been carried. A thing upon which anyone has climbed. A thing which has been caused to climb.

PAST. A thing by means of which carrying was

done.

A thing which was carried. ,

A thing upon which anyone climfeed. A thing which was caused to climb.

PLUPERFECT.

A thing by means of which carrying had

been done.

A thing which had been carried. A thing upon which anyone had climbed. A thing which had been caused to climb.

Note. I These instrumental and objective participial nouns are most commonly used in their future forms to indicate a general class of objects. E. g. jomted - a thing which is usually eaten with, i. e. anything to eat with, i. e. a fork or a spoon, and jometed - a thing which is usually eaten, i. e. anything usually eaten, i. e. an edible. Similarly, dubted - a chair, isinted - a cooking pot, isineted - afly cooked thing, sited - a plough, irted - a sickle, ireted - a harvest or a standing crop, hereted - seed or arable land, gitited - a bed, gitieted - anything caused to lie flat, Jidkuko sdbted anything with which fish are caught, e. g. a fishing - rod.

2\ It may be mentioned here that ted, with or without the inanimate object-sign, is also added to adjectives of quality to form inanimate nouns, the affect of the inclusion or exclusion of the object-sign being to distinguish between artificial and natural qualities. Thus , Pundited - a white object, e. <?., chalk.

Pundieted - a whitened object, e. g. a whitewashed wall.

Loloted - a warm thing.

Loloeted - a thing which has been warmed.

( 69 ) CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.

91. These participles are formed by the addition of the ordinary postpositions to the participial adjectives, and are used to express subordi- nate clauses of time and place, in the same way as participial adjectives and nouns are used to express subordinate relative clauses. The post- positions in common use for this purpose are :

(/) Re - meaning ' in ', ' while', ' at the time of ', ' in the act of ' 'as', otc., and denoting simultaneity between the principal and subordinate verbs. E,t y., Gititan taikenre tdkdtaeny

kumbukedd - I stole his money while he was asleep. i (ii) Jto also meaning ' in the act of ', ' just as ', ' at the moment

of ', ' along with ', etc., and having the same denotation as re. E. y., Gomke Jiujulo mdndi dgueme Bring the dinner

as soon as the master comes. The use of lo in this connection

i

is comparatively uncommon.

(Hi) Te meaning * by ', * by means of ', etc., and used to express subordinate instrumental or causal clauses. E. g., Nidd nidd gitite dimsi dim si paitibu paiti daid We are able to work every day because we sleep every night.

Added to the past participial adjectives, te forms a past parti- cipial form which is used in exactly the same way, and as commonly, as the well-known Latin construction denoting priority of state or action over that expressed by the principal verb. E. </., Bdbd dgukedtee rudeand Having brought the paddy, he went back.

(iv) Chi used in the same way as te to foim past participles. E. y. Bdbd idikedchi hujurudeand After taking the paddy, he came back.

With both te and c/«, the ' d ' of the past tense-suffix is very often omitted, the above examples being ordinarily rendered agukete and idikechi.

(v) Ete— meaning ' from ', * since ' etc., and denoting continuity of state or action from the subordinate to the principal verb. E. g. Tdmkiete kding nelkid I have not seen him since I beat him.

(vi) Red— meaning ' as regards ', ' regarding ', 'of, ' about ', ' so

far as is concerned', etc. is merely introductory. E.g.

fdkd emetanredlany kapdjid—Let us talk about the giving of the money now. Ted is commonly used instead of red with

(vii)

f

participial adjectives, but never with nouns. E. g. Ote

ndmeted marang Gomke cliikand kde kdjikedd So far as the

getting of the land is concerned, the Deputy Commissioner said nothing.

Tdte, pdte, tare, pare, tdete and pdete are used with the same meanings as with nouns see Chapter III. E. g., Jonomlentdteny senotand I am going to the place where I

v\as born. Tdkd emledingtdre tdkding I returned him the money in the

very place where he had given

it to me. Two tigers came out ^rom near

the place wher?s I had been

sleeping.

emurdaid *

Aing gitilen taikenpdete bdrid kuld king oleand- king

EXAMPLES.

1. En band totfkii bar tdkdte

u&re dkiringakadd

2. Kumbuean uriko hdrkotan tai-

kenre kumbukoing sdbkedkod

3. Gitil idikented okonred

4. Amd kacherire chimin olko

taikend

5. Dongolte senoeankotdete sumang

bar hoking rudakandking

6. Aing kdjiadme kdjim aiumkedd

chi

7. Ai mdakad ddru otetaingre

taikend.

8. Chakad kdjietanree goeand

9. Anri mdrauledi kedkite tdmiclii-

kid.

10. Aing emadme tdkdte chikanam

kiringkedd

11. Ale senotan senotanlo niddeand

12. Gusind gititan taiken odre kum-

buko bukeddko

The man who shot that bear has

sold the skin for two rupees. I caught the thieves as they were

driving off the stolen cattle. Where is the basket in which sand

was taken away ?. How many clerks were there in

your Court ?. Only two of the man who went to

Chaibassa have returned. Did you hear what I said<toyou ?.

The trees which he has cut were

on my land.

He died in the act of telling a lie. He called the man who had breached

the embankment and had him

beaten. What did you buy with the money

I gave you ?.

Night fell while we were yet jour- neying. The thieves made a hole in the wall

of the room in which the owner

was sleeping.

13. Am tiisiii'H'tiiii lij<i ii

14. Aidge disum bdgekete Asdmtee

senoeand

15. Akod mindi m,'»»nko jomko

taikt'n kuld hdturenko holdko jdlontkid.

16. Aing gard kutire tingutan

taikenre isu purd hedegeleko botaing chetanteko dpireand.

17. Paiti chdbdkete odtee senoeand

18. Am oletan tmikenteding nelkedd

19. ' En otere paiti paitietankom

neldaid chi

20. 'Am mo#rd ndmkedtdete hdtu-

tam chimin sangingd

Who gave yon the cloth which you

am wearing ?. After leaving his own country, ha

went to Assam. Yesterday the villagers trapped the

ti^er which used to eat their

sheep and goats. Whilst I was standing on the bank

of the river, a large number of

•wild duck flew over my head. He finished his work and went

home.

I saw what you wer^ writing. Can you see those man who are

working in that field ?. How far is your village from the

place where you found the dead

body ?.

CHAPTER XIV.

PASSIVE VOICE.

92. The Passive Voice is used very sparingly, the active form being preferred whenever a sentence can be transposed without affecting its meaning. As indicated in para 45, the letter "o" is the sign of the passive voice except in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses of the indicative mood, where the active intransitive tense-suffixes are used. Only transitive verbs can take the passive voice, and there are of course no direct or indirect objects. The following is a complete conjugation of the passive voice of em - to give, only the first person singular being given under each tense.

- emotanding - I am given.

- emotan taikending - I was being given.

- emoding - I shall be given.

- emakanding - I have been given.

- emeanding - I was given.

- emlending - I had been given.

PRBSBNT TENSE IMPERFECT FUTURE PERFECT PAST

PLUPERFECT

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - emokding

- I may be given, let me be given.

f ( 72 )

CONDITIONAL MOOD - emotanredoing - If I am given.

IMPERATIVE ,, - emome - Be you given.

emoben - Be you two given.

emope - Be you (plural) given.

INFINITIVE ,, - emo - To be given.

PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - emotan, emotan taiken, emo, emakan, emean,

and emlen.

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - emotani, emotankiny, emotanko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - emotanted, emoted, emakanted, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES emotanre, emeante, emlenete, emored, emakan-

tdte, etc.

7. Only the present tense of the conditional ».mood has been given, but the other tenses are formed quite regularly, only differing from the active forms given in para. 74 in the omission of the inanimate object-sign le" and the insertion of the passive-sign 'o' between the root and the tense-suffix. The use of veo and honang with the passive voice is exactly the same as in paras. 75

and 76. \

2. The perfect participial adjectives and their corresponding

nouns of agency are very commonly used where separate adjectives of quality do not exist. E. g. dandiakan kui a married woman, chirdakani an accused person, rdpud- akan arsi a broken mirror, pereakan chain a full water- pot, isu sirmdakani a very old person, sedriakani an adult. Where separate adjectives of quality do exist, the use of the perfect participial form implies that the quality is artificial or the result of human endeavour. E. g., leser sharp ; fosgra&w— sharpened ; sibil sweet, sibilakan sweetened ; hende black, liendeakan blackened.

3. There are no participial instrumental nouns in the passive

voice. The objective nouns have the same meaning as the active objective nouns, e. g. emoted-a. thing that is usually given is exactly the same as emeted, and heroted a thing that is sown has the same meaning as liereted.

4. The passive verb jonomo to be born, always takes len instead

of ean as its past tense-suffix. E. g. jonomlende he was born.

( 73 ) EXAMPLES.

1. Hdtvtapg jdpdrt /«»//' i-liuiltin,- Has an elephant over been seen near

ncl,'<inti clti your village?

2. Atpakan kdfdtam >n<w<i Your swollen log will be cut off.

3. Isu t'lkdtf lij'ifalt1 itkidakand Our clothes have been washed very

badly.

4. Jdnd kding emoreo, hujuding Even if I am given nothing, I will

come.

5. A lea hdtnete Hnyitan yard ne The river which is now flowing

tirmd dnjedod from our village will dry up this

, year.

6. Undure gatlakan danddkuldiny 1 found the wounded hyaena in a

ndmkid cave.

7. Bairtee tollenredo, kde ueand If he had been tied with a rope, he

lionany would not have fallen.

8. Isu diany nuko jd chuildo kdko Those who drink much rice-beer

mundaod will never be rich.

9. Tdmeante hord kutire Idyeeand He was beaten and left on the side

of the road.

10. Kui pochodte dolentdre ne At the place where the woman had maiom pereakan lijdiny been raped, I picked up this halanyledd cloth full of blood.

CHAPTER XV.

REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

93. Reflexive verbs are those forms of transitive verbs in which the subject performs an action for or to itself, i. e., those in which the subject and the direct animate object are identical ( c. f. Note 1 to para. 49. ). They are formed by the addition of n to the root when the latter ends in a vowel, and by the addition of en when the root ends in a consonant. The following are examples :—

Agu to bring, becomes dyun - to bring oneself.

Em - to give ,,

13 ai - to make, ,,

lam - to strike,

Jir - to fan,

Abuny - to wash,

Atom - to move, ,,

- to give ,, (tain - to make oneself, to pretend. tauten - to strike jii'fit - to fan abunyen - to wash dtotnen - to move oneself, to get out of the way

74

Dul - to pour, becomes dulen Achu - to engage, dchun

Ord - to bathe, ordn

- to pour over oneself.

- to engage oneself.

- to bathe

Note Owing to the transferability of parts of speech, the formation of reflexive verbs is not confined to verbs. Thus, the noun dasi - a servant, becomes ddsin - to make oneself a servant, to serve, and the adjective hapd - quiet, becomes liapdn - to keep oneself quiet, to be silent.

94. The conjugation of these reflexive verbs is quite regular. The intransitive tense-suffixes are used, and the n or en, as the c,a.se may be, is dropped in the perfect, past and pluperfect tenses.0 Below will be found a full conjugation of the present indicative of emen with the 'first person singular of the other tenses and moods.

INDICATIVE MOOD- PRESENT TENSE.

Sing. 1st Person - Ementandiny - 1 am giving myself.

2nd - Ementanam - You are giving yourself.

3rd - Ementande - He or she is giving himself or

herself. Dual 1st - Ementandlany - You and I are giving ourselves.

Ementandling - He or she and I are giving our- selves.

2nd - Ementandben - You two are giving yourselves. 3rd - Ementandkiny - They two are giving themselves. Plural 1st - Ementandbu - You and I are giving ourselves. Ementandle - They and I

Ementandpe - You are giving yourselves. Ementandko - They are giving themselves.

Ementan taikendiny- I was giving myself.

2nd - 3rd

IMPERFECT TENSE FUTURE TENSE PERFECT TENSE PAST TENSE PLUPERFECT TENSE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

f CONDITIONAL MOOD

IMPERATIVE MOOD

- Emending

- Emakandiny

- Emkendiny

- Ernlending

- Emenkding

- Ementanredomy

- Emenme Emenben Emenpe

- I will give myself.

- I have given myself.

- I gave myself.

- I had given myself.

- I may give myself, let me give

myself.

- If I am giving myself.

- Give yourself.

- Give yourselves.

- Give yourselves (plural).

INFINITIVE MOOD - /•;//»<•/< - To give oneself.

I'AUTIOIPIAL ADJECTIVES - Emrntnn, <//«•///«// /.//£,-//, ••//«.-//, em-

iikitit, i mken, and emlt-n.

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - Ein<'iititiii,i-iin-niiiiikiny,ementankO)*ic* PARTICIPIAL INSTRUMENTAL NOUNS- Ein>-n< /tented, emki-nt, <.;, etc.

CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Ementanre, emenred, emkente, em-

lentdre, etc.

RECIPROCAL VERBS.

95. Reciprocal verbs are those forms of transitive verbs in which two or moVe individuals, or two or more sets of individuals, reciprocate the same action towards one another. They are formed by inserting the consonant p after the first vowel of the root. Examples are :

Em - to give, becomes epem - to give to each other or to one

another.

tapdm - to strike each other. kapdji - to speak with each other, to

converse.

kupuli - to question each other. nepel - to see each other.

napdm - to find each other. dapdrom - to meet each other. kipinny - to buy from each other, to trade. upudub - to show each other. japyar - to converse.

These verbs only take the dual and plural numbers, but are otherwise conjugated regularly with the intransitive tense-suffixes, no direct or indirect object-signs being inserted. The following is a complete conjugation of epem in the present indicative, the other tenses and moods being illustrated by the inclusive dual of the first person.

INDICATIVE MOOD— PRESENT TENSE.

Tdm

- to strike

Kdji

- to speak

Kuli

- to question

Nel

- to see

Nam

- to find

Ddrom

- to meet

Kiriny

- to buy

Udub

- to show

Jagar

- to talk

96.

These verbs

Dual - 1st person epemtandlang - You and I

epemtandling - He or she and 2nd epemtandben - You two 3rd epemtandklny - They two

Plural 1st ,, epemtandbu - You and I

epeititatidlt' - They ;ind I

2nd epemtandjw - You

3rd epemtandko - They

,1

are giving each other.

are giving one another.

IMPERFECT TENSE - epemtan taikendlang - You and I were giving each

other.

- epemdlang - You and I will give each other.

- epemakandlang - You and T have given each other.

- epemkendlang or epemeandlany - You and I gave

each other.

PLUPERFECT TENSE - epemlendlang - You and I had given each other. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - epemkdlany - You and I may give each other,

let you and I give each other.

CONDITIONAL MOOD - epemtanredolang - you and I are giving each other. IMPERATIVE Mood - epemben - Give each other.

epempe - Give one another (plural). INFINITIVE Mood - epem - To give each other. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - epemtan, epemtan taiken, epem, epemakan, epem-

ken, epemean and epemlen. ,

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - epemtank'mg, epemtanko, etc. PARTICIPIAL INSTRUMENTAL NOUNS - epemtanted, epelnted, epemkented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - epemtanre, epemtan taikenred, epemkente,

epemlentdete, etc.

EXAMPLES.

1. Jirubenkdle

2. Jirented dguaingme

3. Goentanree sdbeand

4. Uiukentee gitieand

5. Lokee baintand.

6. Kdam abungakanredo, entorsd

abungenme

7. JSelkedingte, chikanrede ukund

8. iSingi satub tingulen taikenko

isuko idgdeand.

9. A'tomlenredoko, kdko tegdeand

honany.

10. Auriincf iu jdked dlope hundind

11. Nepelredolang, kipirmgdlang

12. Fdben paitire depengdpe

May we warm ourselves at the fire.

Bring me a fan.

He was caught in the very act of

committing suicide. Having covered himself with a

blanket, he went to aleep. He is pretending to limp. If you have not washed yourself, do

so at once. Why does she always hide herself

when she sees me. The men who had been standing all

day were very tired. If they had got out of the way, they

would not have been trodden on. Don't assemble together until I call

out. If we see each other, we will trade

together. Help one another in all things.

!.'{. T<i/>«iik>ni oiitiiiiti dkiringakadd 1-1. '/'ii/iiiinki'iikt) fnhkftt !:<>(,• D<>n- yoltt> nil hum

!."». Alinii k,ij'<ijik,'nf<i>;-n;i bdye- akadd

16. I loin kirin;il<-(l liiTi-iniko n/>-

i/(li/!'t<t/i<i

17. .\/<ir<i/><i Gomke epter <^e Pa-

tore ctiKiktdii

18. Sapdkikente isuldng jupvrikend

19. KnnJntkinyteperanytantaikenre » fiikd idiketeng nireand

20. *I)apdromeancki engd ondo

kuihonte cheperebkendkiny.

I have sold flic :*1 joining house also. ' 'atdi t lion- jn-rsons who struck one

another and take them to Chai-

bassa. I have left it in the place where

he and I conversed together. Tiny are showing one another the

seed which they bought yesterday. The Deputy Commissioner has given

§the disputed land to Pator. They assumed each other's names

and became great friends. While the two thieves were quar-

reling amongst themselves, I

ran away with the money. The mother and her daughter kissed

each other after they met.

CHAPTER XVI.

IRREGULAR VERBS.

97. Irregular forms of any kind are uncommon in agglutinative languages. This is because these languages are, as a rule, character- istic of a nomadic state of society where language must necessarily be intelligible to many, though their intercourse be but limited. Defi- nite ideas are connected with certain sounds, and it is essential that this connection should be constant. There are accordingly only a very few irregular verbs in Ho, and, as in most languages, the verb " to be " is the most important of them. In English, that verb may be either a mere link-word or a real predicate, but, in Ho, the copula or verbal- izing agent d is used as a link-word, while mend is the predicate form. The difference between the two is similar to that between the Bengali 33 and ^TftW? which is explained as follows by Beames in his " Grammar of the Bengali Language " : "The matter may be mad^e clear by observing that there are, in many Aryan languages, two verbs meaning " to be ", one of which is a mere copula or linking-word used to connect other words in a sentence where no special stress is laid on the idoa of being, while the other is used when the idea of being is an important element in the sentence ". Thus, Ne dirt nambald - This

stone is heavy. En ddru

- That is a high tree. Donyolre mended

- He is in Chaibassa. A'sar odrt> mend - The bow is in the house.

( ( 78 )

98. The conjugation oE the verb mend meaning " to be ", " to exist ", "to be present", is as follows. It will be noticed that, in the present tense, the subject-sign is inserted between the root and the copula :

INDICATIVE MOOD PRESENT TENSE.

Sing. 1st Person Mendingd - I am, I exist, I am present.

2nd Mendmed - You are, etc.

3rd Mended - He or she is, etc.

Mend - It is, etc. ( same form for dual and

plural ). Dual 1st Person Mendlangd - You and I are, etc.

Mendlingd - He or she and I are, etc. '

2nd Mendbend - You two are, etc. (

3rd Mendkingd - They two are, etc. o

Plural 1st Person Mendbud - You and I are, etc.

Mendled - They and I are, etc. '

2nd ,, Mendped - You are, etc.

3rd Mendkod - They are, etc.

FoTORE TENSE - Hobdoding, hobdoam, hobdode, etc. I, you, he or she will be. Tainding, tainam, tainde, etc. I, you, he or she will remain. PAST TENSE - Taikending, taikenam, taikende, etc. I, you, he or she was, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD - Mendingredo - If I am, etc.

- Hobdoredoing - If I will be, etc.

- Taikenredoing - If I was. IMPERATIVE MOOD - Tainme - be present, remain.

Tainben - ,, (dual).

Tainpe •- (plural).

INFINITIVE MOOD - Mend - to be. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - Mending, mendme, mende, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - Mendi, mendking, mendko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - Mendted, Iwbdoted, tainted, taikented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Mendingre, mendmetdre, tainred, taikente, etc.

99. Mend is also commonly used to express possession, the con- structicn being similar to the familiar Latin one with esse. Thus, the sentence " I have a goat " may be rendered :- Aind miad merom mended = ( literally, ' my one goat exists' ). Miad merom mendcdtaing - ( literally, ' one goat is mine ' c. f. form given

in para. 39. )

Aingtdre miad merom mended - ( literally, ' in me one goat is ' ). Of these three forms, the first is the one most commonly used, but the other two are quite idiomatic, and the last is often very useful.

( 79 )

) Note When nn'iin means "to have" or "to possets", th«- participial

nouns of agency formed from the present tense nre

>iK'i/(if,'ni. thtftdtenking and ///</, <i/- />/•<>. /•,. </.

Memiku tiikdko mimed - Those who are present will receive

money. fdkd mendtenko bdbdko named - Those who have money

will get paddy. The forms for the other tenses do not differ. Thus, ,

Hold taikeni kcdime Call the man who was present

yesterday. Miindi taikeni liuringlekde emadingd - The man who had

cooked rice gave me some.

*

100. The antonym of mend is 6ano, the negative particle kd being used in sentences where only the copula d is necessary. JE. y. Ne gqrd kd ikird - This river is not deep. Aivd kdtu kd leserd - My knife is not sharp.

Aled nature penainko bangkod - There are no weavers in our village. Eu disunite hord banod - There is no road to that country.

The conjugation of banod is as follows :-

INDICATIVE MOOD PRESENT TENSE.

Sing. 1st Person bangingd - I am not, I am absent.

2nd bangmed - You are not, etc.

3rd bangded - He or she is not, etc.

banod - It is not ( same form for dual and

plural ).

Dual 1st ,, banglangd - You and T are not, etc.

banglingd - He or she and I are not, etc.

2nd bangbend - You two are not, etc.

3rd bangkingd - They two are not, etc.

Plural 1st bangbud - You and I are not, etc.

bangled - They and I are not, etc.

2nd bangped - You are not, etc.

3rd bangkod - They are not, etc.

FOTDRE TENSE - kding hobdod, etc. I will not be, etc. PAST TENSE - kding taikend, etc. - I was not, etc. CONDITIONAL MOOD - bangmgredo - If I am not, etc.

kding hobdoredo - If I will not be, etc.

kding taikenredo - If I was not, etc.

( 80 )

IMPERATIVE MOOD - bangme - be absent.

bangben - ,, (dual).

bangpe - (plural}. INFINITIVE MOOD - bano - not to be, to be absent. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - banging, bangme, bangde, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - bangdi, bangking, bangko, PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - banoted, kd liobdoted, kd taikented, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - bang-mere, bangingtdte, kd taikenred, etc.

Note Bano is also the negative mend used to express possession. Thus, " I have no norses " may be translated A.ina sddomko bangkod ,

Sddomko bangkodtaing f

Aingtdre sddomko bangkod.

Of these, the last form expresses the meaning most clearly, I think. The second is also clear, but is apt to be unwieldy, while the first may be taken as meaning " my horses are absent ". Used in this sense, the participial nouns of agency are banoteni, banotenking and banotenko.

EXAMPLES.

1. Ddru bano disum - A country without trees. Sir mend disum - A country with forests.

Kuldko taiken disum - A country that used to contain tigers.

2. Engdteaputeteking bangking lion - A child without father or mother,

i. e. an orphan.

3. Mende od ndndiakand - The house he lives in has fallen down.

4. A ingtdre jometed banod - I have nothing to eat.

5. Burn terpd mend hdturee - He is hiding himself in the village

ukuntand beyond the hill.

6. Abu ote banotenko ringdre - We who have no land will die first

siddtebu gojod in time of famine.

7. Mendingre dguime - Bring him while I am hore.

8. Kdam taikenreng paitichdbd- - I have finished the work in your

*akadd absence.

9. Undim amlekd kde eseld - Your young brother is not so fair

as you are.

10. En isu purd uriko taikenitdre - That man who once had very many nddo jdnko bangkod cattle now has none at all.

101. The two verbs men and metd, both meaning " to say ", " to tell ", appear to be variations of the same original root. Men is used

for all ordinary purposes, >//,/<» ol)jrrt-si<m lias to l>r in-, Tied. Tli<> of both words. INDICATIVE MOOD. PBBSBNT.

Mcnetanding - 1 am saying ( it ) -

IMPERFECT.

Mem-tun taikending - I was saying

FOTURB.

Mi t't'>iin<i.

PERFECT. Menakadding PAST. Menkedding.

PLUPERFECT. Menledding SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Menekding

CONDITIONAL MOOD. Menet'inredoiny, etc.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Meneme

Meneben

Menepe

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Men

PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES.

Menetan, mene^

Menked, etc.

PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY.

Menei, meneking,

Meneko, etc.

employed wlii-m-vcr an indirect following is a complete conjugation

metanttandi/i// - I am saying to ( tell- ing) you

metaitandiny - I am saying to ( tell- ing) him.

metatntan taike tiding - I was telling

you.

metaitan taikendiny - I was telling

him.

metamding. metaidiin/.

metadmeding. metaidiny.

metamkdiny. metaikdiny.

metamredoiny, etc. metairedoiny, etc.

metaime. metaiben. metaipe.

metd.

metamtan, metai, metadme, etc.

jnetami, metamkim], metamko, etc.

( 82 )

r

PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS.

Menetanted, meneted, metamtanted, metaited,

Menkedted, etc. metadmeted, etc.

CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES.

Menetanre, menetdre, metamtanre, metaitdre.

Menkedte or mente, etc. metadmete, etc.

Note 1. Men and metd are very similar to the Latin inquit, the idiom in both cases requiring the use of the oratio recta. For example, the sentence "He said he would come tomorrow," is translated " Gadding liujud mentee menkedd," which is literally equivalent to " I will come tomorrow,' having said, he said ". The construction is simple enougty, but care will be required at first in making the necessary transpo- sitions of words when converting the indirect to the direct

form of speech.

2. The same rule must be observed in translating subordinate

clauses beginning with "in order that," and similar expres- sions, the construction being again similar to the Latin in that the subjunctive mood is used. E. g. Ne lijd rookd mente, - Put this cloth in the sun in order

jet ere ememe that it may become dry.

Alokdpe eperang - In order that you may not quarrel,

mente, oteng I shall divide the land between

hdtingaped you.

Aid erding dandiikd - Gora killed Soma in order to marry

mente, Gora Somde his wife.

goekid

3. Mente also means 'because' in Ho, its evolution being

apparently as follows. The sentence : Kdam trikend mentee tdmkedingd means literally "Saying 'you were not present', he beat me". This may be freely rendered : " He beat me because I was not present," and mente thus became a mere causal suffix, the direct form being abandoned and the same sentence rendered : Kding taikendmentee tdmkedingd. The latter is the form used now for causal clauses. E. g. Taiomtem seterlend - You will not get anything because

mente, jdnd kdam you arrived afterwards.

ndmed Bangdedmente, alom » Do not accuse him because he is

chirdid absent.

( 83 )

Caudal clauses may also be expressed by two separate co-ordinate sentences, or by the use of nedmente or endmente (therefore) \\itlitlic principal sentence. Thus, the first example given above may bo rend'-red cither : Tiii<»ntem seterlend ; jdnd kdam mi/ma, or taiomtem sflerlend, i minti /iff jdnd kadm named.

I. The verb k-'iji - to say, to speak, to talk, to tell, may of

course be used instead of either men or metd.

5. There is one important exception to the general rule that

metd is only used when an indirect animate object has to

, be expressed. I refer to the very common question which

» the student will have to use often : " What do you call

this ? " This is rendered : Ned chikandpe (chindpe ) metd ?

So also /-'// (fi'irn chindpe metd - What do yon call that tree ?

Sarjom ddnile metd - We call it a sdl tree.

102. The next irrogular verb is holdo - to become, the conjugation of which is as follows :

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT - hobdotanding - I become (or) am becoming. IMPERFECT - hobdotan taikending - I was becoming. FUTURE - hobdoding - I shall become.

PERFECT - hobdakanding - I have become. PAST - hobdeanding - I became.

PLUPERFECT - Iwbdlending - I had become. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - hobdokding - I may become. CONDITIONAL MOOD - hobdoredoing - If I become.

IMPERATIVE MOOD- akanme ~\

, * (used only in conjunction with

akanben > At

i some other word.)

akanpe J

INFINITIVE MOOD - Iwbdo - to become. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - liobdotan, hobdo, hobdean, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS OF AGENCY - hobdoi, hobdotring, hobdoko, etc.

I

PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - hobdotanted, hobdoted, Jwbdeanted, etc. CONJUNCTIVE PARTICIPLES - Jwbdotanre, hobdotdre, Iwbdeante, etc.

]. The future tense of hobdo is used to express necessity or compulsion, the principal verb being in the infinitive moodf with the postposition Padded. /£.//. Ant smote hnbdod - You will have to go, you must go. Mere duty or obliga- tion is expressed by the infinitive followed by the word

( 84 )

f

lagdtingd. E.g. Am seno lagdtingd - You ought to go, it is your duty to go.

2. The imperative of hobdo, which is more or less an auxiliary verb, is only used in conjunction with other words to express continuity of action from the present into the future until circumstances cause a cessation. E. g. Senakanme - keep on going, Tiguakanme - continue standing, Hapdnme - be quiet, Hapdakanme - be quiet and continue so.

105. The last verb of this class which we shall notice is kd - to be unwilling, to say ' no '. Its conjugation is somewhat irregular in forma- tion.

ii

INDICATIVE MOOD

i

PRESENT kdingdtand, kamdtand, kdedtand - I, you, be or she is unwilling. FUTURE - kdingd, kamd, kded - I, you, he or she won't. 0

PAST kdingdeand, kamdeand, kdedeand - I, etc. would not. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD - kdingdkd, kamdkd, kdedkd - I, etc. may be unwilling. CONDITIONAL MOOD - kdingdredo, kamdredo, kdedredo - If I, etc. am

unwilling.

IMPERATIVE MOOD alomd, alobend, aloped - Don't do that. INFINITIVE MOOD - kd - to be unwilling. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES - kdingdtan, kam, kdedean, etc. PARTICIPIAL NOUNS or AGENCY - kdedi, kdedkwg, kdedko, etc. PARTICIPIAL OBJECTIVE NOUNS - kaingdtanre, kamdtare. kdedeante, etc.

Note Ea to be willing, to say 'yes ', to agree, is conjugated like an ordinary transitive verb, i. e. edetanding, ededing, edkedding, etc. Edadmede chi - did he say ' yes ' to you, did «he grant your request ?.

EXAMPLES.

1. Pancham emte hobdod - You must pay your rent.

2. Engamapumtcking mandting - You ought to obey your parents.

lagdtingd

3. Menkedtedpe aiumkedd chi - Did yon hear what he said ?

4. Hdttengtand mentee menkedd - He said he was going to the market.

5. Ai menetantaikenre bisian bing - As he was speaking, a poisonous

hudkid snake bit him.

6. Erdtam ondo misam tdmiredo, - Tell Birsa that, if he beats his wife

Gomke tamichimed mente again, I shall have him beaten. Birsd metaime

7. Epser ute alinn .«/V<j int-ntt- Sotna

kdjiatmt

8. Jiipiii'itiiii'ildiii/ini'iiti' <nn lmn<j-

iii, r,' enitamiiKj s,iiti[»iid.

9. Niddre dding asieredo nu </<ti-

kd'imj int'iit*' chut n. netdre bdy<

10. /1m huyln M/tnda mendmed IHCH- Iftig atkdrkedd inendo ndd<> ,j<i c/iuildo kding sdria»t<i

Ti-11 Soma not to cultiv:it« the dis- puted land. lir-causd we an- I'rionds, I shall look

after your wife while you an-

away. Leave the waterpot here so that, if

I want water during the night,

I can have a drink. I thought you were a good .Mum la,

but now I shall never believe

you.

CHAPTER XVII.

IMPERSONAL VERBS.

104. Impersonal verbs are those which denote subjectively certain physical feelings or mental conditions. The following is a list of the more common verbs of this class.

1. JBobiur

2. Boro

3. Client d

4. Gamang -

5. Giu

, 6. Hdrob

1. Hdsu

8. Uidting

9. Kurkur

10. Ldgd

11. Lolo

12. Rabang

13. Rdnsd

14. Renge

15. Rusurusu

16. Sanang

17. Sdri

18. Suku

19. Tetang

20. Urgum

to be giddy to fear to be jealous, to be ticklish, to be ashamed, to be satisfied, to be ill. to be sorry to be angry, to be tired, to be hot. to be cold, to rejoice, to be hungry, to have ague, to desire, to believe, to be pleased, to be thirsty, to be warm.

. ( 86 )

When conjugated impersonally, the pronominal sign denoting the person who experiences the physical or mental condition is inserted in the verb in the same way as the animate object-sign of transitive verbs. All these verbs may, however, be construed personally, in which case the pronominal sign is added as an ordinary subject-sign to the verb, the latter being treated as intransitive. Both conjugations are quite regular, and it will suffice therefore to give the first person singular of the tenses

of the indicative mood in each case.

r

IMPERSONAL. , PERSONAL.

PRESENT.

Sukuinytand - It pleases me ... Sukutanding - I am please^.

IMPERFECT. «•

Sukuingtan taikend It was pleasing Sukutan taikending - I was being

me ... pleased.

FUTURE.

Sukuingd - It will please me ... Sukuding - I will be pleased. PERFECT.

Sukuakadingd - It has pleased me ... Sukuakanding - I have been pleased. PAST.

Sukukedingd - It pleased me Sukueanding - I was pleased.

PLUPERFECT. Sukuledingd - It had pleased me ... Sukalending - I had been pleased.

105. It will be obvious to the student that some of these verbs may be used objectively, e. </., a person may be pleased with, ashamed of, or angry with, some other person apart from the subjective feeling which he may himself experience from some inanimate cause. In such cases, the verb is of course transitive, but the animate object must be expressed (c. /. para. 69 ante ) by the full form of the personal pronoun so as to avoid confusion with the impersonal construction. Thus,

Sukidngtand - It pleases me or 1 am pleased. Sukuaingtande - He is pleased with me or I please him. Giukedmed - It shamed you or you were ashamed. Giuadmede - He was ashamed of you or you shamed him. Kurkurid - It will anger him or he will be angry. Kurkuraiding - I will be angry with him or he will anger me.

106. The word atkdr (to think, to feel) may also be used im- personally with the suffix lekd (like, as though, as if) to express an impression which does not amount to a positive conviction, or a bodily feeling that is merely similar to one produced by some other cause. Lekd takes the place of the copula and forms a kind of conjunctive participle. E. g.

( 87 )

Jd ijnttldo kdlmj inlkilfkd atkdrtmj- - I am under the impression tliat I

l.uid never saw him.

(ii'jofiinlekd at k<iri ni/tand - I feel as if I am dying.

Tdinli-idekd hold at kdrktdti«j<i - I felt yesterday as if I had been

beaten.

EXAMPLES.

1. Kd hii/H sanaiujkid - He did not wish to come.

2. Hold uldd inn ti'titii<}kcdiii<jd - I felt very thirsty night before last.

(isuiny tetanyeand)

3. Kurkurkite (kurkureante) odetee - He got angry and went out of the

cieand house.

4. Kurkuraite odetee oleand - He got angry with him and went

out of the house.

5. Renyemetan taikendmente jome- - I gave you food because you were

tediny emadtned feeling hungry.

6. Rdvsdkoisu sirmdko jidd - Those who are always joyful will

live many years.

7. Amd bo liasuingtanre alope - Don't make a noise while my head

kdkald is paining.

8. Mermeredo beoleme If you find it bitter, spit it out.

9. Balbalinykd mentee uiuakattd - He has covered himself up in order

to sweat. 10. Rusurusulekd atkdrinytand - I feel as if I am going to have ague.

CHAPTER XVIII.

COMPOUND VERBS.

107. Compound verbs are of two kinds, viz.

( i ) those in which some modification of the primary idea conveyed by the principal verbal root is expressed by the ad'dition of some other root, the whole compound being conjugated as a single transitive verb. Such compounds may sometimes be rendered into English literally, but more often some circumlocu- tion is necessary ; and

( ii ) those which are not strictly speaking compounds, but which, consist of two separate verbs so closely connected together as practically, and in some cases actually, to form compounds.

r 88 )

108. In the first class of compound verbs, the modifying roots generally bear the same meanings as when they are used separately. This method of forming compounds by the junction of two separate roots is very common. The modifying roots may sometimes have meanings different from those attaching to them when standing by themselves, and, in a few cases, they have even ceased to be used independently. Common examples of roots used to form compounds while retaining their original meanings are : ete ( to begin ), bdge ( to leave ), chdbd ( to finish ), goe (to kill), ndm (to find), Id (to exceed ), sare (to remain over )} rud ( to return ), pere ( to fill, be full ), sidd ( first ), pdrom ( across ), der ( before), japd ( close ), and filing (long ). Examples of « roots so used with meanings different from their original ones are :- idi,fdyu, ondo, torsd, ddrd, and ichi ( vide, para 68 ) ; while examples of modifying ropts which have become mere suffixes are : urum, urd, tud, 6d, £a6, urui, utar, aid ( atdn ), and renyd. The meanings to be attached to the lasUtwo classes will be apparent from the following examples, which include also sentences illustrating the use of the first class : -

1. Holde paitietekedd - He started work yesterday.

2. Nelkedingrem olbdgekedd - You stopped writing as soon as

you saw me.

3. Jomchdbdketee oleand - He finished eating and went out.

4. Hdturenko kuldko tdmgoekid - The people of the village killed the

tiger by beating him.

5. Adean tdkding tegdndmkedd - 1 found the lost rupee by treading

on it.

6. Senoean hdteteng nuldakadd - I have drunk more than I did at

the last market. ,

7. Aiub lagite huringlekd mdndiing - 1 have eaten and left a little cooked

jomsareakadd rice for the evening.

8. Am ote emrudte ( emurdte) - You will have to give back the land.

hobdod

9. Swrpangko tuperekid - The wasps stung him all oVer.

10. Birsd idmsiddkedingd - Birsa struck me first.

11. Jm% niddre gardko senpdromed - They will go across the river

to-night.

12. Gard pdromderingme - Cross me over the river first.

13. f)dr-ue mdjapdetan taikend - He was cutting the tree close to the r ground.

14. Sddome toljilingakaid - He has tied the horse with a long

rope.

15. Kerdkoe tdmidikedkod - He kept on beating the buffaloes.

16. Hdtute ididymm.' - Take him to the village and bring

him back.

17. Seta Ittuiondomeredo, entorsd - If the dog bites you again, shoot

ttihii/inu' him at once.

18. Tisimj I >»inju(tt>ni senoredo, ned - If you go to Chaibassa today, take

iditorsdetne this as you go.

19. Tinny Donyoltem senoredo, - If you go to Chaibassa todny, bring

tni tdkdrcd lijd dyuddrdeme a cloth worth one rupee as you

come.

20. Chiminang dnjdte hold data, ne - Have this work finished as soon as

pniti chdbdichieme possible.

21. Kumbu*; nelurumkid - He identified the thief by seeing

him.

22. Ode jutidurumkedd - He recognised the house by touching

it.

23. Am hujuurdre odteny rudd - When you come back, I shall return

home.

24. Ned Donyolte iditudeme - Take this to Chaibassa and come

back.

25. Toteeante kuld nirbdkedde - After being shot, the tiger ran about

here and there.

26. Eed dyutabeme - Bring the medicine quickly.

27. Birkerd losodree juduruieand - The bison was stuck fast in the mud.

28. Birhoko yoeutarkidko - The savages (i. e. those living in

the forest) killed him completely.

29. Hord kutire taiatdmn, - Wait at the side of the road until

I come.

30. Ainy itinakad mdndijoinrenyd- - Be sure and eat the rice I have

erne cooked.

\(,te J, The student should notice the fine distinction between Nos. 2 and 3, and between Nos. 16, 18, 19, and 24.

2. There is one more root forming common compounds, 'which are, however, highly idiomatic and are only used among the Hos themselves. This root is ;'<wn, and its resultant compounds are conjugated intransitively. It must be distinguished from the ordinary rootyom (to eat) which is not used to form compounds. Umbulre dubjompe means, as near as it can be translated, "Sit at ease in the shade", and Sadom idijomme means "Take the horse if you please".

( 90 )

109. The second class of compound verbs occurs in conjunction with the verbs nel (to see) and seno (to go). Take the sentence : " I saw him coming." This may be rendered in Ho in three ways :- (i) hujutan- ing nelkid. (ii) hujutanreng nelk'td, and (iii) nelhujukiding. The first form is a contraction of hujutandeng nelkid - he is coming, I saw him. The second form is simply the conjunctive participial form (see para. 91) and is the one most commonly used. A distinction may be noted here between hujutanreng nelkid and Imjutanloinq nelkid. The former means " I saw him coming," and the latter " I saw him as I was coming," the use of the postposition lo indicating that the participial clause modifies the subject, and not the object, of the sentence. The third form is a pure compound, the principal verb being placed first with its tense-suffixes,

etc. added to the second verb- «

110. We may next consider the sentence : " He went to bring

wood." This also may be rendered in Ho in three ways, viz., (i), sdn dguekding mentee senoeand, (ii) sdn dgutee senoeand, and (iii) sdn dguti- eand. The first of these forms has already been explained in Note 2. to para. 101, its literal meaning being " he went in order that he might bring wood." The second form contains the root, with the locative of motion and the subject-sign of the third person singular, preceding the principal verb. The third form is the idiomatic one. It is really a con- traction of sdn dgute i (shortened form of the third personal pronoun singular) senoeand. The e of the locative of motion is supplanted by the pronoun, and the principal verbal root disappears, the tense-suffix and copula being added to the other verbal root. This disappearance of the root sen or seno is quite common. It occurs, for instance, in the forms okontemiand - where are you going ? and okontekoeand - where did they go ? All persons and numbers of the personal pronouns may be used in the same way, the resultant forms being ting, telang, teling, tebu, tele, tern, teben, tepe, ti, teking, teko. A curious contraction in the third person singular of the past tense may be noticed. Instead of sdn dgutieand and okontieand (where did he go ?), the Ho will say sdn dgutid and okontid, which are of course also the forms for the future tense, and may mean either V he went to bring wood " or *' he will go to bring wood," and " where did he go ? " or " where will he go ? " respectively.

EXAMPLES.

o 1. Diang jd chuildo kding nelnukid - I never saw him drink rice beer.

( 2. Sitanloing nelkid - While ploughing, I saw him.

3. Sitanreng nelkid - I saw him ploughing.

4. Nelukedmere aingge ueand - As I saw you fall, I fell myself.

( 91 )

5. Doli Mini irt,inlm nslko'i - Come, let us see them catting tho

paddy.

6. Mitndd dipititumi - Ho is going to bring the Munda.

7. Jomtingtan inikcini - I was going to eat.

8. /:'n</<it, iif-ltid - lie went to see his mother. .

9. Setdre epscr nte neltid - He will go to see the disputed land

in tho morning. 10. Gapd am neltekod - They are going to see you tomorrow.

CHAPTER XIX.

NUMERALS.

I. CARDINAL NUMERALS.

111. In the introduction to his " Mundari Grammar", Hoffman says : " The Munda's arithmetical notions are of course very simple. He has as many cardinal numbers as he has fingers on both hands, or toes on both feet, riz. ten distinct forms. And, as though he had summed up fingers and toes into one grand total, he has adopted a special word for twenty, viz. hist" This is a pleasant conceit, but it is not altogether satisfactory except as an explanation of the genesis of numeration in most known languages. In English, for example, there are also ten distinct separate forms for the first ten cardinal numbers, the remainder being compounds of those ten. Thus " fourteen " is " four ten, " " twenty " is " two tens ", and so on. In Ho, the cardinal numerals are almost exactly the same as in Mundari, an important difference being, however, that, whereas th<j Mundari numerals have been largely displaced by Hindi ones, even in tracts where the latter language is comparatively unknown, the Ho numerals are still used freely throughout the Kolhan, where Hindi numerals would not ordinarily be understood.

112. The numbers from 1 to 10 inclusive, and 20, have separate forms. Between 10 and 20, the numbers are formed by adding the first nine numbers to the shortened form for 10, viz. gel. Thus, gel miad (ten and one, i.e. eleven), #<?£ taruid (ten and six, L e. sixteen). The numbers above 20 are calculated in stages of twenties. Thus 40 is hdr hisi - two twenties ; 60 is ape hisi - three twenties, and so on. Between 20 and 40, or between 40 and 60, the numbers are formed by adding the first nineteen numbers to hisi ( twenty ) and hdr hisi ( forty ; respectively. Thus, hisi geled (twenty and ten, t. e. thirty ), hisi tjel moid ( twenty and ten and five, t. e. ' thirty-five ) and Mr hisi <jel trilid ( two twenties, ten and eight, i. e. fifty eight ). The following list will make tho matter clear :

( 92 )

1. miad, mid, mi. 30. Am geled, Jiisi gel.

2. bdrid, bar. 31. hisi gel miad, hisi gel mi.

3. aped, ape. 32. hisi gel bdrid, hisi gel bdr.

4. upunid, upun. 40. bdr hisi.

5. moid, moi. 41. bdr hisi miad, bdr hisi mi.

6. tumid, turui. 50. bdr hisi geled, bdr hisi gel.

7. aed, ae. 60, ape hisi.

8. irilid, iril. 70. ape hisi geled, ape hisi gel.

9. area, are. 80. upun hisi.

10. geled, geL * 90. upun hisi geled, upun hisi gel.

11. gel miad, gel mi. 100. moi hisi.

12. gel bdrid, gel bdr. 110. moi hisi geled, ?»oi hjsi gel. 17. gel aed, gel ae. 120 turui hisi. '

20. Am. 130. turui hisi geled, turui hisi gel.

21. Am miad, hisi mi. 200. gel hisi.

22. hisi bdrid, hisi bdr. 300. gel moi hisi.

Note 1. It is doubtful whether the Ho imagination can rise much beyond 200, and it is almost certainly limited by 4UO, which is equivalent to twenty twenties or the square of the highest distinct numeral. I have noticed that the Hindi sau (a hundred) is used in some places, but it is really only understood by the literate Hos.

2. The word dosi is commonly used for 30 besides Am geled.

3. It will be seen that most of the numerals have two forms

and it is important to know when each should be used. It is a safe rule always to use the full form except in the following cases when the shortened form should be used :—

( i ) In the formation of the compound numerals, when only the last number retains the full form, e. g. gel bdrid (twelve), bdr hisi (forty), ape hisi gel tumid (twenty-six) and turui hisi geled (one hundred and thirty"). , (ii) Both simple and compound numerals take the

shortened form before words denoting measures of any kind, such as gaudi (a league or kos~), tdkd (a rupee), mukd (about feet in length), pati (two seers) and bisid (twenty seers). E. g.

£

Nenete Dongol gel bdr gaudi mend - Chaibassa is twelve

leagues away from here.

( 93 )

Ape kiai gel fund 1<iknimj mtui'i - I will give him

seventy six rupees.

Upun mukdren kuld taikend - It was a six foot tiger,

(iii) In enumerations of men, families and cattle, th<« words ho, od and l>o being used in apposition. E. y. Airtd kodhou mi ho (mi ho kodhon) kuilmiiko itjum li»k<> mendkod.

I have one son and four daughters.

Ne hdture bdr hisi gel od Hoko ondo gel moi od Pevamko mendkod.

There are fifty Ho and fifteen Tanti families in this village.

Ape bo kerdko ondo ae bo mindiko kuld goeakadkode. The tiger has killed three buffaloes and seven sheep.

II. ORDINAL NUMERALS. i 113. The only ordinal numerals in use are sidd (first) and etd

(second). For the higher numbers the following constructions are used,

and the sense is generally made clearer by pointing out the object where

possible.

Bdrid ddru taiomred mdeme

, Cut the third tree. Sana ddru bagekete miad maemc

Upun hoko taiomreni dquime )

Bring the fifth man. Up'in hoko bdyekedkote miad dyuime )

Ti.<ingete ape md Myekete taiom betare rudd - He will return on the fourth

day from now.

III. PROPORTIONAL NUMERALS.

114.' Proportional numerals are formed by adding ditvd to the shortened forms of the cardinals.

Once

misd, midinjd

Eleven times

gelmiduim

Twice

... bdrduvd

Twenty times

hisidittKi

Thrice

apedutfd

Twenty nine times...

hisiareduyd

Four times Five times

upunduyd moidund

Thirty times Forty times

hi»iyeldu%d, dosiduyd bdrhitiduyd

Ten times

gelduftd

Fifty times

bdrhisigelduvd

IV. DISTRIBUTIVE NUMERALS.

115. Distributive numerals are formed by reduplicating the first syllable, or the whole, of the cardinal numerals. One each ... Mimiad, miad miad, mipiad Two each ... Bdbdrid, bdria band

r 94 >

Three each ... Apapid, aapid, apid apid. Five each ... Moimoid, momoid, moid moid. Ten each ... Gelgeled, gegeled, geled geled.

Note—I. The preceding forms are used adjectively and, when placed before words denoting measures of any kind, are shortened in the same way as the cardinal numerals. E. a. Bdbdr ( bar bar ) tdkding emadkod - J gave them two rupees each. Upupun (uupun, upun upun) pati bdbdko dguakadd - They have brought four Data's ( eight seers ) of paddy each.

2. When used adverbially, the postposition te, which is used

commonly in the formation of adverbs of manner, is added to the full forms of the distributive numerals. Thus, Mimiadte, miad miadte, mipiadte - One by one. Upupunidte, uupunidte, upunid upunidte - four by i I four. Tuturuidte, turid turidte - Six by six. Araredte, aaredte, area aredte- Nine by nine.

3. The first syllable of other adjectives is similarly reduplicated,

where a repetition of the adjective might be expected, to express quantity, e. g. Hupuring ddru sumang mdeme- Only cut small trees. Maparang hdkuko dgukom - Bring several big fish.

V. FRACTIONAL NUMERALS AND APPROXIMATIONS.

116. The only fraction known to the Hos is <d/d-ahalf. E.g. Miad chdndu tdld - a month and a half ; en joete tdld emaingme - give me half that fruit. For all other fractions, recourse must be had to circum- locution in which the word handting ( a part or a share ) is employed. E. g. Upun handtingete am mi handling ondo ako ape handting baite hobdod - You will have to make one quarter and they will make three quarters.

117. Approximations may be expressed either by putting together two numbers which are near the exact number, or by suffixing lekd ( like) to any one number in the vicinity of the correct one. E. g.

Hisi hisi moi hoko holdko hujulend - About twenty or twenty five men

came yesterday.

Tumi aeduvding senoeand - I went six or seven times.

r Moi hisile'kd* lioko mendkod - About a hundred men are present.

« Upunduvdlekde tdmkedingd ' - He struck me about four times.

( 95 ) CHAPTER XX.

DIVISIONS OF TIME, COINS, WKIGHTS AND MEASURES. I. CHRONOLOGY.

118. The Hos have no chronology of their own. Their word sinn<i (a year) means the period between one MAge Parab and another. This festival can only be celebrated after all the rice crops have been cut and stored, and it affords a suitable opportunity for propitiator) sacrifices in i order to secure prosperity in the coming year. It is thus a sort of New Year festival. Familiarity with the Courts has, however, bred some knowledg'e of the Sambat era which began in the year 57 B. 0. «

II. MONTHS OF THE YEAR.

»119. The names of the months come from the same source and are as follows :-

Baisdk... April - May Kdrtik ...October - November

Jet ...May - June Agan ...November- December

Asiit- ...June -July Pus ...December- January

Sdoan ...July - August Mdg ...January - February

Bddo ...August - September Pdgun ...February - March

Asin ...September - October Chait ...March -April.

As the Ho word (chdndu) for a ' month ' also means ' moon ', it is evident that their month is a lunar one, i. e. from one new moon (nuil-i clidndu) to another, or from one full moon (full clidndu) to another.

120.* The division of the year into months is, however, exotic, tin- indigenous method being one of seasons. Having regard to climatic conditions, some divide it into ral>any dipli - the cold weather, jele s'm<ii or lolo dipli - the hot weather, and jaryi dd - the rains. Others divide it according to the stages which cultivation has reached, e. <j. /«>;•.•> or roni - the sowing season, karul <///<// - the time for reploughin^, /<•<> or sardi - harvest time, and so on. Others, again, will fix time by reference to one of the many festivals or to the blossoming of the sdl tree. The ideas of an aboriginal as to time and distance are notoriously, and in practice inconveniently, misleading. Ho can seldom recollect relatively beyond a single year, and usually utilises some well known occnrren as e. </., a land settlement, to fix the period of any particular event* concerning himself. A woman, who was quite unable to say how old her* child was, replied, however : Marany j»tl rdpmlmii rirmdree jonomUnd - he was born in the year the big bridge was broken. Further enquiry

( 96 )

showed that she meant the bridge over the River Roro by which Chaibassa is entered, and the point was thus cleared up.

III. DAYS OF THE WEEK.

121 The word fora ' week ' is hat which also, and in fact primarily, means ' a market '. These markets take place once a week at convenient centres and are a most important feature in the social economy of the Hos. There, they dispose, at a discount, of their surplus stocks of rice, and purchase, at a premium, the only luxuries that their lives know ; there are born the romances of the young which often terminate, there also, in forcible, though not ordinarily unhappy, unions ; and there a man, and a woman also for that matter, may get gloriously, intoxicated

in convivial company for a comparatively small consideration.

(

122- The days of the week are corruptions of the Hindi and Uriya forms and are all followed by betar or betarang, both meaning ' a day '.

Sunday ... JKuibdr Wednesday ... Budbdr

Monday ... Sombdr Thursday ... Gurbdr

Tuesday ... Mangalbdr Friday ... Sukurbdr

Mangarbdr Saturday ... Sanibdr.

There are various words for ' day ', viz. din, betar, betarany, md, bar, and hula. ' One day ' is musing, contracted from mid ( one ) and singi ( the sun ). ' Two days ' is similarly bdrting, but ' three days ' is ape md or ape din, ' four days ' is upun md or upun din, and so on.

IV. PARTS OF THE DAY

123. The usual division of a day into hours, minutes aad seconds is unknown. Though a Ho reckons his months by the moon, he uses the sun to fix the tiiie of the day. If one wishes to ascertain at what time any particular event took place, the form of enquiry is : Chimtang singi taikend - how much sun was there, i. e. what time was it ? The Ho will then point to the position of the sun in the sky at the time and say : nimtang singi - so much sun as that, or, if the time was the same as that at which the conversation is taking place, he will say : , imtang singi - so much sun as this, i. e. as there is now. Besides the natural divisions according to the sun's position, the Hos also divide their day according to the work to be done, the meals to be eaten, etc. The following is a fairly complete list in proper chronological order :-

Simrd der - Before cockcrow. Simrd - Cockcrow.

( 97 )

Mir inir - Just before daylight when objects fir.it become distinguishable.

Ang, idang - Dawn.

Singiol, fingitur - Sunrise. i - Morning.

Uri apaur sinyi - Cattle yoking time, /'. e. about 8 A. M.

li.isimn ill/ili - Time when food left over from the night before (ttdti - stale) is eaten, t. e. about 9 A. M.

Marany basin in ili/>li - About 10 or 11 A. M.

Tikin, nutlisingi - Noon.

Tdrdringi, kochesingi - Afternoon.

Hatang da singi - Time when water is boiled for the cooking of rice, i. <•.

, about 4 P. M.

Singihasur - Subset. Ur\ ader dipli - Time when cattle are driven home, i. e. shortly after

sunset.

Aiuo - Evening. Mir mir - Twilight. Nidd - Night.

Mdndi jom dipli - Evening meal time, i, e. about 8 P. M. Giti dipli - Sleeping time, i. p. about 9 P. M. Tdld nidd - Midnight, Sin pi satith - The whole day.

V. COINS, WEIGHTS AND MEASURES.

124. As in all primitive communities, barter used to be the only method by which commodities were exchanged among the Hos. It is curious, however, that they should have separate words of their own for "to buy. " ( £trtn gr ) and "to sell" ( dkiring ), but should use the Hindi bodol for " to exchange ". With the gradual opening up of the country, the use of Indian money has become general, and the words given in the list below have been adopted as part of the language. The only known weights refer to paddy, and the measures of length and distance are comparatively few.

MONEY - Poisd - a pice, d#d - an anna, siki - four annas, bdr siki - eight

annas, ape siki - twelve annas, tdkd - a rupee, mi tdkd tdld or turui tiki - one rupee and eight annas.

WEIGHTS - Konrd - about £ seer, poild - about 1 seer, pati - about 2 seers , ( in some parts only 1 seer ), bisid - about 20 seers, kundi about 20 seers, panti or purd - about 10 maunds, bdndi - an indeterminate measure as there are small and big bandis, but generally about 10 maunds.

MEASURES - Mid sarsar - a finger's breadth, bitd - a span, muM - a cubit or about feet, mundrad - the length from the elbow to the closed hand, chandang - a pace, gaudi - about 3 miles or the distance a newly-plucked leaf would dry up in ( c.f. Hindi ddlbhangd kos ), basiam hord - distance which can be travelled from sunrise to about 9 A. M., tikin hord - distance which can be travelled up to noon, mid giti hord or musing hord - a whole day's journey, mid obor jiliny - a man's whole length with arms extended, ( mid tupuing or mid sar - the distance an arrow can be shot, mid sded -

the distance that can be covered in one breath.

t,

VI. POINTS OF THE COMPASS.

125. Only the four cardinal points are known and a»9 as follows :

< North ... Kd t dchamrd

South ... Bokanduki East ... Singiol West . . . Singihasur

The first two are derived from the position in which a dead body is placed prior to being burnt, i. e. with the legs (kdtd) to the north and the head ( bo ) to the south. The last two are derived from the rising ( ol ) and the setting ( hasn ) of the sun ( singi ).

CHAPTER XXI.

SEPARATE POSTPOSITIONS.

126. These postpositions differ from those which have been considered in Chapter III in that they are never suffixes, but always occupy an independent position in the sentence immediately after the noun or pronoun which they govern. If the latter represents an animate being, it may be either genitive or accusative in case, but, if inanimate, it takes the accusative only. These separate postpositions are for the most part formed by the addition of the simple postpositions re and te, indicating rest and motion respectively, to roots which, when used by themselves, are primarily adjectives, nouns or verbs. The following are those most commonly in use :—

(i) Aerre and derte - before, ahead of, in front of. Alangd (alang) derre mended - He is ahead of us. Gomked (gomke) derte dlom senod •• Don't go in front of the master.

( i i 99 )

(ii) Taiomre and taiomte - behind, after.

Aivd (aim/) taiomiv 1,11,11,1? - Remain behind me.

M"i nui tiiiomtf ItujuHH' - Come after five days, (iii) Chetanre and chetante on, upon, on the top of.

Od clu'tanr" ne dnbtan taifc,-nde - The bird was sitting on the house.

Bum chetantee rakabeand - He climbed to the top of the hill.

(iv) Liitarre and Idtarte }

e i / , , ,. ( - below, under, underneath. ouotfr* and subate )

Ddru subdre lijdred od tinguicltieme - Pitch the tent under the trees. En ddru Idtarte doldbu nired - Come, let us run under that tree, (v) Bit<\rre and bitdrte - in, inside.

Unda bitdrre bdnd mended - The bear is inside the cave. Od bitdrte pdrkom dgueme - Bring the bed inside the house, (vi) Bdrre and bdrte - out of, outside.

s Bir bdrreng ndmkedd - I found it outside the forest.

Disum bdrte senome - Go out of the country, (vii) Japdre zndjapdte - near, close to, in the vicinity of.

Hdtujapdte bdndd mend - There is a bandh near the village. Kuld liuang japdtee hujulend - The tiger came close to the pit. (viii) Pdromre and pdromte across, on, or to, the other side.

Aid kerdko yard pdromre mendkod - His buffaloes are on the other

side of the river. Aid kerdko gard pdromteko senakand - His buffaloes have gone across

the river, (ix) Idldre and tdldte - among, in, or to, the middle of.

Bingko tdldree gititan taikend - He was sleeping among the snakes. Birrenko tdldteng senaeand - I went among the savages, (x) Hordte - by, through, by means of ( used with persons only ).

Ni (nid) hordte kumbuko sdbeand - The thieves were caught by this man. Aivd ddsid (ddsi) liordte amd olakadted kuleme - Send your letter

through my servant, (xi) Lagite - for, on behalf of.

Ned am (amd) lagite, end ai (aid) - This is for you and that for him.

lagite mend. *

Aing (aivd) lagite darkdse olkedd - He wrote the petition on my

behalf, (xii) Jokd - up to, as far as, for.

Tdld niddjokd aingloe taikend - He was with me up to midnight. Bdrid lidtu bagekete ondo m'uid lidtu - They carried the baggage as jokd bdromko gokedd far as the third village »

Mi chdndujokd senokam - You may go for one month.

CHAPTER XXII.

<:•'• , v

ADVERBS.

127. There are four classes of adverbs, viz. Adverbs of Time, Place, Quantity and Manner. Most of the separate postpositions may also be used as adverbs, the difference being that, as adverbs, they have no connection with nouns or pronouns, but simply modify the verbs with which they are used.

I. ADVERBS OF TIME.

Tising

- today.

Gapd

- tomorrow. ,

Meang ~) Gapdter )

- the day after tomorrow. ,

Ter gapdter

- the day after gapdter.

«

Hold

- yesterday.

Holdter

- the day before yesterday.

Ter holdter

- the day before holdter.

Honder betar

- a few days back, i. e. within 10 days.

Honderman ~) Holdman )

- some days further back than honder betar.

Honder honder

- within the year, but further back than honderman

or holdman.

J\Te sirmd ^

j$e kdlom )

- this year.

Kdlom

- next year.

Ter kdlom

- year after next.

Md

- last year.

Misad sirmd

- year before last.

Ter misad sirmd

- year before misad sirmd.

Huju chdndu ") Mulu chdndu )

- next month.

Senoean chdndu ~j

- last month.

Nirean chdndu )

Dimsi \

Dimsi dimsi j Angomutid

- daily, every day.

Angogapd J

'Hdt mutid

- weekly, every week.

' Chdndu mutid

- monthly, every month.

Sirmd mutid ~) Sirmd sirmd )

- annually, every year.

Choild, chuild

- when ?

Chimtd, chimitd

1

[

Chimtang, chimitang )

- at what time ?

Nd

- now.

Imtang, imitang

- at this time.

Nimtang, nimitang

- at that time (pointed out ).

Enang

- then, at that time ( some time back ).

Jd dipli Jdimtang

!

- at any time, at any moment.

Jd chuildo ka

)

Jdimtango kd

i

- at no time, never.

Jd betar ,

- any day.

Jau jav

)

Jauge

- always.

Bardbari

)

Misd misd

- sometimes, occasionally.

Itu dund

- often, frequently.

Itu purd duvd

- very often.

Likd likd

- almost immediately afterwards.

Ndai, ndev

- after a little while.

Entorsd

- at once, immediately, without any delay.

Aerte

- before.

Aerre

- in future.

Jaiomtc

- after, afterwards, later.

Siddre

- at first.

Munure

- in the beginning, in the time of one's ancestor!.

Chanabre

\

- in the end.

Tundure '

5

Musing betar Mid dipli

i

- once upon a time.

En betar

- at that time.

Auri

.

- not yet.

Chimin jdked

- up till then, until.

jVo' jdked

- up till now. *

Note /. Auri is invariably followed by the future tense of the verb. E.g. Hujuakande chi - Has he come? Aurie hujud - He has not yet come.

<?. Likd likd, ndai and ndett, are only used with reference to future time, as e.g.> likd likde hujud he will arrive soon. Such a sentence as " I arrived in the village and he came

( 102 )

II.-

Nere, nenre, netd, netdre

Nepd, nepdre

Nete, nente, netdte

Nepdte

Neneie, netdete

Nepdete

Enre, entd, entdre

Enpd, enpdre

Ente, entdte

Enpdte

Enete, entdete

Enpdete

Terre, tertd, tertdre

Terpd, terpdre

Terte, tertdte

Terpdte

Terete, tertdete

Terpdete

Okonre, okonte, okontdre

Okonpa, okonpdre

Okonte, okontdte

Okonpdte

Okonete, okontdete

Okonpdete

Jdre, jdpdre

Jdpdre

Jdte> jdtdte

Jdpdte

Jdete^ jdtdete

Jdpdete ,

Sabentdre

Sabenpdre

Sabentdte

Sdbenpdte

Sabentdete

Sabenpdete

Jomtipdre

Lengdtipdre

shortly afterwards " would be rendered : seterlend ondo huring gdri taiomtee hujulend.

-ADVERBS OF PLACE.

Hdtureng

- here, in this place.

- hereabouts.

- hither, to this place.

- to this direction.

- hence, from this place.

- from thrs direction.

- there, in that place.

- thereabouts.

- thither, to that place.

- to that direction.

- thence, from that place.

- from that direction.

- yonder, in yonder place.

- somewhere yonder.

- yonder, to yonder place.

- to somewhere yonder.

- from yonder place.

- from somewhere yonder.

- where, in what place ?

- whereabouts ?

- whither, to what place ?

- to what direction ?

- whence, from what place ?

- from what direction ?

- anywhere at all.

- anywhere abouts.

- to anywhere at all.

- to any direction.

- from anywhere at all.

- from any direction.

- everywhere.

- in every direction.

- to everywhere.

- to every direction.

- from everywhere.

- from every direction.

- on the right hand.

- on the left hand.

( 103 )

Chetanrf, chctantdre \

_. > - above, on top.

Sirmare, nrmatdrt \

Cli, /(////r, rliitntihit,' )

> - above, to the top. j

airmail, nrmdtate

Chetanpdr? }

- somewhere above. Sirmddre \

- below, nnderneath.

Sirmdpdre

!

Ilitiirrf - within, inside.

/>',j,/, - without, outside.

Japdre - near, close by.

Pdronn; % - across.

Tdldre - in the midst.

At^re - ahead.

Taiomre - behind.

Doeare - behind, at the back.

Knndamre - behind.

Dananyre - behind (some opaque object).

Chanabre - at the end.

Note. All the adverbs from Idtarre onwards may be varied in the same way as chetanre and sirmdre according as rest in, or motion to, any particular place or direction is meant.

III.— ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.

/.<»/, pnrd - much Chiminang - how much ?

Isupura I _ yery mnch Iminang - that much.

Timbd Niminang - this much, so much.

/luring - a little Ondo - again.

Note. Approximations to the above quantities are obtained by the addition of lekd. Thus, iminanglekd - about as mnch as that.

IV.— ADVERBS OF MANNER. 1*28. There are several kinds of Adverbs of Manner.

(t) Words used adverbially without any suffix except, in some cases, the emphatic enclitic ge.

Isu - very. Likd - almost.

Bode - quickly. Sutnang

o/ j. - - -iu o j

Damage - in vain, without oumoa

rhyme or reason.

Sdrige - truly, certainly. Misd torsd - altogether, without

leaving anything.

)

\ ' only' alone- )

( 104 )

(it) Adverbs formed by the addition of the instrumental postposition te to other parts of speech. The following are a few examples :

Anjdte - quickly.

Borote - timidly.

Hambalte - with difficulty.

Ldrte - easily.

Kdkaldte - loudly.

Maite - softly.

Sudete - slowly.

Ldnddte - laughingly,

Ldndidte - lazily. '

Rdvsdte - joyfully, gladly.

Rukute - tremblingly. ,

Sukute - voluntarily.

Achakdte - suddenly, unexpectedly. <

Akachakdte - mysteriously.

Kvrkurte - angrily.

Oborte yiti - to sleep on the stomach.

(Hi) Adverbs formed by the addition of the suffix lekd (like), with or without the postposition te, to other parts of speech. The number of such adverbs is indefinite.

Chilekd, chilekdte - how, in what way ?

Nelekd, nelekdte \

w 7 2 i '4 I - in this way.

Nekd, nekate ]

Enlekd, enlekdte \

I - in that way. Enkd, enkate )

Terlekd, terlekdte \

}- in the same way as that yonder. Terdleka, terdlekdte }

Okonlekd, okonlekdte - like what, in what manner ?

Jdlekd, jdlekdte - in any way at all.

Ddsilekd, ddsilekdte - like a servant, in a menial way.

Hichirlekd (te) - like the lightning.

Holdlekd (te) - like it was yesterday.

Aiumlekd (te) - audibly.

Hdpdlekd (te) - quietly.

Atkdrolekd (te) - perceptibly.

Nelolekd (te) - visibly, obviously.

Gojolekd (te) - mortally.

( 105 ) CHAPTER XXIII.

CONJUNCTIONS, INTBRJBCTIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS PARTICLES.

129. There are not many Conjunctions in Ho and those that do occur are sparingly used. The following is a fairly complete list :

Ondo - and.

A,1///,', entedo - and then.

,]/, ndo - bat.

Nidmente - for this reason,

therefore. - for that reason, therefore.

Redo - if (used as suffix only).

Banredo - if not, or else, or.

Chi - or.

Mente - because 1 ,

V (suffixes only.) O - also

EndmerAe

Enreo

l^iinreo

even if, notwithstanding, although, still.

INTERJECTIONS.

130. The following list is self-explanatory :•

Eld Ate, ated

A

Mdr

Dold, dol Ju

Hald

Haigore

Haind

Haindgore

Bapdri

Bapdrigore

Ocho, ochd

- hallo ! Is used to attract attention and conveys

also an order to approach.

- hallo ! Is used to attract attention purely and is

the ordinary sign of the vocative case. In some parts of the Kolhan, ated is only used in addressing males, the form atend being employed to, and among, females.

- hallo ! Is used to attract attention as in amd you

there 1

- all right 1 Is used as an exhortation with the

imperative in addressing equals and inferiors.

- come along ! For its use see paragraph 80.

- go ! Is used only with the imperative of teno

to go.

- hurrah ! Expresses joy or applause.

•- alas

Expresses physical pain or anger.

- alas 1 Expresses mental agony or distress. i

- take care 1 An exclamation conveying a caution.

( 106 ) MISCELLANEOUS PARTICLES.

131. These particles may be affirmative, negative, emphatic or indeterminate, and may also be either independent or enclitic.

Ed - yes.

Kd

•" no- Bano

\- perhaps. Torang \

Idu ondo - who knows ?

Kd chi - or not ? (

Kd ondo - certainly not.

Alo - a negative particle used as a prefix only. See paragraph 79.

Qe - an emphatic enclitic equal to " certainly," " of comse,"

and, when used with pronouns, conveying an almost reflexive sense. When used with a verb, it stands between the tense form and the copula. Distinguish, for example, Inige hujud he himself will come, and Ini hujuged he will certainly come.

J}o - also an enclitic equivalent to the Hindi to and possibly

derived from it. Has no definite meaning, but may usually be rendered by " indeed."

Derang - an independent particle standing at the end of a sentence

and implying uncertainty or lack of personal know- ledge. E.g. Hdtutee senakand derang he has gone to the village I hear, but I do not know for certain.

Chimad, chiad - also an independent particle implying personal suspicion, but no knowledge either personal or acquired. E.g. Hdtutee senakand chimad he has gone to the village I think, but I have no information on the subject.

Honang - also an independent particle, the use of which has been

explained in paragraph 75 ante.

( 107 ) , CHAPTER XXIV.

TERMS OF RELATIONSHIP, AMD CASTE AND TRIBAL NAMES.

132. The terms of relationship in common use among the Hos are extremely varied and intricate. The following is a fairly comprehensive list prepared on the basis of personal enquiries all over the Kolhan. The letters " m. s." and " w. s." mean " man speaking " and " woman speaking " respectively.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Father - Apu. fSon - Kodhon.

Mother Engd. Daughter - Kuihon.

Parents - Engd-dpuking. Children - Honko,sitidko.

»

Elder brother (ra. s.) - Bauu. Younger brother (m. s.) - Undi.

Younger sister (w. s.) - Undikui.

Elder brother (w. s.) - Bauu. Younger brother (w. s.) - Undi.

Elder sister (w. s.) - Aji.

Elder sister (m. s.) - Aji. Younger sister (m. s.) - Misi

misierd, undikui.

Father's elder brother Father's younger brother Younger brother's son (m. s.) i Younger brother's daughter (in. s.)i Elder brother's son (m. s.) Elder brother's daughter (m. s.)

Father's elder brother's wife Father's younger brother's wife Husband's younger brother's son Husband's younger brother's daughter Husband's elder brother's son Husband's elder brother's daughter

Father's elder brother's son Father's elder brother's daughter Father's younger brother's son Father's younger brother's daughter

Father's elder sister l Father's younger sister | Elder or younger brother's son (w. s.)

- Gungu.

- Kdkd.

- Gungu.

- Homed, honherel.

- Honerd.

- Gungu.

- Kdki, gauing.

[- Gungu.

- Honsed.

- Honerd.

- Bauut undi.

- Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.

- Bauu, undi.

- Aji, mist, miiierd,

- Hdtom.

- Homon, homonkod.

Elder or younger brother's daughter (w. s.)- Homonkui.

Father's elder sister's husband j

I - Kumd. Father's younger sister's husband }

Wife's elder or younger brother's son - 6ra» gekod. Wife's elder or younger brother's daughter Gekui.

( 108 )

9. Father's elder or younger sister's son - Bauu, undi.

Father's elder or younger sister's daughter Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.

- Kumd.

10. Mother's elder brother \

Mother's younger brother / Elder or younger sister's son (in. s.) - Get gekod. Elder or younger sister's daughter (m. s.)- Gekui.

11. Mother's elder brother's wife

Mother's younger brother's wife Husband's sister's son Husband's sister's daughter

- Hdtom.

- Ge, gekod.

- Gekui.

12. Mother's elder or younger brother's son - Bauu, urtdi. Mother's elder or younger brother's

daughter

13. Mother's elder sister Mother's younger sister Younger sister's son (w. s.) \ Younger sister's daughter (w. s.) J Elder sister's son (w. s.)

Elder sister's daughter (w. s.)

14. Mother's elder sister's husband Mother's younger sister's husband Wife's younger sister's son Wife's younger sister's daughter Wife's elder sister's son

Wife's elder sister's daughter

- Aji, misi, misierd, undikui.

- Gungu.

- Gauing.

- Gungu.

- Housed^ honherel.

- Honerd.

- Gungu.

- Apoeng, kdkd.

- Gungu.

- Bon, honkod.

- Bonkui.

15. Mother's elder or younger sister's son - Bauu, undi. Mother's elder or younger sister's

daughter

16. father's father - Tdtd.

Father's mother - Jid.

Mother's father - Idtd.

Mother's mother - Jid.

- Aji, mm, mirierd, undikui. Son's son (m. s.)

Son's son (w. s.)

Daughter's son

(m. s.) Daughter's son

(w. s.)

Great grandfather^ Great grandson \

Great grandmother) Great granddaughter /

Jaii, jaiikod.

(Jaiikui for the daughters in all four cases).

17. Husband

- Berel,hdm. Wife

- Erd.

( 109 )

18. Wife's father - flonedr. Daughter's husband (m. s.)

Wife's mother - Handr. Daughter's husband (w.s.) Husband's father - Ilonedr. Son's wife (m. t

'Husband's mother - / lunar. Son's wife (w. s.) r

19. Wife's elder brother - Bauuhonedr. Wife's younger brother - Tend. Younger sister's husband (m. s.) - Ard. Elder sister's husband (ra. s.) - Tend.

20. Wife's elder sister - Ajiliandr. Wife's younger sister - Tfndkui. Ycmnger sister's husband (w. s.) - Ard. EldeV sister's husband fw. s.) - Tend.

2?. Husband's elder brother - Bauuhonedr.

Husband's younger brother - Iril.

Younger brother's wife (m. s.) - Kimin.

Elder brother's wife (m. s.) - Hill.

22. Husband's elder sister - Ajiliandr. Husband's younger sister - Iril. Younger brother's wife (w. s.) - Kimin. Elder brother's wife (w. s.) - Hili.

23. Wife's elder or younger sister's husband - Sardgi.

24. Husband's elder brother's wife - Aji Husband's younger brother's wife - Undikui.

25. Son's wife's father - Bdld }

o > -c > iu -DJLIJL j. (Same for daughter's

Song wife s mother - Bdlderd lv

0 , .. , -DJLiJLT husband's parents).

Son s wife s parents - Bdldhng

26. Father-in-law's elder brother - Gungu honedr. Father-in-law's younger brother - Kdkd honedr. Father-in-law's elder sister - ffdtom handr. Father-in-law's younger sister - ffdtom handr. Mother-in-law's elder brother - Kumd honedr. Mother-in-law's younger brother - Kumd honedr. Mother-in-law's elder sister - Gungu handr. Mother-in-law's younger sister - Gauing handr.

27. Step-father - Kdkd. Step-son - Homed, Step-mother - Gauing. Step-daughter- ffonerd. Step-brother or half-brother - Bauu, undi. Step-sister or half-sister - Aji, miii, inisierd, undikui.

28. Husband's other wife - Hirum, ndtd-erd. Father's other wife (elder) - Gungu. Father's other wife (younger) - Gauing.

29. Relation - Hdgd.

Namesake - Sdki]

_. . . ,>(both regarded as relatives)

Friend - Jun\

<Note 1. In the case of Nos. 6, 9, 12, 15, and 27 (latter half) in the above list, the term to be used varies with the compara- tive age of the speakers. Thus, if a father's elder brother's son was being addressed, the word banu would only be used if he was actually older than the speaker (see No. 2) ; otherwise undi would be the proper term. It should be noted that, between two women, only the term undikui can be used in addressing, or speaking of, a younger relative of any .of the degrees mentioned above. As between a man and a woman, the terms misi and misierd could be used, as well as undikui, in the same circumstances.

2. It will be observed that all the various relationships covered

by the English word " cousin " are expressed by the same Ho words as those used for uterine brothers and sisters. If a man says he is the elder brother (bauu) of another man, the next question is : Midlaireni chi Mkdgungureni (i.e. uterine or avuncular ?). He may be neither (see sept relationships mentioned below), but it would be unusual for a Ho to mention the sept connection to a foreigner.

3. In practice, all terms of relationship are spoken with a

possessive suffix. Thus, dpuing my father, dpum your father (suffix is me after a consonant), dpute his father, and so on through the three numbers and persons. Though the possessive forms are, as a rule, suffixed to the term of relationship, there are a few terms in the list given in which it is infixed. Thus, " my elder brother's son " is Tioningsed and not honseding, and " his elder brother's daughter " honteerd and not honerdte. The terms in which this occurs are undikui, Jionsed, honherel, honerd, homonkod, homonkui, gekod, gekui, honkod, honkui and tendkui.

( 111 )

4. Besides the ordinary vocative case signs ate, ated and atend (see paragraphs 18 and 129), certain distinct forms are nsed in addressing relatives. The following are the most common :

Apang, apangd - 0 father !

Eang, eangd - 0 mother !

Dddd - 0 elder brother !

/iiii, fnild - 0 younger sister !

The d in the altornative forms is the interjection men- tioned in paragraph 129. It may be added to all the terms of relationship to form vocatives, e.g. djid 0 elder

sister ! i

133. The Jewish custom of levirate, common also among many other Eastern races, exists among the Hos. The younger brother of a deceased husband has the first claim to marry the widow, the idea being that the family has purchased the woman by paying the bride-price. If the younger brother does not exercise his option and the woman marries someone else, the latter has to refund the bride-price originally paid for her. There are besides restrictions on the use of the names of certain relatives. A daughter-in-law and a younger brother's wife (kimin in both cases) are never mentioned by name. They are spoken to, or referred to, either as kimining my daughter-in-law or sister-in-law, or Josephreni kimin the wife of my son, or younger brother, Joseph. Conversely, a daughter-in-law will not address, or refer to, her father-in-law or mother-in-law by name. If she has no children, they are Iwnedring (my father-in-law) and handling (my mother-in-law) respectively. If she has children, they are kodtdtdte (the son's grandfather) or kuitdtdte (the daughter's grandfather), and kodjidte (the son's grandmother) or kuijidte (the daughter's grandmother), according as the eldest child is a boy or a girl. In the same way, a younger brother's wife will not address, or refer to, her husband's elder brother or elder sister by name. They are bauuhonednng and djihandring respectively. Another feature of these particular relationships, is that the dual number is used in addressing each other. Thus, kimining hujuben come here my daughter-in-law, instead of kimining hujume, the form which one would naturally expect.

134. The relationship between two individuals is ascertained by putting the question : Chikaiam— what do you (call) him, or Chikamede what does he (call) you ? If they are uncle (father's younger brother) and nephew (elder brother's son) respectively, the uncle would reply : Honing sediding I call him elder brother's son, or Kdkdingde he calls me

father's younger brother, according to the form in which the question had been put. The same construction holds good in speaking of two or more third persons, e.g. Samu M&rde chikaid what relation is Samu of Mora's ?

Chipikdodking - How are those two persons related ?

Akoe chikdkoa }

7 ., . r - What relations are they of his ? Aiko chtkaid ]

135. It should also be mentioned that a system of sept relationship, similar to that which obtains in 'the Brahman gotrds, is in force among the Hos. The Ho tribe is divided into kills or septs which ar,e strictly exogamous, all the members of a kill being regarded as rslated by descent through a common ancestor. They will thus cal'i each other by one or other of the terms of relationship given above, the correct term being ascertained by tracing backwards until a common point is reached. For example, if two members of a kill meet for the first time, one will enquire : " What used you to call my father ? " If the other replies : " I used to call him bauu (elder brother)," the latter will call the first enquirer honingsed or lioninglierel (my elder brother's son), and the first enquirer will call him kdkding (my father's younger brother). The proper terms for the other members of each family will then be determined accordingly. The system is obviously somewhat esoteric and can only be illustrated in its simplest forms, but the Hos have no difficulty in applying it, and they observe the same restrictions in regard to the use of the names of certain kin as obtain in the case of blood relations.

136. The Ho equivalents of the names of the castes and tribes with which they have come into contact are interesting.

CASTB OR TRIBAL NAME. Ho EQUIVALENT.

1. Bhuiyd Buid

2. Bhumij Mutkan

3. Birwal Duvud

4. Bcstom Bastom

5. Brahmin Bame

{ Karpdbai Muchi

6. Ohamdr or Muchi \ Dumangbai Muchi

7. Chhatri or Rajput Rdjdhon, Rdjd

8. Dhobi Dobd

9. Dom Dom

10. Gareri Mindi gupii

11. Ghasi Gdnsi

( 113 )

12. Godla or Gom

13. Gond

14. Kaldl or Sunri

15. Kamar or Lohar

16. Kewat

17. Kliandwal

18. Kharid

19. Kumhar

20. Kurmi

21. Mahomodan

22. Mallah

23. Modi,

24. Muncld

25* Nap it or Ha jam

26. Santal

27. * Sarak

28. Tamaria

29. Tanti

30. Teli

31. Thatera

32. Uraon

Gau

f)urud

Sundi

Kamdr

Keovlo

Kundvar Gau (Gour)

Karid

Kunkal

Kurmi

tTnrku

Maid

Mudi

Mundd

Barandi

Santard

Sargd

Tamrid

Penaiv, Mdli

Teli

Tentri

Urdou

SHORT PIECES FOR TRANSLATION.

The following pieces may seem childish to the educated mind, but they are in keeping with the elementary ideas of the Ho, contain some information about his mode of life and customs, and will serve to enlarge the student's vocabulary along practical lines :

1.— THE BODY.

Aingtdre homo meno. , Homore bo sabenete chetana ; onte lutur, med, mud ondo a mend. A' bitdrre lee ondo data mend. Med-inua latarre, taran, hoto, kuam, laii, do'ea, ti ondo kata mena. Tire honganda ondo marang ganda mena. Bo chetanre ub mena. Medtebu neled ; luturtebu aiumed ; muatebu saeded ondo soanea. Titebu s*abea ondo katatebu senod.

2. OATTLB.

r

[Jriko saben disumre mendkod. Urikoa unr ibila ondo akoa ub hende chi pundi chi ara hoba daia. Akoa kata chdtaakana. En chata- akan kata isu ketea ondo Hoko hanko meta. Urikoa barid diring mena. Ako tasad ondo busuko jomea ondo senotan senotanreko ating daia. Bikete tingure chi burumroko lijumed. Urikote hoko sieako ondo sagiko orea. Akoa jiluko jomea ondo unrko akiringea. Gundikotdete todbu named ondo akoa honko miukobu metakod.

3. BIRDS.

Oekotare baria kata ondo barid aparob mend. Ilteko pereakana ondo aparobteko apirea. Akoa ate jometeako halanged. Taramardko bdbd chi tilmingko jomea ; taramarako jiluko jomea ; ondo etako isu purd ginisteko asuloa. Konroko dareko oiared ondoko unumend. Akoa jiling kdtate genddriko jagddreko seno daia. Setakoleka simko paskakete jometeako named. Oeko tuka baikete enareko peroed ondo honko rutuieante ondo d chabkete engakoteko ajomod. Huringleka oeko hokod kdjioko eto daia.

4.— FISH.

c Hakuko dare taina. Akoa kata banod mendo chadlom ondo ilte nepa

enpdteko senbiura. Hakuko abuleka kako saedea. Akoa med mena mendo ranapid banoa. Isu anjateko aium daia. Pura hoko hakuko sabkedkote

ondo isinkedkoteko jomkoa. c

5. THE HOT WEATHER.

v

Jete dipli isu loloa. Balbal da jod jodte lijao lumoa. Nidare neleka balbala chi dum-med (giti-med) ka hujua. Gararea da anjedoa

ondo tasad goechabaoa. Chidnkoo gojoako. Imin tetanga cbi misa misa huringleka red da nuere ji ruaa.

6.— THE RAINS.

Ne disumre gama isn porate kae gamaea. Sidare rajasala gama hobaoa. En dipli fioko siketeko herea. Ente rot gama ondo chitan gamare Hoko karaieakc. Goma gama ondo indi gama talare delbaba iroa ondo jomnama parab hobaoa. Sal oterea baba lagite indi gama isu dorkara. Jargi diplire rimil siirieae ondo hichir hichireae. Misa miga arileae. Gara poreoa ondo chokoko aiumoa. Gara pereore oiar daiko

samang parom daiako. , 7. THE COLD WEATHER.

v Rabang diplire, sabenko jetereko artangena ondo nidare san

tingketeko jirubena. Bnsu atedketeko gitia, banredo isu rabangkoa.

Reng^ko jaj;iteko uiuna ; mundako barki lijateko uiuna. Dado isu tutkuna mendo hoko lagite da-hoio isu bugina.

8.— TREES.

Daru abua pura paitire hujua. Enarea jobu jomea ondo babu baoa. Sante mandibu isinea ondo nail, sagi, parkom, dubteabu baiea. Sabeneto sarjom daru ketea. Hatua darure lungam ondo baru darure enkobu anrakoa. Uli, porso ondo loa dararea jobu jomea.

9. HOUSES.

Kolan disnmre hoko oa baiere kunta sidareko bidea. Ente jata ondo hasate ginilko baiea. En ginil chetanre mutul, jangi ondo seneor omkete sainko dalea. Ape upun sirma taiomte en hasado rapudoa ondo oa etkage neloa. Mendo hasarea itate oa baioredo, isu sirma lagite taina. Oarea jobra duar japare alope endaea.

10. CLOTHES.

Uri meronjkoa nb, oekoa il, ondo haknkoa harad mena. Hokoa sumang etang unr mena. Enamento akoa homo uiu lagite hoko disnm ondo diplileka lijako baite hobaoa. Ka rabang disumre enko kad^somrea lija ondo rabang disumre mindi ubrea lijako tusingea. Kuikoo e^a et.a lijako erea.

11. SABAI GRASS.

•» Saiuete badchom tangaa. Birre badchom nainoa, mendo parjako akoage paiti lagiteko idi daia. Irketeko uniea ondo tol lagite saitibaea. Taramarako parkom ondo machila ganduko tengea ondo etako hatreko akiringea. Isu pura badchom ei^a dsumte olsakam bai lagite kuloa.

12.— LAO.

Tolakan enkoete chidnko olako. 01 dipli hoko kotoko hadea. Koteren enko idikedkote eta darureko jankoa. Bakra enkodo bakra darure, baruren enko baru darure ondo murren enko mur darureko anraoa. Turui chandureko toloa ondo mi sirmare bar dunako anraoa. Enkote sakom, sankd ondo eta eta singar baioa.

13. COCOONS.

Asar chandu ol lungamko hoko lariako metakoa. En lungamkoete tirako ondo patniko olako. 'Barsingleka taiomte patni peroeae. Perochabaeanchi pero miad kulire emoa. Ente rutni dipli \\pko hatna darureko tipanea. Lungam chiduko upun danako utraca ; enteko tolena. Tolkenteko akiringoa, ondo kiringko eta eta diSumte idikedkote sutamko borkoa ondo kilimili lijako tengea.

14. HO VERSION OF THE CREATION.

Ote Baram ondo Singbonga akingtegeking baieana. Hutub diri ondo date oteking baikeda. Ena tasad ondo daruteking singarkeda. Sidare baturen jontuko ondo taiomte birren jontukoking baikedkoa. Hoko tain lagite sabena baisekaeanchi, miad koa ondo miad kui bailena- king. Singbonga miad isu marang huangre enkinge saitibakedkinga, ondo enking kaking sitiajomtan nelkedkingte diange baietokedkinga. Duang nuketeking misaeana. Nelekdte honganrako hobaeana ondo disum hokote pereeana.

VOCABULARY AND INDEX.

VOCABULARY.

FOREWORD.

The following collection of about 1800 Ho words does not pretend to be anything more than a working vocabulary including almost all the words that will be encountered by an ordinary foreigner. The foumber of words used by an average Ho is probably not more than 400 at the outside, and, though I have no doubt that every student will discover occasional words that I have omitted or never come across, I think that the vocabulary I have collected will be found sufficient for all practical purposes. have not attempted to compile a dictionary, because lexicography is an art that requires special knowledge and peculiar abilities, as well as a greater amount of time than a normal official can afford. The student should therefore note that all the English synonyms by which a Ho word might be translated have not been included, and that he will often find the Ho equivalent for any particular English word by looking for it under some alternative English rendering. As a rule, only the bare meanings are given in the first part. The distinctions, if any, between the various Ho equivalents for the same English word must be looked for in the second part where their precise meanings are given.

2. The following are the abbreviations used :

adj. = adjective. post. = postposition,

adv. = adverb. pron. = pronoun,

conj. = conjunction. v. i. = intransitive verb,

inter. = interjection. v. imp. = impersonal verb.

i. p. = idiomatic phrase v. irreg. = irregular verb.

<

n. a. = animate noun. v. p. = verb in passive voice.

n. i. = inanimate noun. v. rec. = reciprocal verb,

num. = numeral. v. ref. = reflexive verb,

v. t. = transitive verb.

VOCABULARY.

ENGLISH-HO.

abduct (v. t.) able (v. irrog.) abortion (n. i.) abscess (n. i.) abscond (v. i.) abuse (v. t.) accidentally (adv,^... according to custom

(adv.) according to one's

wishes (adv.)

account (n. i.) accuse (v. t.) accused person (n.a.) accustom (v. t.) ... ache (v. imp. and

v. i.)

acid (adj.) acquit ^v. t.) Adam's apple (n. i.) adjoin (v. ^ec.) adopt (v. t.)

adorn (v. t.) adult (n. a.) advantage (n. i.) ... adversary (n. a.) ... affection (n. i.) after (post, and adv.) after a little while (adv.)

afternoon (n. i.) ... tdrdsingi

d'lklr, arkid

again (adv. & v. t.)

ondo

dai

age (n. i.)

tin/ft

endd-ad

agree (v. t.)

ed, rdji, bai,

uju

t

suku

nir

ague (v. imp.)

nisuruiu

gonde, erang

air (n. i.)

sirmd

dchakdte

alas (inter.)

haigore, Juiind

liaindgore,

dasturlekdte

!><(j>drit

bapdrigore

sananglekdte,

alive (v. p.)

jido

uruulekdte

all (adj.)

saben

lekd

alluvial deposit (n. i.)

tobrd

chird

almost (adv.)

likd

muddle

almost completely

sebe

(adv.)

haringbdrte

alone (adv.)

iumang, tumad

hdsu

also (conj.)

o (used as suffix

moroe

on\y),jdked

da, bdge

alter (v. t.)

bodol

ututud, ututud

although iconj.) ...

enreo, iminreo

topo

amaze (v. t.)

dkachakd,

dubumbul,

dkadandd

asulhdrd

amazed (v. imp.) ...

dkachakd,

ringdr

dkadandd

sednakani

ancestor (n. a.) ...

jidtdtd

Idb

and (conj.)

ondo ••

bairi

angry (v. imp. v. i.

i

juri

& adj.)

kurkur

taiomre, taiomte

animal (n. a.)

jontu

ankle (n. i.)

kdtdreneke

likd likd, ndai,

anklet (n. i.)

dndu

nden, huring

anna (n. i.)

did

gdri taiomte,

another (adj.)

eta

huringlekd

another person

taiomte

(pron.)

etdi

( 120 )

another thing (pron.) etdd

attention (n. i.) ... ji

answer (v. t.)

kdjiurd

at the back of (adv.)

doedre,

ant (n. a.)

mum, tonto,

danangre

hau, nidir

aunt (n. a.)

gungu, gauing,

ant-hill (n. i.)

bunum

hdtom, kdki

any (adj.)

jdn

avarice (n. i.)

tdkd-ldb

any person (pron.)...

jdni

axe (n. i.)...

hake, kdpi

anything (pron.) ...

jdnd

axle (n. i.)

nigd

anywhere at all(adv.)

jdre, jdpdre,

jdtdre t

B.

appear (v. p.)

atkdro, nelo

babe (n. a.)

bale lion

appraise (v. t.)

gonong

bachelor (n. a.)

dindd seped

apprehend (v. t.) ...

sdb

back (n. i.) ,...

doed

approximately (adv.)

atkdrte

backbone (n. i.) ...

sindurijahg

argue (v. rec.)

kapdji

bad (adj.)

etkd, etkan

arm (6. i.)

ti

bad land (n. i.)

pi ote, kiindi ote

armlet (n. i.)

tdro

bad luck (n. i.)

losib banod

armpit (n. i.)

hatld

bad omen (n. i.) ...

ond ere

arrange (v. t.)

bai, dili

bad spirit (n. a.) ...

bongd

arrange bride-price

bag (n. i.)

kuchu

(v. t.)

gonong sid

baggage (n. i.) ...

bdrom

arrest (v. t.)

sdb

bake (v. t.)

lad

arrive (v. i.) ..,

seter, tebd

balance (n. i.)

sare

arrive at (v. t.)

betd

bald (adj.)

changdel, chere

arrow (n. i.)

sar

bamboo (n. i.)

mad

asan tree (n. i.) ...

hatnd ddru

band (n. i.)

guti

ascend (v. i.)

rakab

bdndh (n. i.)

bdndd

ashamed (v. imp.)...

giu

bank (n. i.)

kuti ( gar a,

ashes (n. i.)

toroe

kuti - bank

ask (v. t.)

asi, kuli

of a river)

ass (n. a.)

gadd

bar across a door

assemble (v. t.)

hundi

(n. i.)

sonoro, ganai

assist (v. t.)

dengd

barber (n. a.)

banddri,

associate with

barandi

(v. ref.)

jurin

bargain (v. rec.) ...

kipiring

astonish (v. t.)

dkachakd, dka-

bark (v. t.)

bu

dandd

bark of a tree (n. i.)

uw

astonished (v. imp.).

dkachakd, dka-

barren woman (n. a.)

bdnji

dandd

basket (n. i.)

kdnchi, tunki,

astringent (adj.) ...

heben

topd

at first (adv.) ...

siddre

bask in the sun (v. t.)

jet ere artang

atmosphere (n. i.)...

sirmd

bathe (v. t.)

ord

(v. irr<»g.)

n. i.) bean ( n. i.) hear (n. a.) h«-:ir (v. t.) heard (n. i.J heat (v.t.) heat a drum (v.t.)... beat in (v. t.) boat out a plough- share (V. t.)

beautiful (adj.) ' ... because (conj.) beckon (v. t.) become fv. irreg.) ... bed (n. i.) bee (n. a.) beetle (n. a.) before (post. &adv.).

beg (v.t.) begin (v. t.) beginning (n. i.) ... behind (adv. & post.).

be in a hurry(v. i.).. belch (v. tj believe (v. t.) bellows (n. i.) bell hung round the

neck of cattle

(n. i.)

below (adv.) bend (v. t.) benefit (n. i.) benighted (v. p.) .. berd land (n. i.) besides (conj.)

( 121 )

//(( /M

ItHcl-iiiit (n. i.)

kodlu

big (a.lj.)

in;/

ft inn

bilo (n. \.)

Ixiln, hand

bill (n. i.)

d

idling

hind (v. t.)

tni

</<ir<-li<i

hird (n. a.)

M

tdni

hirdlimo (n. i.)

dtd

ru

hirth (n. i. & v. t.)...

jonom

M

bison (n. a.)

I'irki i'i

bite (v. t.)

/<>/<*, It'ifi

hnls'niii, jHijuii,

bitter (adj.)

mer

ter

black (adj )

hi'iirii'

Iniiiin nelo

black ant (n. a.)

tOlito, nniiTi

mente

blacken (v. t.)

hende

gaui

blacksmith (n. a.) ...

kamdr

hobdo

blame (v. t.)

chird

pdrkom

blanket (n. i.)

komoro

dwnur

bleat (v. t.)

rda

Mm

blind (adj.)

medadakan,

derre, derte,

kdyrd, kdvri

mdngre,

blink (v. t.)

rdpid

samanangre

blood (n. i.)

maiom

koe

blow away (used of

ete

wind only-v. t.)...

otdng

enete, munu.

blow np a fire, i. e.

taiomte,

with a fan (v.t.)...

jir

taiomre, doedre,

blow with bellows

danangre,

(v.t.)

sijnttl

kundamre

blow with the mouth

kaubau

(v.t.)

ong, orong

auu

blue (adj.)

ydded

sari

boat (n. i.)

dongd

tint pud

body (n. i.)

homo

body-louce (n. a.) ...

li/d-sil-it

boil (n. i.)

uju

tiring

boil (v. t.)

tiki, basantj

Idtarre, subdre

boil eggs (v. t.)

oiong

leod

boil paddy, i. e. be-

lab

fore husking (v. t.)

liti, tiki

aiubo, niduo

bone (n. i.)

jany

sdl ote

book (n. i.)

kitdh, boi

ne bdgekete

boots (n. i.)

karjHi

( 122 )

bore (v. t.) born (y. p.) borrow (v.t.) bor tree (n. i.) ... bother (v. t.) bottom (n. i.) bough (n. i.) boundary (n. i.) ...

boundary pillar

(n. i.) bow (v. t.) bow (n. i.) bow of a fiddle (n. i.)

bowstring (n. i.) ... bracelet (n. i.) Brahmin (n. a.) brain (n. i.) branch (n. i.) brass (n. i.) ...

brave (adj.) ...

breach (v. t.) bread (n. i.) ...

break (v. t.)

break into pieces

(v. t.) break into pieces

with the hands

(v.t.)

breast (n. i.) breast of woman

Cn. i.)

breathe (v. t.) ... breeze (n. i.) bribe (v. t.) ...

brick (n. i.) , ... bride (n. a.) ' bridegroom (n. a.)... bridge (n. i.")

bu

bright (adj.)

maskal

jonomo

brim of a vessel

ch u t kde,

riri idi

(n. i.)

kdndom

bai darn

bring (v. t.)

dyu

mukuing

bring a case (v.t.) ...

ndlis

Idtar

bring in (v. t.)

dder

koto

bring out (v. t.) ...

ol

chimi, simd,

broad (adj.)

osdr

chaudi

brother (n. a.)

bauu, undi,

,

lidgd.

pilpai

brother-in-law

bauuhonedr,

tirub

(n. a.)

lend) drd, iril

dsar

brothers (n. a.) /...

undiboed,

gened, banam

undibokv

dsar

brushwood (n. i.) ...

tondang,

hatual

hdrdhtiru

sdkom, sankd

bud (n. i.)

moi

Bame

buffalo (n. a.)

kerd

hatang

bug (n. a.)

mdji

koto

bull (n. a.)

andid

pitol, kdysd

bullock (n. a.)

hard

borsd

bundle of clothes

a&pd, marau

(n. i.)

yente, gentri

lad

bundle of paddy

rdpud, rauy orf,

(n. i.)

bird, muti

hochd, sid

burn (v. t.)

dtar, ting

burn (v. i.)

lo

kechd

burn (v. imp.)

usur

burn a dead body,

burn bricks or lime

bandi

(v. t.;

rapd

kuam

burn straw, i. e. to

fertilize land

tod

(v. t.)

bdpal

sded

burn wood for char-

hoio

coal (v. t.) ...

hdngar

gus

burst (v. p.)

rdpudo

itd

bury (v. t.)

topd

koned

bush (n. i.)

lieperpatd

bor

but (conj.)

mendo

dudi, kukuru,

butterfly (n. a.)

pampal

pul

buy (v. t.)

kiring

( 123 )

buzz (v. imp.) ... lutursdri

by accident (adv.)... dchakdte

by chance (adv.) ... <<</M/U/<

by means of (post.)... //•>/

C.

cactus (n. i.) ... sid

cage (n. i.) ... y«V/, gdrod

calamity (n. i.) ... duku calf (n. a.) ... miu

calf (n. i.^ ... junkd

call (v. t.)', ... ked

call loudly (v. t.)>... iu call out (v. t.) ... iu camel (n. a.) ... urit can (v. irreg.) ... dui capable of judging well or thinking properly (v. i.) ... sedn capon (n. a.) ... gaid sim care for (v. t.) ... suku careful (v. t.) ... uruu carry (v. t.) ... idi

carry away (v. t.) ... adkir, arkid,

dtu, oldng carry in the arms

(v. t.) ... koeong

carry in the hand

(v. t.) ... idi

carry off (v. t.) ... adkir, arkid,

dtu, otdng carry on the back

(v. t.) ... gundrd, kud

carry on the bosom

(v. t.) ... hebe

carry on the head

(v. t.) ... dupil

carry on the hip

(v. t.) ... hel>t>

carry on the shoulder

(v. t.) ...go

carry tales (v. t.) ... ker

rarry under the arm

(v. t.) carry with both hands

(v. t.) cart (n. i.) case (n. i.) cast (v. t,)

caste (n. i.)

castor oil tree (n. i.)

castrate (v. t.)

castrated (adj.)

cat (n. a.)

catch (v. t.)

catch a glimpse of

(v. t.) catch by the throat

(v. t.)

catch in a net (v. t.) catch in the hand

(v. t.) catch round the

waist (v. t.) catch the breath

(v.t.)

caterpillar (u. a.) ... cattle (n. a.) cave (n. i.) cease (v. t.) centipede (n. a.) ... Chaibassa (n. i.) chain (n. i.)

chair (n. i.)

Chakardapore (n. i.) chalk (n. i.) chameleon (n. a.) ... change (v. t.) channel (n. i.)

herbed

tiping idi fiyi, gdri mokardmd A '//•/, j, \hudmd,

endd jdti

hiiidi ddru baidd baidd pusi, bilai sdb

nelgod

limbud jdlom

teld gdti

deo

chidu

mi

Idta, undu

bdge

sengel-mdrmdr

Dongol

sinhi,

jir.jri dubted.

machild

gdndu Cliakd kdlimiti kdkdratnbad bodol mdrid, otol,

dd-hord

( 124 )

, charcoal (n. i.) ... hdngar charge (n. i.) ... jimd, gotdo chase (v. t.) ... Mr, kdki

cheat (v. t.) ... chakad

cheek (n. i.) ... jod

chest (n, i.) ... kuam

chew (v. t.) ... tdgoe

chew the cud (v. t.). lijum ' chicken-pox (n. i.)... mdri child (n. a.) ... hon, sitid

chilli (n. i.) .., malchi, marchi

chin (n. i.) ... dkid

chisel (n. i.) ... rukd

cholera (n. i.) ... laii-dul choose (v. t.) ... said chop with a hatchet

(v. t.) ... samd

chop wood (v. t.) ... topang cigarette (n. i.) ... pikd claim (v. t.) ... ddbi

claim possession

(v. t.) ... eser

clap the hands (v. t.) tdping chaprd claw (n. i.) ... sarsar

claw (v. t.) ... gotd

clean (adj. & v. t.)... parchi clean with water

(v. t.) ... chdpi

clear forest (v. t.)... dmin clear the throat

(v.t.) ... kde*

clear up (v. i.) ... pdend clear wate* (n. i.) ... tetd dd climate (n. i.) ... dd-hoio climb (v. i.) ... de, rakab

clod earth (n. i.)... hdsdbu close (adj.) ... japd, nde

cloth (n. i.) ... lijd

clothes (n. i.) ... lijd 'cloud (n. i.) ... rimil

clue (n. i.) ... mundi

cluster (v. t.) ... jur

coat (n. i.) coal (n. i.) cobra (n. a.) cobweb (n. i.)

... sutui ... hangar ... pdndu bing ... jdlom

cockcrow (n. i.) ... simrd cockfight (v. t.) ... sim tol, i. e. with artificial spurs (kdti). Sim pdrd is any place where cock- fighting usually takes place, the winning cock being called jitkdr sim or. sdndi, and the loser pddu sim or sdfidi. The action of the cocks is known as soddj the reciprocal form sopodd being common.

cockroach (n. a.) ... upi

cocoon (n. a.) ... lungam^lugam

coffin (n. i.) ... chalpd

cohabit (v. t.) ... do,jagar,juti, misd.

coiffure (n. i.) ... sitpid, rotod

cold (adj.) ... rabang, tutkun,

sdsd

cold in the head

(v. imp.) ... mdvdd

collar bone (n. i.) ... ddtdromjang

collect (v. t.) ... Tiundi

collect round (v. t.) .. jur

coloured border of a 'dhoti (n. i.) ... onol

comb (n. i. & v. t.). . ndki

come (v. i.) ... Jiuju

come in (v. i.) ... bolo

come out of the egg

(v. i.) ... rutui

come up out of the

ground (v. i.) ... omon

comfort (n. i.) ... tuku

comic song (n.i.) ... lagri durang

commit suicidr

(v. rcf.) coinniQii (adj.) complainant (n. a.)., compound (n. i.) .., compromise (v. t.).., conceal (v. t.) couch (n. i.) confess (v. t.) confusion (n. i.) ... consumption (n. i.). . content (vt imp.) ... converse (v. t.) * ... converse together

(v. recip.) cook (v. t.) cook rice (v. t.) cooked rice (n. i.) ... cool (adj.) coolie (n. a.) copper (n. i.) copy (v. t.) corrupt (v. t.) cotton (n. i.) cough (v. t.) cough and cold (n.i.) count (v. t.) country (n'. i.) country spirit

(n. i.)

courageous (adj.) ... court (n. i.) courtyard (n. i.) ... cousin (n. a.)

cover (v. t.) cover (n. i.) cover, e. g. with a blanket (v. t.) .

( 125 )

cow (n. a.)

yundi

yoen

cowardly (adj.;

boro

sadai

cowherd (n. a.)

:/"/"''

mndai

cowhouse (n. i.)

govd

bakai

crab (n. a.)

kafkom,

fail, rdji

kdkom

uktt

cramp (v. imp.) ...

nti/Hj

sakod

crane (n. a.)

ko

mandting

creep (v. i.)

obor

golmdl

creeper (n. i.)

na», ndge

rdj rog

criticize (v. t.)

chird

hdrob

crocodile (n. a.)

tden

jagar

crooked (adj.)

bankd, ko<-hc,

gdndi

japgar, kapdji

cross-beam (n. i.) ...

kodlu

isin

crouch (v. i.)

obor

iiit'indi) dundu

crow (n. a.)

kd

mdndi, dundu

crow (v. t.)

rda

red

crowd (n. i.)

guti

ndldi, ndldtani

crowbar (n. i.)

sdboro

tdmbd

crush between nails

nakal

(v. t.)

toe

etkdichi

cry (v. t.)

rda

kddtom

crystal (n. i.)

arsi diri

ku

cuckoo (n. a.)

toau

ku-mdndd

cucumber (n. i.) ...

tder

lekd

cultivate (v. t.)

tin, si

disuin

cultivated land

(n. i.)

ote^ ti-ote

arki

cultivator (n. a.) ...

tiui

borsd

culvert (n. i.)

dudi, kukuru,

kacheri

pul

rdchd

cunning (adj.)

chufar

kdkdgiingit,

cup made of leaves

6auw, undi,

(n. i.)

pu

etc. Vide

cup made of metal

Chap, xxiv

(n. i.)

gind

of Grammar.

curdled milk (n. i.)..

dumbd tod

hdrub

ourry (n. i.)

utu

handrub

custard-apple

mandal,

(n. i.)

dambau

uiu

custody (n. i.)

jimd, gotdo

( 126

custom (n. i.)

dastur

day before yesterday

cut (v. t.)

md

(adv.)

holdter

cut as with scissors

dead (adj.)

gojakan

(v.t.)

Idtab

dead body (n. i.) ...

monrd

cut branches (v. t.)...

hese

deaf (adj.)

kdla

cut brushwood

death (n. i.)

gonoe

(v. t.)

ging

death-rattle (n. i.) ...

hu

cut grass or paddy

deceive (v. t.)

chakad

(v. t.)

ir

decorate (v. t.)

singdr

cut into pieces

decorate hair with

(v. t.)

gundui

flowers (v. t.) ...

bd

cut up flesh (v. t.)...

ged

decrease (v. p.)

dduo, huringo

cat up with a knife

deep (adj.)

ikir

i

or with the teeth

deer (n. a.)

birjilu, pustd,

(v. t.)

rere

saram

cut with a knife

defendant (n. a.) ...

muddle

(v. t.)

had

delay (v. t.)

gdri

cut wood (v. t.)

topang

den (n. i.)

Idta, undu

deny (v. t.) ...

kd-mandting

4

deposition (n. i.) ...

kdji

dacoit (v. t.)

ddku

depressed (v. imp.)...

huringji,

daily (adv.)

dimsi, dimsi

monduku

dimsi,

deride (v. t.)

Idndd

angomvtid

descend (v. ref.) ...

ddun, dgun

daily labourer (n. a.)

ndldi, ndldtani

desire (v. imp.)

sanang

ddl(n.i.)

utu (cooked) ;

despise (v. t.)

hild

ddli ( un-

destroy (v. t.)

nuksdn

cooked)

devil (n. a.)

bongd

damage (v. t.)

etkd

dew (n. a.)

saparum-dd,

dance (v. i.)

sun

sisir, sisir-dd

danger (n. i.)

boro, tiuku

dhoti (n. i.)

p'indd

dark (adj.)

hende, nubd

die (v. i.)

9°j°

date (n. i;)

kitd

die of starvation

daughter (n. a.) ...

kuihon

(v. i,)

uu

daughter-in-law

different (adj.)

eta, kilimili,

(n. a.)

kimin

tdngd.

dawn (n. i.)

ang, idang

difficult (adj.)

hambal, muskil

day (n. i.)

betar, betarang,

dihbdri (n. i.)

bakai

V

huld, bar,

dim (adj.)

dumduld

md, din.

dip into water

day after tomorrow

(v. t.)

tupu

(adv.)

meang, gapdter

dirty (adj.)

humu, etkd

ditoharge c v. t.)

disciple (n. a.) discover (v. t.) disease (n. i.) dismiss (v. t.) dissect (v. t.) dive (v. i.) divide (v. t.) do (v. t.) dog (n. a.) door (n. i.] doubled up^adj.) .., doubt (n. i.) ».., doubtful (adj.) dove (n. a.) drag'(v. t.) draw (v. t.) draw (v. t.) draw in the breath

(v.t.)

draw water (v. t.) .. dream (v. t.) dress (v. t.) dribble (n. i.) drink (v.t.) drive (cattle) (v. t.). drive in (v. t.) drive in with a

hammer (v. t.) .. drivel (v. t.) drive out (v. t.) .. drown (v. i.) drum (n. i.) drunk (v. p.) drunken (adj.) dry (adj.) dry up (v. t.) duck (n. a.)

dumb (adj.) dung (n. i.) dunghill (n. i.)

( 127 )

nit, l>dge

dwarf (n. a.)

baram

child

dysentery (n. i.) ...

maiom laii-dul,

held, IKIDI

tul

hdsu, rogo

da, bdge

E.

gcd

unum

each (adj.)

mutid

lui t ing

ear (n. i.)

lutur

rikd

ear of paddy or

seta

other crop (n. i.). .

gele

duar, silping

early (adj.)

bdle

unyud unyud

early (adv.)

idangre

td

ear-ring (n. i.)

murki, pagrd.

kd-sdriolekd

earth (n. i.)

Utd

putam

earthen waterpot

or

(n. i.)

chdtu

or

earthquake (n. i.) ...

ote-ruku

onol

ease oneself (v. t.) ...

t, birpd, ol

east (n. i.)

singiol

sib

easy (adj.)

Idr

burd, taut

eat (v. t.)

jom

kumu

eat as much as one

tusing

can (v. t.)

bi

ulidd

echo (v. i.)

sdriurd

nu

edge (n. i.)

kuti

hdr

edible (n. i.)

jometed, chdrd

dder

edible root (n. i.) ...

tdngd

egg (n. i.)

jdrom, bili,peor,

kilum

peto

ulidd

eight (num.)

iriled, iril

hdrol

elbow (n. i.)

ukd

sur

elephant (n. a.)

hdti

dumang

embankment (n. i.)...

dnri,

bulo

embrace (v. t.)

hambud

bul

emigrate (v. t.)

disum bdge

ro

employ (v. t.)

dchu, paiti em

dnjed

empty (adj.)

tdmd

konro, hedfieh'

, end (v. t.)

chdM

jer-janyd

pnd (n. i.)

chanab, tundu

gala

enemy (n. a.)

bairi

ynri, i/uvsi

engage (v.t.)

dchu

dubi

enough (adj.)

liili, jokd

( 128 )

enquire (v. t.) ... kuli, taddruk

fan (v. t.)

jir

enter (v. t.) ... bolo

fan (n. i.)

jirented

entwine (v.t.) ... paid

far (adj.)

sanging

envy (v. imp.) ... hinsd, chentd

fast (v. t.)

katab

epilepsy (n. i.) ... ambdri

fat (adj.)

kiri

equal (adj.) ... midge, bardbari

fat (n, i.)

itil

escape (v. i.) ... pochd

father (n. a.) ...

dpu

especially (adv.) ... jatkdte

father-in-law (n. a.).

honedr

eunuch (n. a.) ... gaid

fault (n. i.)

chird, dos

evening (n. i.) ... aiub

fear (v. t.)

boro

ever (adv.) ... jd chuild

feather (n. i.)

il

everlasting (adj.) ... jorong jorong

feed (v. t.)

djom

every (adj.) ... mutid

feel (v. t.;

atkdr

evidence (n. i.) ... ijdr

female organ

excavate (v. t.) ... ur

(n. i.)

ruji

exceed (v. i.) ... Id, rakab

fence ( n. i.)

bakai, clwrui

exchange (v.t.) ... bodol

fever (n. i.)

hdsu

excretion (n. i.) ... i

fibre (n. i.)

sutam

explain (v. t.) ... udub

fiddle (n. i.)

banam

extinguish (v. t.) ... en

field (n. i.)

ote

extract ( from some-

fight (v. t.)

lardi, larai

thing written)

fig tree (n. i.)

lod ddru

(v.t.) ... old

fill (v.t.)

pere

eye (n. i.) ... med

fill the stomach

eyebrow (n. i.) ... med-kdndom

(v.t.)

bi

eyelid (n. i.) ... randpid

filled, filled with

P-

(adj.)

pereakan

find (v. t.)

bete., ndm

fable (n. i.) ... kdni

fin of a fish (n. i.) ...

il

face (n. i.) ... med-mud

fine (v. t.)

ddnde

face to face (adv.)... amnd-samnd

finger (n. i.)

gandd, ddro,

fade (v. i.) ... goso

kdtub

faint (v. ir,reg.) ... gojolekd hobdo

finger-nail (n. i.) ...

sarsar

fair (adj.) ... esel

finger's breadth

mid sarsar,

fall (v. i.) ... u, gur, hdndi

(n.i.)

gandd

fall on the back

finish (v. t,)

chdbd

(v. t.) ... sandang

fire (n. i.)

sengel

fall on the stomach

firefly (n. a.)

ipipiung

(v. i.) ... obor

first (adj.)

sidd

"allow (adj.) ... parid

first (adv.)

siddre, siddte

false (adj.) ... chakad

fish (n. a.)

hdku

famine (n. i.) ... ringd

fish-hook (n. i.)

Idnsi

't (n. i.) . list (v. t.) Jist (n. i.) five (num.) fix (v. t.) fix ( time or date

(v. t.) flag (n. i.) flame (n. i.) flat rice (n. i.) flax (n. i.) flea (n. a.> flesh (n. i.) float (v. i.) flood (n. i.) flour (n. i.) flower (n. i.) flow slowly (v. i.) . flow swiftly (v. i.). flute (n. i.) fly (v. i.) fly (n. a.)

flying-fox (n. a.) .

fog (n. i.)

fold round (v. t.)

fold up (v. t.)

follow (v. t.)

follow, as* a sort bodyguard (v.t.)

foolish (adj.)

foot (n. i.)

footprint (n. i.)

for (post.)

forced (adj.)

forcibly (adv.)

ford (n. i.)

forehead (n. i.)

foreigner (n. a.)

forest (n. i.)

forge (v. t.)

forget (v. t.")

,.. jdlom

forgive (v. t.)

mdp, bdye

... iiil

forked piece of wood

... chijinil

(n. i.)

tuam

... moid, moi

form ears (v. i.) ...

gele

... sob

formerly (adv.) ...

sidtire, tiddte

3)

form into cocoons

. . . dill

(v. t.)

tol

. .. toiol

four (num.)

upunid, upun m

... jul

four annas (n. i.) ...

siki

... tdben

'fowl (n a.)

sim

... son

fox (n. a.)

taukuldt tuiu,

. . . karchu

kalkal,

... jilu

karamchd

... diatom

frank (adj.) ...

suld-sddd

... bdn

free of charge

... holony, lupu

(adj.)

sdmd

... bd

fresh (adj.)

rokd

. . . linyi

friend (n. a.)

juri

... hdri

frighten (v. t.)

birkau, boidrhi

... rutu

frog (n. a.;

choke

... dpir

fruit, (n. i.)

. . . roko

fruit of mahud tree

... bdduri

(n. i. )

dold

... pukad

fry (v. t.)

atd

... pdte

full moon (n. i.) ...

purnimd, tuli

... Idtum

chdndu

. . . otonyt pichd

full of (v. p.)

pereo

of

full of (adj.)

pereakan

funeral (n. i.)

topdjany

. . . sutu

furrow (n. i.)

nailyard

... dondo

... faftd

G.

... mdndd

gabion (n. i.)

churui

... layite, layid

gain (n. i.)

Idb ,

... pochod

garden (n. i.)

baked

... pochodte

garlic (n. i.)

rdsuvi

. . . </d /

gasp (v. imp.)

deo

. . . samany

gather (v. t.)

Jut nd i

... diku

germinate (v. i.) ...

omon

... bir

get (v. t.^

ndm

ter

get accustomed to

(v. t.)

tebe

( 130 )

grandson (n. a.) ...

jaii

atom

grass (n. i.)

tasad, dumbu

jdrom

grasshopper

,

ufd

(n. a.)

somsor

gotom

gratis (adj.)

sdmd

rod, umbul

graze (v. i.)

dting

bobiur

graze (v. t.)

gupi

Idndd

grease (n. i.)

itil

add

green (adj.)

tasadlekd

1 green pigeon (n. a.)..

hud

linijum

greet (v. t.) ...

jodr

em

grey-haired (adj.j...

pdnda-bo

grieve (v. imp.) ...

Mating

gaud pere

grind, in a pestle &

mortar or in a

<

gong

mill (v. t.)

rid

grind the teeth

sard

(v.t.)

data, ririd

suku, rdvsd

groan (v. t.)

gerang

grow (v. i.)

hard

turtung

grow (v. t.)

hdrdichi

arsi diri

growl (v. t.)

logor, nornor

jumbui

grow old (v. p.) ...

hdmo

sen, seno

grumble (v. t.)

logor

Gau

guard (v. t.)

horo

merom

guava (n. i.)

tamrds

sdmom

guess (v. t.)

atkdr

bugi, bugin

guest (n. a.)

kupul

losib

gullet (n. i.)

ututod, ututud

gun (n. i.)

bundu

bapai

gundli (n. i.)

gurlu, gundli

gunpowder (n. i.) ...

toroe

ombd

honso

H.

ol

hail (n. a.)

aril

Gau

hair (n. i.)

ub

tumbd, suku

hair ornament

jang

(n. i.)

chindi,chindibd

half (num.)

tdld

jaii-kui

hammer (n. i.)

kotdsi

tdtd

hand (n. i.)

ti

handcuffs (n. i.)

sikri

of plough (n.i.)

hang (v. t.) hang up (v. t.) happen (v. irreg.) ... happy (v. imp.) hard (Adj.) hard water (n. i.) ... hard-working (adj.). hare (n. a.) harrow ^v. t.) harvest time (n. i.). .

i hat (n. i.)

hatch (v. i.)

hate (v. t.)

have patience with

(v. t.)

hawk (n. a.) head (n. i.) headman (n. a.) hear (v. t.) heart (n. i.) Heaven (n. i.) heavy (adj.) heel (n. i.) heir (n. a.) help (v. t.) hiccough (v. imp.)... hide (v. t.) hide (n. i.) high (adj.) high land (terraced)

(n. i.) high land (unter-

raced) (n. i.) ... hill (n. i.) hillock (n. i.) hill-stream (n. i.) ... hip (n. i.) hip-bone (n. i.) hire (n. i.)

( 131 )

liiro a plough (v. t.)

godli

fctfd

hiss (v. t.)

f»n. ft

h<ik>rtjoe, tolgoe

hit against (v. t.) ...

tdki, toke

hdkd

hit a mark (v. t.) ...

to

hobdo

hit with fist (v. t.)...

gil

sukti

hive (n. i.)

ddkd

kete

hoar-frost (n. a.) ...

ratang

ibil da

hoarse (v. imp.) ...

yagarsd

pean

hoe (v. t.)

chdlu

kulde

'hole (n. i.)

undu

kdrd

honest (adj.)

bugi, bugin

Uilxi ir dipH,

honey (n. i.)

dumur da, lilt

tardi

dd, hurumsuku

tupuri

honeycomb (n. i.) ...

ddkd

rvtui

hoof (n. i.)

Uu

hild

hornet (n. a.)

lili

horns (n. i.)

diriny

satiny

horse (n. a.)

sddom

lesrd

host (n. a.)

gusind

bo

hot (adj.)

lolo, urgum,

Mundd

jete, had

alum

house (n. a.)

od

ji

how (adv.)

cliilekd

sirmd

how many (adj.) ...

chimin

hambal

how much (adj.) ...

chiminang,

indikd

cldmtang

odris

hungry (v. imp.) ...

renge

denyd

hunt (v t.)

sanyar

deo

hurt (v. t.)

hdsti

uka

husband (n. a.)

her el, ham

unr

husband & wife(n. a.)

kulyid

salangi

husk (v. t.)

rung

husk (n. i.)

hen

kundi ote, pi ote

husked rice (n.i.) ...

chault

hyaena (n. a."*

d and d kit Id

gord

buru

I.

yutu

lor

identify (v. t.)

tit'lnrum

chapal

idiotic (adj.)

dondo

rlit rijany

if (conj.)

redo (used as

ndld

suffix only)

ignorant (adj.)

iguana (n. a.)

ill (v. imp.)

illegitimate (adj.) ...

impede (v. t.)

in addition (conj.)...

.in a line (adv.)

in any way what- soever (adv.)

in broad daylight (adv.)

increase (v. i.)

Indian corn (n. i.) ...

in fact (adv.)

infant (n. a.)

infect (v. t.)

inform (v. t.)

in future (adv.) ...

inner room (n. i.) ...

in no way what- soever (adv.)

insanity (n. i.)

insensible (adj.) ...

inside (adv.)

instalment (n. i.) ...

intend (v. imp.) ...

intentionally (adv.)

intestines (n. i.)

in the beginning (adv.) '

in the midst of (adv.)

in the presence of (adv.)

iron (n, i.)

,.iron ore (n. i.)

t irrigate (v. t.)

irrigation reservoir <n. i.)

( 132 )

dondo

itch (v. imp.)

babatd

tor

itch (n. i.)

kasrd

hdsu

(

jantd

J.

kesed

ne bdgekete,

jackal (n. a.)

tuiu, kalkal,

jatkd

taukuld,

gene gene, gets

karamchd

gete

jackfruit (n. i.)

porso, kantard

r

jail (n. i.)

jel

jdlekdte

jdmun tree (n. i.) ...

kudd ddru

jealous (v. imp.) ...

hinsti, chentd

singi maskalre

join (v. p.)

mido

hard, Id, rakab

joint (n. i.)

c

joren

gangai

join together (v. t.) .

jod, mid

sdrige, sdrite

journey (v. i.)

senhord

bale lion

joyful (v. imp.)

rdvsd

jan

judgment (n. i.) ...

hukum

kdji, udub, ker

juice (n. i.)

rdsi

derre

jump (v. t.) ...

ui

dding

junction (n. i )

midakantd

jungle (n. i.)

bir

jdlekdteokd

jungle-fowl (n. a.)...

bir-sim

baid

just before daylight

gojolekd

(adv.)

mir-mirre

bitdrre, bitdrtc

kisti

K.

sanang

keep (v. t.)

saitibd

keep awake (v. t.)...

en

dddkete

keep a woman (v. t.)

do, saitibd

pord

keep in the mouth

(v. t.)

Idtum

siddre, munure

keep quiet (v. ref.)

hapdn

tdldre

kernel (n. i.)

jang

key (n. i.) ...

chdbi

samanangre

kick (v. t.)

padd

med

kill (v. t.)

goe

bichd, bichd

kind (adj.) ...

saiad-korong

diri

kingpost (n. i.)

jdngi

dd idi, dre

kiss (v. t.)

chereb

kite (n. a.)

kuid

bdndd

knee (n. i.)

mukui, ikum

knife (n. i.) knock ( v. t.) knot (n. \.) know (v. t.) know by instinct

(v.t.)

km'tiit (n. a.) /\it»i/«ii' (n. a.) kttrthi (n. i.) kttsuni tree (n. i.) ...

L.

> lac (n. a.) , ...

ladder (n. i.) ladle (v. t.) lair0 (n. i.) lake (n. i.) lamp (n. i.) land (n. i.) lane (n. i.)

language (n. i.) ...

lap (v. t.)

last (adj.)

last night (n. i.) ...

last year (n. i.) ...

late (v. p.)»

Idtlii (n. i.)

laugh (v. t.)

lay an egg (v. t.) ...

lay in wait for (v. t.) lazy (adj) leaf (n. i.) leak (v. i.) lean (adj.) lean on (v. t.) learn (v. ref.) leave (v. i.j leave remaining (or) behind (v. t.) ...

( 133 )

kdtn

leech (n. a.)

IKI/

tofo

leep with cowduntr

O

tondom

(v. t.)

In at], i

MA

I'-ft (adj.)

konir, 1, H.I.I ti

left (v. p.)

chirgal

leg (n. i.)

/.•'itii

chltt'l I'inii

leisure (n. i.)

j'i'rsat

/\ in i leal

lend (v. t.)

/a//, rin em

hoe

leopard (n. n.)

> kiii<l.tr-kiilt'i

l«i r it ddrn

.leprosy (n. i.)

tundn/»iiif/i<i

lessen (v. t.)

ddu, dyn

level (adj.)

bardbari,

enko

toman, mid

rakabted

level land (v. t.) ...

kdrd

hi

lick (v. t.)

jal

undu, Idta

lid (n. i.;

handrub

dored

lie (v. t.)

cliakad

did, maskal

lie down (v. i.)

giti, burum

ote

life (n. i.)

ji

/ton hard, resed

light (n. i.)

did, maskal

hord

light (adj.)

lar

kdji

light a cigarette

jal

(v. t.)

jundi

taiom

light a fire (v. t.) ...

sen gel ting

enang nidd

light a lamp (v. t.)...

maskal, marsal.

md, senoean

lightning (n. a.) ...

hichir

sirmd

like (v. t.)

suku

gdrio

like (adj.)

lekd

dandd

lime (n. i.)

chund

Idndd

limestone (n. i.) ...

chundiri

pero, peto,

limp (v. t.)

loke

jdrom, bill

linseed (n. i.)

uuchi

loro

lip (n. i.)

loclio

Idndid

liqaor-shop (n. i.) ...

guddin

sakam

listen (v. t.)

aium

joro

little (adj.)

huring

Utt

little finger (n. i.) ...

lion ddro

tender

live (v. t.)

jid

eton

Kve (v. ref.)

tain

bdge

liver (n. i.) ...

im

lizard (n. a.)

dondd, tor

tare

load (v. t.)

Iddi

( 134 )

load (n. i.)

bdri

maiden (n. a.)

dindd kui

loan (n. i.) ...

rin

maind (n. a.) ...

rdmi

lock (n. i.)

kulpu

maintain (v. t.)

asul

locust (n. a.)

tukapard

maize (n. i.)

yanyai

lodge (v. t.)

derd

make (v. t.)

bni

loin-cloth (n. i.) ...

botoe

make a hole (v.t.)...

bu

long (adj.)

jil'tng

make a noise

look (v. t.)

nel

(v. t.)

kdkald

look after (v.t.)

saitibd, gotdo

make charcoal (v. t.)

hangar

look down (v. t.) ...

tirub, med, ddu

make into powder

look for (v. t.)

ndm

(v. t.)

laud

r

looking glass

arsi,

make merry

n

(n. i.)

nepelupurum

(v. imp.)

rdrisd

look sideways

make preliminary

(v. t.J

hetd

arrangements for

look out for (v. t.)...

loro

a marriage (v. t.)..

bdpold

look up (v. t.)

sangil, med

make ready (v. t.) . .

sekd

rakab

make water (v. t.)...

duki

loosen (v. t.)

jindal

male organ (n. i.) ...

loe

lop branches (v. t.). .

hese

man (n. a.)

ho

lose (v. t.)

ad

mange (n. i.)

kasrd

loose caste (v. p.) ...

jdti etkdo,

mangoe (n. i.)

uli

ojdtio

manure (n. i.)

sdr, guri

lost (adj.) ...

bamal

many (adj.)

purd

lota (n. i.)

guti

map (n. i.)

naksd

lotus (n. i.)

sdlukad

mark (n. i.)

anka, china

louce (n. a.) -...

siku

market (n. i.)

hdt

loud (adj.) ...

kdkald

marriageable girl

love (v. t.)

suku

(n.a.)

hapdnum

low (adj.) ...

Idtar

marry (v. t.) ...

dandi

low (v. t.)

rda

master (n. a.) ...

gomke, gus'md

lower (v. t.)

ddu, dgu

mat (n. i.)

jdti

low jungle (n. i*) ...

tondang

matches (n. i.) ...

ir-sengel

low-lying; land

sdl ote, berd

matchmaker (n. a,)..

dutam

(n. i.)

matter (n. i.) ...

sondoro

lungs (n. i.) -...

borkod

maul (v. t.) ...

gotd

measles (n. i.)

bumburi

M.

measure (v. t.)

mukd

"mad (adj.)

baid, bdld-bdlu

measure rice (v. t.). .

song

1 maggot (n. a.) , ....

cJiidu

meat (n. i.) ...

jilu

mdhud (n. i.) ......

madkam

medicine (n. i.) ...

red

maiddn (n. i.) ....

pi

meet (v. t.) ...

ddrom, mid

( 135 )

nit-It (v. i.)

. .. trr

mouth (n. i.)

d

menses (n. i.)

... dtd nd ure

move (v. t.)

(i/niii

lijdkiin' liolx'mtt it

move away (v. t.)...

tor id, tend

metal cup (n. i.)

... glnd

move near (v. t.) ...

dnni

inirn ( n. i.)

... pdlit hdtd

mucli (adv.)

purd

niiililay (n. i.)

... tikiti

mud (n. i.)

lidsd, I- tod,

middle (adj.)

... tdld

j»l>e, dobe

midwife (n. a.)

... ilnl

muddy water (n. i.)

bard dd

>

milk (n. i.)

... tod

mushroom (n. i.) ...

ud

milk (v. t.)

... taui

> muskrat (n. a.)

clunidi

millet (n. i.)

. . . kode

mustard (n. i.)

ntdni, ddjany

mind (n. j.)

... ji

myrabolams (n. i.)...

merel, rold

minor (n. a.)

... kd-seavakdiii

mysterious (adj.) ...

dkadandd

inhror (n. i.)

... am,

nepelupurum

N.

miscarry (v. t.)

... endd-ad

miser (n. a.)

... oiol

nail (n. i.)

kdn 1 i

misfortune (n. i.)

. . . dnkii

naked (adj.)

totd

mist (n. a.)

... podsi

name (n. i.)

notum, numu

mistake (v. t.)

... gul

namesake (n. a.) ...

sdki

mix (v. t.)

... hondd) mild

narrow (adj.)

batari, resed

mix with water (v.

t.) led

navel (n. i.)

luti

molasses (n. i.)

... yur

near (adj.)

japd, nde

money (n. i.)

... Idkd

necessity (n. i.)

dorkdr

mongoose (n. a.)

... gindru

neck (n. i.)

holo

monkey (n. a.)

... .sard, yaii

necklace (n. i.)

hisir

month (n. i.)

... chdndu

needle (n. i.)

sui, svja

moon (n. a.)

... chdndu

niece (n. a.)

gungii) honerd,

moonlight (n. i.)

... tete

homonkui,

morning (n. i.)

... setd

gekui, honkui

morning star (n. a

.) ango ipil

neigh (v. t.)

rdu

mortgage (n. i.)

... baiv did, tikd,

nephew (n. a.)

gunyu, honied,

bandar,

Ipnherel)

bdldjigi

homonkod

mosquito (n. a.)

... sikiv

gekodthonkod

moth (n. a.)

... pampal, tird,

nest (n. i.)

tukd

patni

nettle (n. i.)

tengehing,

mother (n. a.)

... engd

jepender

mother-in-law (n.

a.) handr

sakam

mouldy (v. t.)

... bau

nevertheless (conj.)

enreo, iminreoj

mountain (n. i.)

... burn

new (adj.)

ndmd

mouse (n. a.)

... chutu

new moon (n. a.) ...

mulu

( 136 )

next year (n. i.) ...

kdtom, hujit

omen (n. i.)

ere

sirmd

on (post)

chetante,

next younger brother

chetanre

or sister (n. a.) ...

sunutu

on behalf of (post.)

lagitc, layid

nickname (n. i.) ...

pale numu

once (adv.)

misd

night (n. i.)

nidd

once upon a time

nightmare (v. t.) ...

bongd otd

(adv.)

musing betar,

nim tree (n. i.)

nim ddru

mid dipli

nine (num.)

area, are

one (num.)

miad, mid, mi

nod (v. i.)

dum

one-eyed (adj.)

kdnrd, kdyri

noon (n. i.)

tikin

one by ono (adv.)

mido inido

north (n. i.)

kdtdchamrd

onion (n. i.)

pedji

nose (n. i.)

mud, mutd

only (adv.)

sumang, sumad

nose ornament (n. i.)

gunrd

ooze out (v. i.) ...

ol

nostril (n. i.)

mud-undu,

open (v. t.)

ni

mutd-undu

open (adj.)

siddsddd

not even once (adv.)

misdo kd

open the eye (v. t.)

arid

nothing (pron.)

jdndo bano

open the mouth (v.t.)

chdb

not yet (adv.)

auri

or (conj.)

chi

notwithstanding

orally (adv.)

ate

(conj.)

enreo, iminreo

order (v. t.)

hukum

now (adv.)

nd

origin (n. i.)

upan

nudge (v. t.)

gam

original clearer of

nursery (for plants)

the soil (n. a.) ...

munureni,

(n. i.)

ddrupdrd bakai

munud parjd

ornament (n. i.) ...

singdr

.

orphan (n. a.)

dmbdrob

oath (n. i.)

sara

other (adj.)

etd

obey (v. t.)

mandting

ought (v. irreg.) ...

lagdtingd

obscene language

outcaste (v. t.)

ojdti, jdti etkd

(n. i.)

mdge

outrage (v. t.)

pochodte do

obstacle (n. i.) ...

kenesed, gdndi

outside (adv.)

bdrte, bdrre

obstruction (n. i.)...

kenesed, gdndi

over (post.)

chetante,

obtain (y. t.)

ndm

chetanre

occur (v. irreg.) ...

hobdo

overflow (v. t.)

pair

offence (n. i.)

chird, dos

owe (v. t.)

chird, rin

often (adv.)

isu dund

owl (n. a.)

kokor

oil (n. i.)

sunum

owner (n. a.)

gusind

'oil (v. t.)

ojo

1 oil-press (n. i.)

gdnri, jdnti

P.

old (adj.)

hdm, buri,

pace (n. i.)

chandang

pdpri

pachwai (n. i.)

diang, Hi

C i.l I . i ii. i.) paddv bird ( n :i. ) ... pain ( i). i.) pain' ( v. t. )

JHllllS tlVC ( 1). I.) ...

palate ( n. i.) palm troo (n. i.) ... pane of <jlass (n. i.) f> ipaiyd (n. i.) paper (n. i.) pardon (v. t.) parents (n. a.) parrot (n. a.) pa.-t (n. i.) partridge (n. a.) ... .pass' from hand to

hand (v. t.) pass urine (v. t.) ... paw (n. i.) pay a debt (v. t.) ... peacock (n. a.) peak (n. i.) peel trn.it (v. t.) ... peel off the bark of

a tree (v. t.) penis (n. i.) peon (n. a.) perhaps (adv.) perspiration (n. i.)... perspire (v. imp.) ... petition (v. t.) phlegm (n. i.) pidr tree (n. i.) pice (n. i.) pickaxe (n. i.) pick up (v. t.) picture (n. i.) piebald (adj.) piece (n. i.) pig (n. a.) pigeon (n. a.) pimple (n. i.)

<>n<>l,j<xl tiinr d'irit limit h' kit, i darn arsi

sakant

cnga-apu doe, bead, rupu handting, itad chitri

chdpal

duki

kdtd

hal

mdrd

chut kde

hoio

Id

loe

chaprdsi

torang, idu

balbal-dd

balbal

darkds

kde

tdrob ddm

poisd

kankua, cltolkt1

chu, halang

naksd

kabrd

do, em tafad

//«

<-lidrd

ro

tdli,

sukuri, sitkri

dudmvl

pusri

i>i/ n. i. } ... A

pit (n. i.)

place (v. t.)

place (n. i.)

plaintiff (n. a.)

plait (v. t.)

plant (n. i.)

plant (v. t.)

plantain (n. i.)

plant closely (v. t.) j>drd

plaster (v. t.) ... jod

plaster with mud

(v. t.) ... jdlom

plate (n. i.) ... kutrd,

tdri (made of metal) ; (made of stone) ; chukdi, chitki, kalgi (made of leaves ) ; latter is more a bowl than a plate.

play (v. i.) ... inung

play the drum (v. t.) ru

play the fiddle (v. t.) banam

play the flute (v. t.) orong

pleased (v. imp.) ... suki*

pliable (adj) ... Hud

plot of land (n. i.)... ote

plough (n. i.) ... naU

plough (v. t.) ... siu, si

plough cattle (n. a.) dvr nri

ploughshare (n. i.) pdnl

pluck fruit or flowers (v. t.) ... god

pluck leaves (v.t.)... he

pluck maize cobs (v. t.)

plum tree (n. i.)

point (n. i.)

point out (v. t.)

poison (v. t.)

poison (n. i.)

poisonous (adj.)

poor (adj.) ... renge

porcupine (n. a.) ... jiki

chuiujd b.ikrd ddru chut kde chundul rub, bisi em b'mi

( 138 )

portion (n. i.) ... hand tiny, itad possess (v. t.) ... dakal, dakal

dyu possible (v. irreg.)... dai, Jwbd dai,

hobdolekd post (used in house

building) (n. i.)... kuntd pot (n. i.) ... chdtu (made

of earth) ; patrd (made of stone) potato (n. i.) ... sdngd pounded rice (n. i.) tdben

pour (v. t.)

dul

pour off slowly while

covered (v. t.) ...

tendd

powder (v. t.)

laud

practise (v. t.)

sebe

precede (v. t.)

der

precipitous (adj.) ...

hi

pregnant (adj.)

hambal

prepare (v. t.)

sekd, bai

present (v. irreg.)...

mend, hdjir

press (v. t.)

otd

press oil (v. t.)

len

pretend (v ref.) ...

bain

prevent (v. t.)

mand, esed,

kesed

price (n. i.)

gonong

prick (v. t.)

yittu

prison (n. i.)

jel

prisoner (n. a.)

koidi

prod (v. t.) ...

ruuny, ho tor,

tundd

profit (n. ir)

Idb

prohibit (y. t.)

mand

proof (n. i.)

sabuj

prop (v. t.) ...

turub

proper (adj.) ...

tik

property (n. i.)

biti, yinis

'protect (v. t.)

danany, banchau

'proud (v. imp.)

mamarany

pull after (v. t.) ...

or

pull up (v. t.)

taui

pumpkin (n. i.)

punish (v. t.)

pupil (n. a.)

pupil of the eye (n. i.)

pursue (v. t.)

push (v. t.)

put (v. t.)

put inside (v. t.) ...

put in the ground

(v.t.)

put into the fire (v.t.) put into the mouth ,

(v.t.)

put on a dhoti (v. t.) put on a sdri (v. t.). . put on clothes (v. t.) put on oil (v. t.) put on paint, plaster,

whitewash, coal

tar, etc. (v. t.) ... put on tiles (v. t.)... put rut new

blossoms (v. t.)... put out new leaves

(v.i.) put out of the way

(v.t.) python (n. a.)

quagmire (n. i.) quarrel (v. rec.) .

quench (v. t.) question (v. t.) quick (adj.) quickly (adv.) quicksand (n. i.) quicksilver (n. i.) quiet (adj.) quill (n. i.)

kakdru, kakru,pdndoi sajd

eloni, che'id med-rdjd hdr, kdki, pichd udur do, em dder

bid

urub i

djom

pindd

er

tusing

ojo

jod kecho da I

moi sayen

dtom burn biny

jaydd eperavy,

goponde hdrob kuli dnjd

dnjdte, bode dalki yitil pdrd hdpd il

« l.-.l. )

R.

rabbit ( n. a.) ... knldi'

ni'lish (n. i.) ... mitrai rafter (n. i.) ... seneor

rag (n. i.) ... chid a

railway (n. i.) ... rel rain (n. a.) ... gamd

rainbow (i. p.) ... rnlbiinj

ongtadde (see note against rulbing in lio-English vocabulary.) raise (v. *.) ... ufdc'/u, ittd

raiyat (n. a.) ... parjd rape (v. t.) ... pochodte do

rat (n. a.) ... kdfed

•ravine (n. i.) ... haui raw (adj.) ... berel

razor (n. i.) ... holad, hoioted

reach (v, t.) ... betd,seter,tebd

read (v. t.) ... parau

really (adv.) ... sdrige, sdrite

reap (v. t.) ... ir

receipt (n. i.) ... rasid receive (v. t.) ... ndm recognise (v. t.) ... neluntm reconcile (v. t.) ... juriurd, baiurd record (v. t.) ... ol recover (vi t.) ... ndmurd recover casto (v. t.). jdtiurd, jdti

rakab

recover conscious- ness (v. i.) ... tuti rectify (v. t.) ... jikurd,

buginurd

refuse (v. irreg.) ... kd refuse (n. i.) ... jobrd

refuse heap (n. i.)... dnbi register (n. i.) ... boi rejoice (v. imp.) ... rdvsd relate (v. t.) ... kdji

relation (n. a.) ... hdgd relay (n. •.) ... ddk

release; (v. t.) ... d

reliable (adj.) ... sdriolekd remain (v. t.) ... sare remain <|iiiot (v. ref.) /ia/<«/oo/ remember (v. t.) ... urntt remove (v. t.) ... idi remove an obstacle

(v. t.) ... da

render an account

, (v. t.) ... lekd dgu

rent (n. i.) ... panchd

repair (v. t.) ... baiurd repeat (v. t.) ... kdjiurd repent (v. imp.) ... hidting replough (v. t.) ... karai reprimand (v. t.) ... domkau reproduce (v. i.) ... gay, gavrd rescue (v. t.) ... danang,

banchau rescue from wild

animals (v. t.) ... hdrdu reservoir (n. i.) ... bdndd resin (n. i.) ... jair

rest (v. i.) ... ru

return (v. i.) ... rud, rudurd,

hujuurd

reveal (v. t.) ... udub

revenge (v. t.) ... halurd

reverse (v. t.) ... biur

reward (n. i.) ... bogti*

rheumatism (n. i.) ... bdt

rib (n. i.) ... sdejany, saijang

rice (n. i.) ... chauli

( uncooked ) ; mdn^i^ dundu ( cooked )

rice-beer (n. i.) ... dhinp, Hi

rich (adj.) ... munda

riddle (n. i.) ... kdni

ride (v. i.) ... de, lied

ridge (on top of

house) (n. i.) ... mual

ridge-pole (n. i.) ... mutitl

ridicule (v. t.)

Idndd

salnry (n. i.) ... K did

right (adj).

tik, bugi, biigin

sale (n. i.) ... nildrn

right (adj.)

etom, jom ti

saliva (n. i.) ... ulidd

ring (n. i.)

pold, mundam

salt (n. i.) ... bulung

ring (v. t.)

sari

salt-lick (n. i.) ... hdlw.ad

ringworm (n. i.) ...

kaprd

saltpetre (n. i.) ... sord

rinse the mouth

same (adj.) ... mid, midge

f (v. t.)

Imtum

sand (n. i.) ... yitil

ripen (v. i.)

jdrom, mdtd

sandals (n. i.) ... korom

rise (v. i.)

ol, tur, utd

(wooden) ; karpd ( leather )

river (n. i.)

yard

sandal wood (n. i.) ... chondon

road (n. i.)

fiord, sarap

sandfly (n. a.) ... pudki

roam (v. i.)

senbd

sap of a tree (n.i.)...( sosoi

roar (v. t.)

rumul, rda

satisfy (v. imp.) ... hdrob, suku '

roast (v. t.)

rapd

save (v. t.) ... danany,

rob (v. t.)

re

banchau

rock (n. i.)

hutub, sereng

saw (n. i.) ... koroto

roof (n. i.)

salandi

say (v. t.) ... kdji, men

room (v. i.)

od

say "no" (v. irreg.) . kd

root (n. i.)

red

say "yes" (v. t.) ... ed

rope (n. i.)

bair, pdgd, bor

scale of a fish (n. i.) hardd

rot (v. i.)

soed

scales for weighing

round (adj.)

tuli, duri, gol

(n. i.) ... tula

roundabout (adj.) ...

biur-biur,

scar (n. i.) ... gaured china

bankd-bankd

scarcity (n. i.) ... r'mgd

rub (v. t.)

ir

scatter (v. t.) ... nitir

rump (n. i.)

dubui

scissors (n. i.) ... lanatab

run (v. t.)

nir

school (n. i.) ... iskul-

run away (v. i.) ...

nir

scold (v. t.) ... domkau

rupee (n. i.)

tdkd

scorpion (n. a.) ... mdrmdr

rust (n. i.)

i

scowl (v. t.) ... kurkurte nel

scrape off (v. t.) ... husid

S.

(

scratch (v. t.) ... gotd, paskd

sabai grass( (n. i.) ...

badchom

scream (v. t.) ... iu

sack (n. i.)

gum, kurchu

screech (v. t.) ... iu

sacred grove (n.i.)...

jaier

screw (v. t:) ... choe

sacrifice (v. t.)

bongd, pujd

scrub (n. i.) ... tondang

sacrificer (n. a.)

diuri

scrub (v. t.) ... gasar

saxl (v. imp.)

hidting

scurf (n. i.) ... chitu

saddle (n. i.)

pdlan

scythe (n. i.) ... ddtdrom

sagar (n. i.)

sagi

sea (n. i.) ... dored

sal (n. i.)

sarjom

season (n. i.) ... dipli

seat (n. i.) secret (adj.) secrete ( v. t.) see (v. t.) seed (n. i.) seem (v. p.) seize (v. t.) seldom (adv.) selfish (adj.) sell (v. t.) sentence (v. t.) separate (adj.) separate (v. t.)o .., .servant (n. a.)

set'(v. i.)

set free (v. t.)

set silkworms'eggs

(v.t.) set silkworms or lac

(v. t.)

ilii/'tt <i

i/dini/iii

iikn

Ititd, lii'i-eted atkdi-o, iirln

mua

kd-t-nio

dkiriny

hukunt

tdnyd, cfd

bengd

ddsi, cliitnt,

ndldtani hasur da, bdye

1 ipan dnrd

settle a raiyat (v. t.) parjd dub

settlement (n. i.) ... mukd

seven (num.) ... aed, ae

sew (v. t.) ... yd

sexual intercourse ... do, jayar, juti, (v. t.) niifd

shade (n. k) ... umbul

shadow (n. i.) ... umbul

shafts (of a sagar)

(n. i.) . ... jdnyi, udrd

shake (v. i.) ... ruku

shake (v. t.) ... rukuichi

shake the head (mean- ing "yes") (v. t.) doro

shake the head (mean- ing "no") (v. t.) bo ruku

shallow (adj.) shame (v. imp.) share (v. t.) share (n. i.)

tembe, kd-ikir giu

hat in y

ha nd tiny, itad, bay

sharp (adj.) sharpen (v. t.) shava (v. t.) shed for cattle (n. i.) shed the skin (v. i.) sheep (n. a.) shell (n. i.) shelter (v. t.) shin (n. i.) .shine (v. t.) shiver (v. i.) shoe (n. i.) shoot (i. e. plants)

(v. t.)

shoot (v. t.) shop (n. i) shore (n. i.) short (adj.) short-sighted (adj.) shoulder (n. i.) shove (v. t.) show (v. t.) shrewd (adj.) shrivel up (v. i.) ... shudder (v. i.) shut (v. t.) shut the eye(v. t.)... shuttle (n. i.) shy (v. imp.) sick (v. imp.) sickle (n. i.) side (n. i.) sieve (n. i.) sift (v. t.) sigh (v. t.) sign (n. i.) sign (v. t.) signal (n. i.) signature (n. i.) sikhd-bltanyd (n. i.)... silent (adj.) silk (n. i.)

leser

leter

hoio

gond

utrdo

i n'l n di

iK-iidii

il'iiKtiif/, l"inchait

kurchukdtd

maskal, /»/

ruku

karpd

onion

fore, tote, tu'my

dokdn

kuti

huriny, tumbrub

dumdnld

taran

udur

udub

chutur

yoso

yisir

handed

japid

donyi

yiu

lidtu

ddtdr<»n

hiti

chd^d

chdh'i.

su

china

mi

cliind

sui

sikiir-bair lutpd lunyam, luyam

( 142 )

silkworm (n. a.) ... silt (n. i.) silver (n. i.) similar (adj.) simple (adj.) sin (n. i.) since (post.) sing (v. t.) sink (v. i.) sip (v. t.) sirgujd (n. i.) sister (n. a.)

sister-in-law (n. a.).. tevdkui, sit (v. i.)

sit astride (v. i.) .. sit on eggs (v. t.) .. sit on the haunches

(v. i.) six (num.) skin (n. i.) skin (v. t) skip (v. t.) skull (n. i.) sky (n. i.) slap (v. t.) sleep (v. i.) .. sleep on the back

(v. i.) sleep on the side

(v. i.) sleep on the stomach

(v. i.) slide (v. i.) slightly raised

(adj.) slip (v. i.) slipknot (n. i.) slippery (adj.) slowly (adv.) sly (adj.)

lungam chidu

smack (v.t.) ... taping

tobrd, gitil

small (adj.) ... huring

, rupd

small-pox (n. i.) ... mdri

, lekd

smart (v. imp.) ... wsur

siddsddd

smell (v. t.) ... soan,ji

chird, dos

smile (v. t.) ... germoing

ete

smite the breast

, durang

(v. t.) ... tdping

. cJidru

smoke (n. i.) ... sukul

, chereb

smoke (v. t.) ... sukul sib

rdmtid, gunjd

snail (n. a.) ... gendd

dji, mm, misierd^

snake (n a.) ... bing

undikui

snap the fingers

. djihandr,

(v.t.) ... teb

kimin, iril, hilt

snap up with the

. dub

fingers (v. t.) ... tin

. de, lied

snatch away (v. t.).. re

. abdrum

sneeze (v. t.) ... acliu

sniff (v. t.) ... so?%

. chuchungur

snipe (n. a.) ... kedbatd, kebatd

. turuid, turui

snore (v. t.) ... hutir

. wpr, liartd

soap (n. i.) ... sdbon

. pord

sob (v. t.) ... kusud

. ui

soft (adj.) ... lebe, norom

. bojang

softly (adv.) ... sudete

. rimil

soft water (n. i.) ... etang dd

. chaprd

soil (n. i.) ... hdsd

. giti

sole of the foot ... kdtd-talkd,

(n. i.) kdtd-rdmd

. sandangte giti

solid (adj.) ... kete

so many (adj.) ... imin

. sutdte giti

some (adj.) ... huringlekd,

tdrdmdrd

. oborte giti

somehow (adv.) ... jdlekdte

. jil

sometimes (adv.) ... misd misd

so much (adv.) ... iminang

. dipd

son (n. a.) ... Aon, kodhon

.JH

song (n. i.) ... durang

. on&lbdvsi

( ' wedding song ' is called dong

. jijil

and ' comic song' lagri durang ;

. maite, sudete

both these having been taken

. chutur

from the Santalg.)

( 143 )

son-iii-la\v (n. a.) ... MH.II (;nlv.) (ji. i.)

«>rry (v. imp.) sort (v. t.) sound (v. t.) soup (n. i.) sour (adj.) south (n. i.) sow (v. t.) sowi.in; <eason (n. i.) spade (n. i.) span (n. i.) * ... spark (n. i.) sparrow (n. a.) 'spear (n. i.) speak (v. t.) speak falsely (v. t.).. spices (n. i.) spider (n. a.) spider's web (n. i.)... spill (v. t.) spin (v. t.) spine (n. i.) spinning-wheel (n.i.) spit (v. t.) spleen (n. i.) split bamboo (n.i.)... split into two parts

(v. t.) spoil (v. t.) spoon (n. i.) sprain (v. t.) spread a bed (v.t.)... spread a mat (v.t.)... spread a table (v. t.) spread grain out

(v.t.)

spread stones (V. t.).. spread straw (v. t.)..

spread the legs apart (v. t.)

nr<i

ring (n. i.)

pnldtl'i

lin/'it'1, /'<>,/<•

.-pring (v. t.)

'."'"

sprinkle (v. t.)

l/ii-' lii

Itidtintf

sprout (v. i.)

omon

tdnffd

spur (n. i.)

r/n7yu(natural);

siiri

kdti (artificial)

rax/'

squeeze out with the

./'!/"

hand (v. t.)

cAt/xi

bokanduki

squint (n. i.)

kdse med.

her

korche med

r<»ii, hero

squirrel (n. a.)

tu

ki/dlatn

stab (v. t.)

sobo

bifii

stagger (v. i.)

dampd-dumpu

I'tc'

stand (v. i.)

tingu

detfem

stand abuse (v. t.)...

sdngi

bar did, barchi

star (n. a.)

ipil

kdji, men

start (v. t.)

ete

chakad

startle (v. t.)

birkaiif boroichi

mosld

starve (v. t.)

uu

bindirdm

statement (n. i.) ...

kdji

jdlom

stay (v. i.)

tdngiy tain

endd

steal (v. t.)

kumbu

tdkiti

steam (n. i.)

oiong

sindurijang

steep slope (n. i.) ...

andgu, anddu,

rent a

ranakab

be

step-brother (n. a.). .

bauu, undi

pild

step-daughter (n. a.).

honerd

bdtd

step-father (n. a.) ...

kdkd

step-mother (n. a.)...

gauing

chdfd

step-sister (n. a.) ...

dji, mi si,

efkd

_

niiaii'rd, undikui

hi nd i

step-son (n. a.)

housed,

lotoe

'honherel

bil

stick (n. i.)

dand'i

ated

stick (v. t.)

j"d, jer

bil

stiff (adj.)

kete

still (conj.)

enreo, iminreo

tdsi

still-born (adj.)

goete jonomlen

ated

sting (v. t.)

tu

ated

sting (n. i.)

tunu

stir (v. t.)

hondd

tdndd

stomach (n. i.)

laii

( 144 )

stone (n. i.)

diri, liutub,

sudden (adj.)

dchakd

sereng

suddenly (adv.)

dchakdte

stool (n. i.)

gdndu, machild

sue (v. t.)

ndlis

gdndu

suffer (v. i.)

sating

stoop (v. t.)

tirub

sufficient (adj.)

Idli, jokd

stop (v. t.)

ddrom, kesed

sugar fn. i.)

chini

stop temporarily, e. g.

sugarcane (n. i.) ...

gur-dandd

on a journey (v. t.)

... derd

suicide (v. ref.)

goen

stork (n. a.)

genddri

sulphur (n. i.)

gondo

storm (n. i.)

hoio

sun (n. a.)

singi

story (n., i.)

kdji, kdni

sunbeam (n. i.)

turtunp

stout (adj.)

kiri, kete^pean

sunshine (n. i.)

jete f

straight (adj.)

muli

support (v. t.)

asul, dubumbul,

strain (v. t.)

iting, chdld

sambarau

strange (adj.)

dkadandd

support (physically)

strangle (v. t.)

limbud

(v. t.)

turub

straw (n. i.)

busu, bdbdsing

surprise (v. t.)

dkachakd

stray (v. p.) ...

ado

surround (v. t.)

jurbiur

stream (n. i.)

hongard

survey (n. i.)

mukd

stretch the legs (v.t.).

cliundld

suspect (v. t.)

dnden

stride (n. i.)

cJiandang

swallow (v. t.)

ud

strike (v. t.)

tdm

swamp (n. i.)

jagdd

strike against (v. t.).

to

swan (n. a.)

honso

strike with a spade

swarm of bees (n. i.)

jur

(v.t.)

kordm

swear (v.t.)

sard

strike with the paw

sweat (n. i.)

balbal-dd

(v.t.)

tegd

sweep (v. t.)

joo

string (n. i.)

bair, pdgd

sweet (adj.)

nogbd, sibil

string of a bow (n.i.).

hatual

sweetmeats (n. i.) ...

metal

string of a fiddle(n.i.)

bale

sweet potato (n. i.)...

sdngd

striped (adj.)

onol

swell (v. i.)

mo

strong (adj.)

pean, kete

swell out the cheeks

strong (v. p.)

peo

(v.t.) . ...

kope

stumble ((v. i.)

tumbid

swim (v. t.)

oiar

stump (n. i.)

butd

swing (v. t.)

ddngdung

stupid (adj.)

dondo

sword (n. i.)

torai

submerge (v. t.) ...

topd

subsequently (adv.)..

taiomte,

*

taiomre

table (n. i.)

mej

'succour (v. t.)

dengd

tail (n. i.)

chadlom

suck (v. t.)

cheped

tailless (adj.)

band id

suckle (v. t.)

nunuai

take (v. t.)

idi

( 145 )

take can- ( inter.) ... hike earo of (v. t.)... tako eliai'iM- ol' (v. t.) take down (v. t.) ... tako hold (v.t.)... take otV clothes (v.t.) take oil' a dhoti or

/' (v. t.)

take olV tin- iiro(v. t.) take out (v. t.) tako ou^ of the

ground (y. t.) tako out with 4he

nand (v. t.) take shelter (v. t.)... •take" shelter from

rain (v. i.) take up by the roots

(v.t.)' tale (n. i.) tall (adj.) tamarind (n. i.) tame (v. t.) tamo (adj.) tank (n. i.) Tdnti (n. a.) tar (n. i.) taste (v. t./ tattoo (v. t.) teach (v. t.) tear (v. t.) tear into pieces (v. t.) tear with teeth (v. t.) tears (n. i.) tell (v. t.) tempt (v. t.) ten (num.) tent (n. i.)

tepid (adj.) terraced lowland (n. i.)

Ul'hd, IH'liO

terraced upland

MtUtbd

(n. i.) ... y/, km"! i

,/,if,'i,,

testicle (n. i.) ... ]>efo

ml"

than (conj.)

wlA

that (pron. & adj.)... <'/<a, en

tv4

thatch (n. i.) ... saiu

thatch (v. t.) ... saiu </"/

nin, tntit

Thaterd (n. a.) ... Tintri

ml

then (adv.) ... enany, ente

O/, ondoilil

therefore (conj.) ... nedmente,

nedlayite, endmente, endlagite

tud

thick (adj.) ... gold, ibil

thief (n. a.) ... kumbu

din

thigh (n. i.) ... bulu

danang

thin (adj.) ... etang, usu,

batari

sur

thing (n. i.) ... girds

think (v. t.) ... atkdr

tub

thirsty (v. imp.) ... tetang

kdji, kdni

this (pron. & adj.)... ned, ne

salanyi

thorn (n. i.) ... janum

j°jo

thread (n. i.) ... sutam

asul

threaten (v. t.) ... domkau

odren, hdturen

three (num.) ... apid, ape

jntkuri

thresh (v. t.) ... en

Penain

threshing-floor (n. i.) kolom

alkatrd

throat (n. i.) ... ututod, ututud

chakd

throw (v. t.) ... hurldj hitdmd,

kodd

ter

eto

throw away (v. t.)... endd

i-harhd, oe

thrust (v. t.) ... hot or, ruung

keclid

thumb (n. i.) ... engd-ddro

rere

thumb impression ... mailing gdndate

med-dd

(n. i.) arJka, tip

kdji

thunder (n. a.) ... rimil-sdri

birau

thunderbolt (n. i.)... ter

geled, gel

tick (n. a.) ... tiki

lijdred od,

tickle (v. t.) ... gamang

tambuod

ticklish (v. imp.) ... gamang

urgum

tie (v. t.) ... tol

tie tightly (v. t.) ... urui

tdl

tiger (n. a.) ... htld

( 146 )

tighten (v. t.)

til (n. i,)

tile (v. t.)

tiles (n. i.)

time (n. i.)

tip (n. i.)

tired (v. imp.)

tobacco (n. i.)

today (adv.)

toe (n. i.)

toenail (n. i.)

together (adv.)

tomorrow (adv.) ...

tongue (n. i.)

too (adv.)

tooth (n. i.) toothbrush (n. i.) ... top (n. i.) tortoise (n. a.) tortuous (adj.) touch (v. t.) transfer lac from

tree to tree (v.t.) transplant (v. t.) ... trap (n. i.) tread (v. t.) tree (n. i.) tremble (v. i.) tribe (n. i.) troop (n. i.) trouble (n. i.) true (^adj.^ truly (adv.) trunk of a tree (n. i.) trust (v. i.) try a case (v. t.) ... try a purchase (v.t/) tumble down (v. i.).. turban (n. i.) turmeric (n. i.) turn out (v. t.)

iting

tilming .

keclw dal

keclw

dipli

chutkde

Idyd

S"kul

tisiny

gdnda <

sarsar

midre

gapd

Ife, alang

ofused as a

suffix) data karkad

chetan, chut Me lioro

biur-biiir jut id, feed

jan rod

jdlom, arau tega ddru ruku kili guti duku sdri

sdrige, sdrite butd sdri dorbdr nelatkdr hdndi bent a sasang hdrol

turn round (v. t.) ... biur twilight (n. i.) ... mir-mir twin children (n. a.) jimki honking twist (v. t.) ... choe, mi

twist the tail (v. t.) pere two (numf) ... bdrid, bdr

u

ugly (v. i) umbrolla (n. i.) .< . unanimously (adv.) unboiled (adj.) uncle (n. a.)

unclean (adj.) under (adv.) understand (v. t.) ... undress (v. t.) unexpected (adj.) ... unexpectedly (adv.). unhusked rice (n.i,). unmarried (adj.) ... unrefined sugar

(n- i.)

untie (v. t.) until (adv.) untrue (adj.) unwilling (v. irreg.). unwrap cocoons (v.t.) upland, i. e. unter-

raced cultivated

land (n. i.) upper arm (n. i.) ... upper garment (n.i.) uproot (v. t.) upset (v. t.) up to (adv.) urid (n. i.) urine (n. i.)

etkff nelo chdtom midre, midte adod dpo, kdkd,

kumd, mdmd bisi

Idtarre, subdre bujaut samjau tud

dchakd dchakdte bdbd dindd

gur

rd<-

chimin jdke.d

chakad

kd

bor

gord ote

supu

sutui

rub

ultd

jokd

ranibd

duki

( 147 )

V.

water channel (n.

i.) dd-hord, ot»1,

ind> i'i

vaccination in. i.)..

tiled

\ ' valley m. i.^

sokod

waterfall (n. i.)

... tdyi, dul-dd

value (n. i.) valuable (adj.) various (adj.)

gonong gonongan < t<i >•>'{, kilimili

watcrsnako (n. a.) wave (n. i.)

... sakombing,

dundnl'iiui ... fhtfl

•table ( n. i.) ...

dd

wax (n. i.)

... tit utul

vein (n. i.)

sir

weave (v. t.)

... tenq

verandah (n. i.) very (adv.)

pindigi isu

weaver (n. a.) fredding song (n.

... penaiti

i.) d o)i ;t

very many (adj.) ... village (n. i.)

isu purd, sdngi hdtu

weed (v. t.) weeds (n. i.)

... lied ... dumbu

V >

village priest (n. a.)

diuri

week (n. i.)

... hdt

vineyard (n. i.)

ddk-bakai

well (adj. & v. i. )

... I'ugi. bugin

yiolonce (n. i.)

pochod .

well (adv.)

. . . bugite

visible (v. i.)

nelo

well (n. i.)

... sud, chud

\ /

voluntarily (adv.)...

snkntf

wellknown (v. i.)

... uai, umi

vomit (v. t.)

uld

west (n. i.)

... singihasur

\ /

vulture (n. a.^

didi

wet (adj.)

... odad, Inm

vulva (n. i.)

ruji

what (pron.)

... okond,

chikand

what (adj.)

... okon, rhikan

wheat (n. i.)

... gom

wages (n. i.)

ndld

wheel (n i.)

. . . sagi

waist (n. i.)

mdeang

when (adv.)

... choild^ chuild

wait (v. i.)

tdngi, tain

where (adv.)

... okonre, okonte,

wait for (v. t.)

tdngi

okonpdre

wake (v. i.)

ntd

whip (v. t.)

... hdnsd

wake (v. t.)

utdichi

whirlwind (n. a.)

. . . horlosi

walk (v. i)

sen, seno

whisper (v. t.)

... tided, liaiam

wall (n. i.)

ginil

whistle (v. i.)

... gole

want (n. i.)

ringd

white (adj.)

... fundi

want (v. t.)

asi

white ant (n. a.)

. . . nidir

warm (adj.)

urgitm

white louce (n.a.)

... lijd$iku

warm at a fire (v. t.)

jirub

whitewash (v. t.)

... jod

wash clothes (v. t.)

itkid

who (pron.)

. . . okoe

wash hands, face

whole (adj.)

... saben

or feet (v. t.)

abung

whole day (n. i.)

... singi satub

wasp (n. a.)

surpang

why (adv.)

... chikanred)

waste (adj.)

parid

cliikandmente,

chikand lagite

watch (v. t.)

loro, horo

wicked (adj.)

... etkd

water (n. i.)

dd

widow (n. a.)

... rdndi-erd

( 148 )

wife (n. a.)

era

womb (n. i.)

. . laii

wild (adj.)

birren

wonderful (adj.) .

.. dkadandd

wild dog,(n. a.) ...

tani

wood (n. i.)

., sdn

wild duck (n. a.) ...

hedeyele

wooden post (n. i.).

.. kuntd

willing (v. i.)

suku

word (n. i.)

. . kdji

wind (n. a.)

hoio

work (v. t.)

.. pain

winding (adj.)

biur-biur

worm (n. a.)

.. chidu

window (n. i.)

kirki

worship (v. t.)

.. bonyd, pujd

wine (n. i.)

ddkrdsi

wound (v. t.)

.. gau

wing (n. i.)

dparob <

wrap (v. t.)

.. tol

wink (v. t.)

rapid

wrestle (v. t.)

.. tdbd

r

winnow (v. t.)

atur, guni) keto

wrong (adj.)

.. etkd

winnowing basket

<

(n. i.)

hat a

y.

c

wipe (v. t.)

jod

yarn (n. i.)

.. sutam, sdnr/d

wish (v. i.)

sanang

year (n. i.)

sirmd

witch (n. a.)

baiaddni,

year after next

ddnri era

(n. i.)

. . tor kdlom

witch-doctor (n. a.)

deortd, sokd

yellow (adj.)

.. sasanglekd

witness (n. a.)

gaud

yes (inter.)

.. ed

without rhyme or

yesterday (adv.) .

.. hold

reason (adv.)

sdmdte

yet (adv.)

. . enreo

without a tail (adj.)

band id

yoke (n. i.)

. . dnr

wizard (n. a.)

baiaddni, dd&ri

young (adj.)

.. bale, seped

wolf (n. a.)

mindi-kuld

young man (n. a.).,

..seped

woman (n. a.)

erd, kui

young woman (n. a,

) Jiapdnum

HO-ENGLISH.

VOCABULARY.

.in (r. t.) to sit on eggs afniinj (v. t.)... to wash the hands,

feet or face. Sometimes used

also for the whole body. acluill, aldii- a stick with a sharp

dandd (*.?'.) iron point used for

prodding cattle achu*(v. t.) ... to sneeze ad (r. t.) ... to lose adkir\r. t.}... to carry away, carry

off, abduct

ado (r. p.) ... to stray, be lost adod (adj.) ... unboiled a<?d, ae (num.) seven aiub (n. i.) ... evening aiubo(v. p.)... to be benighted aiunt (v. £.)... to hear, listen alany (n. i.)... the tongue alkatrd (n. i.) tar ambari (n. i.) epilepsy awnd-s amna

(adv.) .t. face to face anddu (n. i.) an entrance ddu (n. i.) i dyu (n. i.) / and l<l (//.«.)... a bull aw? (n. i.) ... dawn anyo ipii (n. a.) morning star anjidi(v. t.)... to join the hands to-

gether to drink water or measure

rice. Mi anjuli chauli-a handful

of rice anka (n. i.) ... mark, e. y. on docu-

ments, made by illiterate persons.

Marany gdnddte anka thumb

impression.

anddu (n. i.) i a steep downward andyu (n. i.) / slope

avpd (v. t.) ... to breach an embank- ment

apuf,a/w (num.) three arau (n. i.) ... the peculiar trap set by professional bdgmdrcu for big frame. One thread is set across

O

a path frequented by the animal and, as soon as he touches it, a large poisoned arrow is dis- charged into his side. Another thread is placed across the path in front of the first one ; it is about the height of a man's chest and discharges the arrow harm- lessly if a man should chance along

ard, (adj.) ... red area,are (num.) nine aril (n. a.) ... hail arki (n. i.) ... country spirit, ddru arkid (v. t.)... to carry away, carry

off, abduct

arti diri (n. i.) a crystal, glass asi (v. t.) ... to ask, want asul (r. t.) ... to support, maintain,

tame

asulhdrd (v. t.) to adopt atd (v. t.) ... to fry

atur (v. t.) ... to winnow (with the hands only, the grain falling on the floor)

ated (v. t.) ... to spread straw on a mat ; to spread stones on an embankment to prevent erosion atkdr (v. t.) to feel, think, guess atkdro (v. p.) to seem, appear atkdrte (adv.) approximately

( 150 )

auri (adv.) ... not yet auu (v. t.) ... to belch

1

d (n. i.) ... mouth, bill

da (v. t.) ... to set free, to acquit,

discharge ; to remove an obstacle daean koidi

(n. a.) ... a released convict dandi (v. t.)... to marry dd (n. i.) ... mustard ddjang (n. i.) . a vegetable achakd (adj.).. sudden, unexpected dchakdte (adv.) suddenly, by chance,

by accident dchu (v. t.) ... toemploy, engage for

any work

add (n. i.) ... ginger ddd (v. t.) ... to know dddkete (adv.') knowingly,

intentionally dder (v. t.) .. to put, bring inside,

to drive in (je. y. cattle) dding (n.i.)... the inner room of a

house where food is cooked

and comparatively privato. Also

supposed to be the abode of the

ancestral spirits. ddu (u. t.) ... to lower, lessen ddun (c. ref.) to descend tier (v. t.) ... to precede derre, der i e

(adv.) ... before, in front of

Aerre also = in future dgu (v. t.) ... to bring dgu (v. t.) ... to lower, lessen dgun (v. ref.) to descend dji (n. a.) ... elder sister djom (v. t.) ... to feed, put in the

mouth dkachakd (v.t.) to astonish, amaze,

surprise

dkadandd(adj .) wonderful, mysteri- ous, strange

dkid (n. i.) ... the chin

dkiring (v. t.) . to sell

dmbdrob (n. a ) an orphan

dmin (r..t.) ... to clear forest

dn (adj.) ... mouthed. E.g.,

huring dn chdtu a small-mouthed vessel

dnden (v. t.)... to suspect

dndu (n. i.) ,. an anklet

dnjd (adj.) ... quick

dnjdte (adv.) . quickly, soon

dnjed (v. t.)... to dry up

and (n. i.) ... an anna %

(v. t.) ... to yoke (v. t.) ... to set silkworms or lac

dnrd (n. i.) ... used collectively of. the number of trees leased by one man to set silkworms or lac on

dnrdpai (n. a.) group of d»ra-takers

dyri (n. a.) ... the man who per- forms the sacrifices aud does the pujd for the dprd-takers

dpri (n. t.) ... an embankment

dnr u r i k o

(n. a.^ ... plough-cr.ttle

dparol) (n. i.) a wing

dpir '^v. i.) ... to fly

dpo (n. a.) ... paternal uncle (younger than father)

dpu (n. a.) ... father

drd (n. a.) ... son-in-law ; younger sister's husband

are (v. t.) ... to irrigate by lifting water in baskets

drid (v. t.) ... to open the eye

dsar (n. i.) ... a bow

dtar (v. t.) ... to burn

dtdgom (v. t.) . to level paddy after reploughing

i'lr.) ... orally, by word of

mouth, verbally dliini (r. t.) ... to grazo atom (r! t.) ... to move, put out of

tin- way

dtonit'ii (v. ref.) to got out of the way dtn (v. t.) ... to carry awuy (used

only of flowing water, < '.</. a

river) dfii (n. t.) ... birdlimo which,

among the Hos, consists of the

juice of the pipal and bar trees

mixed with oil and applied to

bamboos

B.

babatd(v. imp.) to itch

bctdchom (n. i.) sabai grass

but ddru (n. i.) a bor tree

bai (v. t.) ... to make, prepare,

arrange ; to compromise, agree baiaddui (n.a.) n wizard, witch baid (adj.} ... mad (used of men

only) baidd merom

(n. a.) ... a castrated goat bain (v. ref.)... to pretend baivchd (n. it) a form of mortgage

the same as tikd q. v. bair (n.i.) ... rope, string bairi (n. a.) ... an enemy, adversary biiurd (v. t.)... to repair, reconcile bakai (n. i.) ... a fence ; hence that

which is surrounded by a fence,

i. e. a garden or homestead land bakrd d dru

(n. i.) ... bair or plum tree balbal {V. imp.) to perspire, sweat balbal-dd (n. i.) perspiration, sweat bale (n. i.'~ ... the string of a fiddle bamal (adj.) lost Bamal sddom,

the lost horse

< (K.'i.) . a lirahmin

(n. i.) a fiddle with one string hanam d s ar

(n. i.) ... the bow of a fnl.Uo Ixitirhuii (r. (.) to ipe,

protect, .shelter

bandar (n. »'.) a form of mortgage in which principal is repayable, interest being realized by usu- fruct b and o b a 1 1

(v. t.) ... to arrange banddri (n. a.) a barber bandi (v. t.)... to break into pieces

with the hands bankd (adj.) crooked bapai (v. rec.) to be on good terms bapdri (inter.) alas bapdrigore

(inter.) ... alas baram (n. a.) a dwarf ttaram (n. a.) one of the Ho dieties who cures diseases of men and cattle. Is supposed to be very small

barandi (n. a.) a barber bardbari .(adj.) level, equal barchd (n. i.) .. a spear barki lijd (n. i.) a thick cloth used

in the cold weather basany (v. t.) to boil water batari (adj.) thin, narrow ban (v. i.) ... to be mouldy bauu (n. a.)... elder brother t>aun hone d r

(n. a.} ... wife's older b'rother bd (n. i.) ... a flower bdbd (n. i) ... paddy, unhusked nY bdbdsiny (n. i.) straw

bdduri (n. a.) a flying-fox bdg (n. i.) ... a share, portion

( 152 )

bdge (v. t.) ... to leave, dismiss ; to acquit, discharge ; to cease

bald (n. a.}... the father of one's son-in-law

bdld-bdlu (adj) mad (used of animals only)

bdldjigi (n. z.) a form of mortgage in which one man uses his own cattle, implements and labour

to cultivate another man's land

»

and takes half the crop in return.

Known elsewhere as bhdg or sdjhd bdldsdkd (n. a.) the relations of one's

wife, married sister or mother bale (adj.) ... early, young. Bale

hon, a babe or infant ; bale sakam,

early leaves bdn (n. i.) ... a flood band (n. a.)... a bear bdndd (n. i.) .. a bdndh or irriga- tion reservoir bdndi (n. z.)... an indeterminate

measure of weight, generally

about ten maunds bdndia {adj.") tailless bdnji (n. a.), a barren woman bdnsi (n.i.)... a fish hook bdpal (v.t.). to burn straw, etc.,

on land in order to fertilize it bdpold (v. t.). to make preliminary

arrangements for a marriage bar (n. z.) ... a day bdrre, l^drte

(adv.} ... outside bdri (n.i.) ... load carried on a

sikhd-bhangd bdrid, bar (num.) two bdrom (n. i.) baggage lbdru ddru

(n. t) ... kusum tree from

which the best lac is procured bdsi (adj.) ... stale

bdt (n. i.) ... rheumatism

bdtd (n. i.) ... a split bamboo

be (v. t.) .... to spit

bengd (v.t.)... to separate

bentd (n. i.) ... a pagri or turban

berel (adj.) ... raw

besrd (n. a.) a hawk

betar, betarang

(n. i.) ... a day

bi (v. t.) ... to fill the stomach ; to eat as much as one can

bichd diri (n.i.) iron ore

bid (v. t.) ... to put in the ground

bil (v. t.) ... to spread, e.g. a ?oed or a table.

bilai (n. a.) ... a cat

bill (n. i.) ... an egg

bind\ d d r u

(n. i.) ... castor oil tree

bindirdm (n.a.) a spider

bing (n.a.) ... a snake

bir (n. i.) ... forest, jungle

bird (n. i.) ... a big bundle of paddy

birau (v.t.) ... to threaten

birjilu (n. a.) a deer

birkau (v. t.) to frighten, startle, surprise. Conveys gm idea of suddenness followed by con- fusion.

birkerd (n. a.) a bison

birren (adj.) wild

birsim (n. a.) a jungle fowl

bisi (adj.) ... unclean (morally)

bisi (n. i.) ... the poison of snakes. Bisian bing a poisonous snake

bisid (n.i.)... a measure of weight equal to about twenty seers

bitdrre, bitdrte

(adj.) ... inside

bitd (n. i.) ... a span

bitkil (n. a.) a female buffalo

( 153 )

blur (r. f.) ... to turn round, to

rev i

b<> (n, i.) ... the head r (/•. int}>.) to "be giddy

merom

(n. a.) ... an uncastrated goat /'<></> (ndr.) ... soon, quickly

(/'./'.) reward

boi (n. i.) ... a book, register bojiinti (n. i.) . the skull bolo (v.i.) ... to enter, come in

n.*tt.) . an evil spirit, a devil d (r. /.) . . to'worship, sacrifice

to have nightmare a bridegroom rope made of straw to unwrap silk

otd

(v. t.) ...

*bor (n. a.) .

bor (n. i.) .

bor (r. t.) .

cocoons

bora dd (». i.) muddy water bordno dd

(n. i.) ... slightly muddy water borkod (n. i.) the lungs lioro (r. t.) ... to fear boroichi. (r. t.) to frighten, startle borsd (n. i.) . . courage, bravery bo rnku (v. t.) to shake the head

meaning " no " botoe (n. i.)... a loincloth bit (r. t.) ... to bark; to bore, make a hole in the wall of a house or through anything bvgi, bit gin

(adj.) ... good, right, honest buffi* nelo

(adj.) ... beautiful Imyite (adr.). . well

. drunken . to be drunk . the thigh . salt tiionl'uri (n. i.) measles

In/1 (ailj.) Indo (r. 7*.) lndt( (/i. i.)

/>ii i, ,iu (/<. t.) . a gun

bin/inn (n. i.) an ant-hill, i.e. the

heaps seen commonly on roads

which are- not used much Imrd (r. t.) ... to dravy water vessel

in hand

t (<«lj.) ... old (used with

females only)

(n. i.} ... a hill, mountain */• // r u-b ing

(n. a.) ... a python burum (r. i.) to lie down (used

of animals only) busu (n. i.) . . . straw Imtd (n.i.) ... the trunk of a tree,

a stump butt (n. i.) ... the navel

Ch.

chachd (v. t.) . to tear

cliadlom (n. i.) a tail

chakad (adj.) false, deceitful,

untrue

chakd {v. £.)... to taste chalaibd diri

(n. i.) ... the stone used by a

witch doctor to discover the evil

spirit responsible for any

calamity chalpd (n. i.) box in which a dead

body is buried chanab (n. i.) the end chandang *

(n. i.) ... a pace, a stride changd (v. t.) to pluck maize cobs changdel (adj.) bald .

chapal (n. i.) the hip chaprd (r. t.) to slap. Tdping

dutprd to clap the hands <-/t(tndi (n. i.) a boundary I'ltmili (n. }.) husked rice i-hdb (r. f.} ... to open the mouth

( 154 )

chdbd (r. t.) to finish, end

chdbi (n. i.)... a key

chdld (c. t.)... to strain, sift

chdlu (r. t.)... to hoe

chdndu (n. a.) the moon, a month

chdpal (v. t.) to pass from hand to hand

e/i.ap (r. £.)... to clean with water

chdrd (n. i.) an edible, a plant

chdri (n. ?'.)... the twig used to join the folds of a leaf-cup

rhdru (r. /.)... to sink

chdtd (t\ /.) to split into two

c h d t dak an

(adj.) ... cloven

rlnitom (n. i.) an umbrella

chdtom (v. i.) to float

chdtu (n. i.). . an earthen waterpot

<7wZ (n. i.) ... a wave

r h e n t d

(v. imp.}. . to be jealous?

cheped (y. t.) to suck

cfore (arf/.) ... bald

chereb (r. £.). . to kiss ; to sip

chetanre, chetante (post) on, over

chi (eon.).) ... or. Also used as the Interrogative Particle

cJriad, chiang

(part.') ... used at the end of a sentence to express uncertainty as to a preceding statement of fact. Chimad and derang are similarly used

chid A (n. ?'.)... a rag or rags

chidu (ni a.)... a worm, insect, cater- pillar, maggot

l7r // i k a n d

^ (pron.~) ... what

chikandlagite\

chikandmente\(adc.*) ... why

chikanred

chilgu(n.i.)... the natural spur of

a cock

chilekd (adr.*) how chimad (part.) used like chiad, 7. '•• ehirtd (n.i.)... a boundary chimin(adj)... how many c h i m i n a n g

(adj.) ... how much chimin jdked

(adr.} ... until c h i m t a n g ,

(adv.) ... at what tim'o, when rhind (11. i.)... a mar^, sign, signal chindibd (n. i.) hair ornament chipd (c.t.) ... to squeeze out with

the hand as, e. g. rice beer chipud (n. i.) . the fist chird (r. t.) ... to accuse, blame ; to

criticize ; to owe

chirgal (v. t.) to know by instinct chitki (n.i.)... plate made of leaves chitrd(n.a.)... a servant who works

for daily wages, but is engaged

for a more or less long period chitri (n. a.)... a partridge chitti b i n g

(n. a.) ... a korait or any

marked snake °

eldtu (n.i.) ... scurf cJioe (v, t.) ... to screw, twist the

ears

choild (adv.). . when choke (n. a.). . a frog cholke (n. i.). . a pickaxe chondon (n. i.) sandalwood ^ chu (v. t.) ... to pick with the

hand ; to take out with the hand chud (n. i.) ... a temporary well dug

in the soil chiichungur

(i\ i.) ... to sit on the haunches chitild (adi\) when

( 155 )

kili (n. i.}. a small plain made of leave- in which vegetables or QOndimentfl are placed, the prin- cipal edible being placed on a kalgi •di (//. it.) a musk rat

[n. i.) limestone .•Inui.ll,! (r. f.) to stretch the legs

(/•. t.) to point out n (n. i). . a small fence : a gabion round seedlings

i. i.) top, tip, peak, point ; the brim of ft vessel (n. a.), a mouse ••I'liht (//./.)... a triangular head- piece made of leaves and worn while working in the rain i-hntnr (adj.) .. cunning, shrewd, sly

D.

ilai (r. irrcy) to be able, can,

possible.

dai (n. a.) ... a midwife dakal d gu

(r. t.) ... to be in possession d a Ik i gi til

(n. i.) * ... quicksand dambau (n. i.) custard apple dampci-dnmpu

(r. i.) ... to stagger danany (v. t.) to protect, shelter,

save, rescue danany {adj.). secret danangre(adv») behind (some opaque

physical object) ilnndd (n. i.). a stick, lathi fanddkuld

(n. a.) ... a hyaena dapdrom (r.

rcc.) ... to meet together darcha (n. i.) a beard

dii (n. j.) (n. i.)

i (r. t.)

,1,11-k-is (//. i.) a petition ,/, is/in- (n. i.) custom da» tur le kd

according to custom

water

second crop of silk

cocoons

to claim ,

dd-hoio (n. i.) climate <ld-ltt»'d (it. i.) a water channel ddk (n. i.) ... a relay ildkd (n. i.)... honeycomb, hive d d k ~ b a k a i

(n. i.) ... a vineyard /<.>•/ (/i. i.) wine

(r. t.)... to commit dacoity It («. i.) ... raw ddl ddnde (v. t.)... to fine ddngdung

(v.t.) ... to swing fjdnri (ti. a.) a wizard d anri era

(n. a.) ... a witch ddrd (r. t.) ... to move near ddro (n. i.) ... the finger ddrom (f. t.).. to meet, stop ddru (n. i.) ... a tree tldrn pdrd bakai

(n. i.) ... a tree nursery itdfi (n. a.) ... a servant who lives

in the house ddtd (n. i.) ... a tooth ddtdrnnt (n. i.) a sickle, scythe ddtaromjang

(n. i.) ... the collar bone de (r. I.) ... to climb a 'tree,

ride

dedem (n. a.), a sparrow 9

dcll'dfid (//. /.) paddy which ripens,

and is cut first of all <f,n;id (r. t.)... to help, assist, succour

( 156 )

dec (v. t.) ... to catch the breath, hiccough. Used also of the sensation in the throat after taking nasty medicine as if one was about to vomit.

deond (n. a.). . a witch-doctor

derang (part.) used like chiad, q. v.

derd (v. t.) ... to lodge, stop tempo- rarily on a journey.

Desauli (n. a.) the tutelary diety of a village supposed to reside in the sacred grove, which is a remnant of the primeval forest left intact for the local gods when the clearing was originally made. The word is used also for the grove itself, but jaier is the proper word for that. The grove dieties are responsible for the crops and are especially honoured at all agricultural festivals.

diang (n. i.) . . rice-beer, pachwai

did (n. i.) ... a lamp, light

didi (n. a.) ... a vulture

diku (n. a.) ... a foreigner, i.e. any- one who is not a Ho.

dill (v. t.) ... to fix, arrange (a time or date)

dimbu (v. i.). . to be in the ear (used of paddy)

dimsi (adv.). . daily. Dimsi dimsi, dimsi mutid every day

din (n. i.)1 ... day

dindd (adj.) unmarried. f)indd seped' a bachelor. J)indd kui a maiden

dipd (adj) ... slightly raised

dipli (n. i.)... time, season

diri (n. i.) ... a stone

Airing (n. i.) . a horn

disum (n. i.) . a country

diuri (n.a.)... the sacrificer or village priest

do (v. t.) ... to put, place

do (v. t.) ... to cohabit, have sexual [intercourse with. To keep as a mistress (perfect tense only).

dobe (n. i.) ... mud (not so much as

losod) ' doe (n. a.) ... a parrot

doed (n. i.) ... back

doedre (adv.) . behind, at thb back of

dokdn (n. i.) . a shop\

dold (n. i.) ... fruit of mahud tree

domkau (v. t.) to reprimand, threaten, scold

dondd (n. a.) a lizard

dondo (v. t.). . to raise (an axe, Idthi, etc.) for purposes of assault

dondo (adj.)... foolish, silly, ignor- ant, idiotic

dong (n.i .) ... a wedding song

dongd n. i.)... a boat

dongi (n. i.)... a shuttle

Dongol (n. i.) Ho name for Chai- bassa. Means, literally, an en- campment of many tents

dorbdr (y. t.) . to try a ca§e or suit

dored (n. i.). . any big stretch of water such as a jhil, a lake, or the sea.

dorkdr (n. i.) necessity, need

doro (v. t.) ... to shake the head meaning " yes "

dos (n. i.) ... fault, offence, sin

duar (n. i.) ... a door

dub (v. i.) ... to sit. Parjd dub settle a raiyat

dubi(n.i.) ... dunghill, refuse heap

dubted (n. i.) . a seat, chair, any- thing to sit on

dubui (n.i.)... the rump

( 157 )

(v. t.) ... to support, look after. Used of the common practice by which a relative is taken into the house of a widow, with or without minor children, to look after her cultivation and support her generally i (n. i.) ... bridge, culvert

l (n. a.) a pigeon (r. t.) ... to urinate (».j.) ... danger, trouble, calamity, ijiicfortune d*l (r. t.) ... to pour dnl-dd (n. i.) . a waterfall difln (r. i.) ... to nod. Dwn med

kd hujud sleep will not come dinnang (n. i.) a drum d umb d tod

(n. i.) ... curdled milk dumbu (n. i.) . weeds, grass dumduld (adj.} dim, short-sighted dumur (n. a.), a bee d u m u r-d d

(n. i.) ... honey dundu (n. i.) . cooked rice d und u bin g

(n. a.) , ... water snake dupil (v. t.)... to carry on the head iii irang (v. t.). to sing duri (adj.} . . . round like a ball e. g.,

an orange

durijang (n. i.) the hip bone datum (n. a.), a matchmaker

E.

ed (inter.) ... yes elang (v. imp.) to feel the heat emanating from a fire or the sun em (r. t.) ... to give ; to put, place en (v. t.) ... to extinguish enko (n, a.)... lac

' " ( ''. /.) ... to till.

en (r. t.) ... to keep awake enang (adv.) .. then enang unli'i

(n. i.) ... last night end, en (pron.

and adj.)... that endd (v.t.) ... throw away, spill endd-ad (n. i.) abortion, miscarriage enete (n. i.)... beginning engd (n. a.) ... mother engd-dpu (n.a.) parents engd ddro

(n. i.) ... the thumb enreo (conj.) yet, nevertheless, notwithstanding, although, still eperang (v.

rec.) ... to quarrel er (v. t.) ... to put on a sdri erang (v. t.) ... to abuse era (n. a.) ... a woman, wife ere (n. i.) ... an omen esed (v. t.) ... to prevent esel (adj.) ... fair (in colour) eser (v. t.) ... to claim possession. Epser ote the disputed land, epser being the reciprocal form etang (adj.)... thin etang dd (n. i.) soft water eld (adj.) ... other, another etdd (pron.) ... another thing eta etd (adj.) various, different etdi (f>ron.) another person ete (post.) ... since ete (conj.) ... than ete (v. t.) ... to begin, start ete (n. i.) ... a spark ••tk<i (r. t.) ... to spoil, damage t'lkd, el kau

(adj.) ... bad, wicked, wrong ;

dirty etkdicld (v.t.) to corrupt

( 158 )

e t k d nel o (v.p.) ... eto (v. t.) etom (adj.) ... eton (v. ref.) .

to be ugly to teach right to learn

G.

gadd (n. a.)... an ass gagarsd (v.

imp.) ... to be hoarse gaid (n. a.)... a eunuch c/aii (n. a.) ... a small monkey galang (v. t.) to plait (mats, bas-

kets, etc.)

gold (adj.) ... dumb gamang (v.

imp.) ... to be ticklish gamang (i\ t.) to tickle gamd (n. a.) rain ganai (n. i.) ... bar across a door gandd (n. i)... a toe, finger ; four of anything except money ; a finger's breadth.

gangai (n. i.) Indian corn, maize gay, gawd

(v. t.) ... to reproduce gapd (adv.) ... tomorrow gapdter (adv.) day after tomorrow gard (n. i.)... a river gard-kuti (n.i.) bank of a river gasar (v.t.)... to scrub clean (plates

and utensils) sore, wound aunt, i. e. father's

brother's wife Ho name for the Gour or Gowala caste gaud (n. a.)... a witness gaud pere

(v.t.) ... to give evidence gaudi (n. i.)... a measure of distance = about three miles

gau (n. i.) t gau (n. a^)

Gau(n.a.)

gam (v. t.) ... to nudge, beckon gauing (n, a.) stepmother gaured china

(n. i.) ... a scar gd (v.t.) ... to sew (with thread

and needle) gdded (adj.). . . blue gdndi (adj.) ... crooked gdndi (n.i)... an obstruction,

obstacle gdndu (n. i.) chair, stool with a

wooden sqat gdwi (11 .i.) . . . an e:l,. or sugarcane

press

gdri (n. i.) ... a cage gdri (v. t.) ... to delay gdrio(v.p.)... to be late gdrod (n. i.)... a cage gdt (n. i.) ... a ford gdti (v. t.) ... to catch round the waist as in dancing ged (v. t.) .., to cut up flesh,

dissect.

gekod (n. a.)... nephew (sister's son) gekui (n. a. ... niece (sister's

daughter) gele(v.i.) ... to form ears (as in

paddy) geled, gel

(num.) ... ten gendd (n. i.) . a shell gendd (n. a.), a snail genddri (n. a.) a stork yened (n. i.). the bow of a fiddle gene gene

(adv.) ... in a line gente, gentri

(n. i.) ... a bundle (of clothes) gerang (v. t.) to groan germoing (v. t.) to smile gete gete (adv.) in a line gil (r. t.) ... to hit with the fist

I/inn (a. i.) ... a inotul cup iiiinlrn (n. n.). a mongoo (/in,/ (r. I.) ... to cut (brush wood; ,/inil (/;. /'.) .. ;i wall ffiniK (n. i.)... a tiling ; property ,/innitt '(//./'.). an agreement (an obvious OorraptioD traceable coolie-recruiting) .<//.->•<;• (v. i.) ... to shudder <itn (r. i.) ... to sleep, lie down t/itil (n. i.) ... sand, silt yiu (r. imp.)... to be ashamed go (i\ t.) ... Jt% carry on the shoulder

i/i (/'. /.)... to hire a plough ./•>(/ (r. /.) ... to pluck (fruit or

Mowers,) 901 (v. t.} ... to kill

< (r. /v/1.). to Gonuiiit suicide yojakan (adj.) dead yojo (v. i.) ... to die iilckd (adj.) insensible

(t: «Vw/.)... to faint <j <> j ole kdl ,

(adv.} ... mortally <!<>! (adj.) ... round yole (v. i.)» ... to whistle (inlmdl (/»./.). confusion iioni (it. i.) ... wheat ,i,nit/ct' (int.). master. Used in addressing any superior or person in authority : also any European yoiid (n. /.) ... cowhouse, cattle-shed yomle (r. t.)... to abuse </<nt(i<> (//./.)... sulphur

(r. t.) ... give in marriage (11. i.)... deat ll

//. /'.). price, value ,/,i/i,n/,j (r. t.). (o vulue, appraise

(/ H II <l II (/ C( II

(adj.) ... valuable

." " " " " !'

*itl (v. /.)... to arrange bride price

yord ote (n. i.) high or untei

land

yoso (v. i.) ... to Fade, shrivel up

yot (it. I.) ... place where cattle are

herded

<jotd (v. t.) ... to scratch, claw, maul

yotd (adj.) ... thick, (trees, sticks, , etc.)

gotdo (v. t.)... to take charge of,

look after

yotom (n. i.)... ylii

yud (n. i.) ... betel-nut

yuddm (n. i.).. liquor-shop

ijuin (n.i.) ... a sack as loaded on

pack cattle

yuiu (n. i.) ... a temporary hut made

of leaves

yul (n. i.) ... a mistake

</ii»t (r. t.) ... to winnow (with a

basket, the paddy being tossed up

and caught again, while the chatV

is carried away by the wind.

Done by women only.)

yttndi (n. a.) . . a cow

yundli (n.i.). yundli an upland crop

yundrd (v. t.) . to carry on the back

yundui (r. t.) . to cut into pieces

yvnyu (n. i.)... triangular headpiece

made of leaves and worn while

working in the rain

tjnnjd (n. i.)... airjtii/d a kind of

oilseed

rd (/*./.)... nose ornament

it (n. i.}... dung

n (v. t.) ... to gra/o

•// (n.a )... a cowherd

<////• (i>. /'.) ... unrefined sugar, molasses

( 160 }

gur (n. i.) ... to fall down (used of any object standing erect, e.g., a man or a tree)

g u r-d and d

(n. i.) ... sugarcane

guri (n. i.) ... dung, manure

gurlu (n. i.) ... gundli q. v.

gurtui (v. t.)... used of the motion in turning a gimlet, and hence of any similar revolving motion, e.g. a stick between the palms to make a hole in the ground.

gus (v. t.) ... to bribe

gusind (n. a.), owner, master, host

guti (n. i.) ... a troop, band, crowd; a lota

gutu (v. t.) ... to prick

gutu (n. i.) ... a hillock

H.

hab (v. t.) ... to bite (used of tigers

particularly)

had (v. t.) ... to cut with a knife haiam (v. i.) .. to whisper haigore, haind, haindgore

(inter.} ... alas ! (physical pain) hal (v. t.) ... to pay a debt halang (v. t.). . to pick up (from the

ground)

halurd (v. t.). . to revenge hambal (adj.). heavy, pregnant ;

difficult

hambud Cv. t.) to embrace hamsa (n. i.).. a spot in which water

is always present naturally handrub (n. i.) a cover handting

' (n. i.) ... a share, part, portion ( hapad (n. a.) a leech liap a k a n

(v. ref.) ... to remain quiet

hapd (adj.) ... quiet, silent hapdn (v. ref.) to keep quiet ha pan u m

(n. a.) ... a young woman,

marriageable girl hardd (n. i.)... scale of a fish haringbdrte

(adv.) ... almost completely,

almost entirely

hartd(n. i.)... skin (of the larger animals and snakes. Not of birds, such as fowls) r hasur (v. i.)... to.^t hatang (n. i.) the brain hatld (n. i.)... the armpit hatnd ddru

(n. i.) ... asdn tree on which

silkworms are reared. hatual (a. i.). . a bowstring hau (n. a.) ... a red ant haui (n. i.) ... a ravine had (adj.) ... hot (e.g. chillies) hded (v. t.) ... to whisper hdgd (n. a.)... a brother, a relation hdjir (v. i.) ... to be present MM (v. t.) ... to hang up hdkdgoe (v. t.) to hang (i.e. death

penalty .

hdke (n. i.) ... axe for cutting wood hdku (n.a.) ... a fish hdlmad (n. i.) a salt-lick hdm (adj.) ... old (used with an- imate males only) hdn (n. i.) ... a hoof hdndr (n. a.) .. a mother-in-law handed (v. t.) . to shut hdndi (v. i.) ... to fall, tumble down (houses, embankments, walls, etc.) hangar (v. i.) . . to burn wood for

charcoal, to make charcoal hangar (n. i.).. charcoal, coal

/•. /.) ... to whip

( /•. //) ... to drive cattle ; to

chase, pursue.

li. a.) ... a bull

hdrd (r. i.) ... to grow, increase h d r d - h n i- //

(n. I.) ... brushwood hdrdi'-lii (i\ t.) to grow lidi-Jn (v.t.)... to rescue from a wild

;mimal

Itdri (r. i.) ... to flow swiftly hdr»b (w t.)... to satisfy, quench hdrob (v. finp.) to be content hdrol (i>. t.)... fo drive out, turn out lidrul> (r. t.)... to cover hind (n. /.) ... earth, mud, soil Msdbu (n. i.). . a clod of earth Ldsu (n. i.) ... ache, pain, sickness,

fever, disease lidsu (v. t.) ... to hurt hdsu (?.\ imp.) to be ill, have fever hat (n. i.) ... a week ; market

(n. z'.)... basket used in win- nowing

i (n. a.) ... an elephant hating (v. t.).. to divide hdtom (n. a.) .. a maternal aunt hdtu (n. i.) ... a village hdturcn (&dj.) tame he (v. t.) ... to pluck leaves hebe (v. t.) ... to carry on the bosom,

carry on the hip heben (adj.)... astringent hed (v. t.) ... to weed ht-d (v. i.) ... to ride, sit astride hedegele (n. a.) wild duck he% (n. z.) ... the husk hende (adj.)... black, dark henda (v. t.)... to blacken hende (r. i.)... to get black (used of the change in colour paddy un- dergoes after it recovers from reploughing)

faperpatd

(u. i.) ... a bush her (v. t.) ... to sow lti-rl>< </ ( y. /. i.. to carry under the

urn

lierel (n. a.)... a husband hero (n. i.) ... sowing season he s d d dru

(n. z.) ... pipal tree

hese (v. t.) ... to cut, lop (branches) hetd (v. t.) ... to look sideways hi (adj.) ... precipitous h i d t i n g

(v. imp.) ... to repent, be sorry,

be sad, grieve hichir (n. a.) .. lightning hiil ddru (n. i.) paisdr tree hild (o. t.) ... to hate, despise hinsd (r. imp.) to envy hirchi (v. t.)... to sprinkle (liquids

only)

hisir (n. i.) ... a necklace hitd (n. i.) ... a seed h i t i-h i t i

(v. imp.) ... used of the sensation which precedes fainting or follows a blow, z. e., in colloquial English. " seeing stars "

ho (n. a.) ... a man h o b d d a i

(r.irreg.)... to be possible h o b d o

(v.irreg.)... to becom^, to happen,

occur hobdolekd

(adj.) ... possible hochd (v. t.)... to break (used only

of branches of trees) hod (i\ t.) ... to pull off graiAs from a paddy stalk by hand » hoe (n. i.) ... a kind of pulse*, kurthi

( 162 )

2o (n. i.) ... breeze, wind ; a

storm hoio (v. t.) ... to shave ; to peel

fruit

hoioted (n. i.) . a razor holad (n.i.)... a razor hold (adv.) ... yesterday holdter (adv.').. day before yesterday ' holony (n. t.).. flour homo (n. i.)... body Aon (n. a.) ... a child hondd (v. t.) .. to stir, mix lion ddro (n. i.) the little finger ho n ddroking

(n. i.) ... the little finger and

the next finger

honedr (n. a.), a father-in-law honerd (n. a.), a niece (brother's

daughter) ; a step-daughter hongard (n. i.) a small river or

stream housed (n. a.), a nephew (brother's

son) ; a step-son /toeso (n. a.)- » goose, swan Aom (n. z.) ... a road, way hordte (post.)., by means of . horlosi (n. ft.), a whirlwind horo (r. £.) ... to watch, guard horo (n. a.) ... a tortoise koto (n. i.) ... the neck ho tor (v. t.)... to prod, thurst hu (v. t.) ... used of the sound

made in the throat by a dying

man, i. e. the death-rattle

c.

kuany (n. i.) .. a pit

hud (n. a.) ... a green pigeon

hud (v. i.) ... to bite

kudmd (v. t.) .. to throw, cast

Jwju (v. i.) ... to come

i/m&um (n. i.).. an order, sentence,

judgment

hukum (v. t.).. to order

hitld (n. i.) ... a day

liuhiny (v. t.). to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use humu (adj.)... dirty (used of the

body and clothes only) hundi (v. t.) . . to collect, gather,

assemble

huriny (adj.). . small, short, little h u r i n y j i

(v.imp.) ... to be depressed kur ingle k d

(adj.) ... some hurinyo (v. p.) to decrease hurld (v. t.)... to throw, cast hurum sitku

(n. i.) ... honey husid (v. /.)... to scrape off hntir (v. /.)... to snore hntul (n. i.) .. a rock or big stone

standing erect lintum (v. t.) .. to rinse the mouth

I.

c

i (v. t.) ... to ease oneself

i (n. i.) ... excrement ; rust

ilril (adj.) . . . thick

il>il dd (n. i.).. hard water

idtd (n. i.) ... a kind of tree, from the juice in the flower of which yur is sometimes made.

ichi ... (causative or permis-

sive compound)

idang (n. i.)... dawn

idangre (adv). early

idi (v. t.) ... to take, carry, carry in the hand

id u (adv.) ... perhaps

idu ondo (i. p.) who knows !

ijdr (v. t.) ... to take evidence

ikir (adj.) ... deep

ikum (n. i.)... the knee

( 163 )

;/ (//. i.) ... a leather ; tin- fin <>>'

a lisli : a <|uill

/// (,t. i.) ... rico-beer (originally liquor ready to drink as com- pared with dinny, to which watur had to li<* added. Nowadays •ny is the general term in use and /// is seldom hoard) i m (n. /'.) ... the liver imin (adj.) ... so many iinitniity (adv.) so much intinreo (co/i/.). although, neverthe- less, notwiths^ding, still, yet. iudii-d (n. i.).. the heel in tiny (r. /.)... to play /'/*// (V. a.) ... a star ipiptung (n. a.) a firefly if (v. t.) ... to reap, cut (grass) >.!• (i\ t.) ... to rub 'nil (n. a.) ... husband's younger brother, husband's younger sister iriled, iril

(num.) ... eight ir-Ki'ittjil (n. i.) matches /.</'// (r. t.) ... to cook isknl (n. i.) ... a school tan (adv.) ... very istt dtitjii (<.ul(-.) often itad (n. i.) ... share, portion, part itd (n. i.) ... a brick it'll (n. i) ... fat, grease ititiy (r. t.) ... to tighten ; to train itkid (v. t.) ... to wash clothes in (r. t.) ... to call out, call loudly, scream, screech

J.

ja</ar (c. t.)... to cohabit (with con- sent) ; to converse jaydd (n. i.)... a swamp, quagmire jaii- 1- (//. /.) ... a sacred grove jaii (n. a.) ... a grandson jaiikui (/t. a.) a granddaughter

Juir (n. i.) ... resin

j<iii;r<i (it. a.) the wife oi l),-fnnii v. p.

jal (r. t.) ... to lick, lap /an (v. t.) ... to infect; to transfer

lac from one tree to another jany (n. i.)... a bone ; a grain ; tli*

kernel

jantd (adj.)... illegitimate jypd (adj.) ... near, close japyar (v. ref.) to converse together jatka (conj.).. in addition, more ja t kdte (adv.) . especially j d cJiuildo

(adv.) ... ever jd chuildo kd

(adv.) ... never jdked (adv.)... up to, as far as; until. Also used sometimes with suffix o - also.

jdlekdte (adv.). iu any way whatso- ever, by any means at all jdlekdteo kd

(ado.) .. in no way whatso- ever, by no means whatsoever j'ilom (n i.)... a trap ; a fishing net ;

a cobweb, spider's web jdlom (v. t.) .. to plaster with mud jdlom (v. t.)... to catch in a net jdn (adj.) ... any jdnd (pron.)... anything jdndye hobdored

(i. p.) ... whatever may happen jdndo l>ano t

(pron.) ... nothing jdnyi (n. i.)... a kingpost jdnyi (n. i.) ... shafts jdnjid (/j. i.)... a contrivance made of bamboo and placed across a water channel to intercept fish. * They are eventually caught in the fotm&cuf, '/. c.

( 164 )

jdni (pron.)... any person

jdnti (n. i.) ... an oilpress, i. e. the kind used by the Hos, as dis- tinguished from gdnri, the ordi- nary form. Both are seen in the Kolhan

jdnum (n. i.). a thorn

jdpdre (adv.) anywhere at all < jdpid (v. t.)... to shut the eyes

jdrege (adv.).. anywhere at all

jdrom (n. i.). .. an egg

jdrom(n.i.)... to ripen, get ripo

jdtd (n. i.) ... twigs

jdtdre (adv.) .. anywhere at all

jdti (n. i.) ... a mat

jdti etkd (v. t.) to outcaste

jdti e t kdo

(v. p.) ... to lose caste

jdti mdndi

(n. i.) ... the feast which a Ho has to give, say on returning from Assam, in order to get back into caste

jdti rakab

(v. t.) ... to recover caste jdtiurd (v. t.).. to recover caste jel (n. i.) ... prison, jail jepender sakam

(n. i.) ... nettle jer (v. t.) ... to stick jer-jangd (n.a,) a duck jete (n. i.) ... sunshine, heat jet ere artang

(v. t.) ... to bask in the sun ji (n, i.) ...mind, attention ;

life ; the heart ji (v. t.) ... to smell (used of

animals)

c jid (n. a.) ... a grandmother «•' jidtdtd (adj.) .. ancestral jid (v. t.) ... to live jido (v. p.) ... to be alive

jijil (adj.) ... slippery jiki (??. a.) ... a porcupine jil (v. i.) ... to slip filing (adj.) . . . long jilu (n. i.) ... meat, flesh jimd (n. i.) ... custody, charge jimki honking

(n. a.) ... twin children jindal (?>. t.)... to loosen jmjri(n. i.) ... a chain jir (v. t.) ... to fan, blow up afire jirented (n. i.) a fan jirub (v. t.) ... tpyyarm at a fire jitkar sim (or)

sdndi ... the winning cock in

a fight

jo (n. i.) ... fruit jod (n.i.) ... the cheek jodr (v. t.) ... to greet jobe (n. i.) ... mud (a little) jolrd (n. i.) .,. refuse jod (v. t.) ... to wipe ; to paint,

plaster, whitewash jojo (adj.) ... sour jojoddru (n.i.) a tamarind tree jokd (post.) ... up to jokd (adj.) ... enough, sufficient.

Chaulim jokdod chi - Is the rice

enough for you ? join (v. t.) ... to eat jometed (n. i.) an edible jam ti (n.i.)... the right hand jonom (v. t.) .. to give birth to jonomo (v. p.) to be born jontu (n. a.)... an animal joo (v. t.) ... to sweep joren (n. i.)... a joint joro (v. i.) ... to leak jorong jorong

(adj.) .. everlasting jud (v. t.) ... to stick jul (v. t.) ... to shine

( 165 )

jnl (n. /.) ... a flame

juiiilin/ (,/. a.) a glutton ; one who

always tries to get more than

others. jnndi (r. t.)... to light a cigarette

or cigar

jtinkd (n.i.)... the calf jnr(r.t.) ... to collect round, to

cluster, e. y. a swarm of bees jurlnnr ( r. t.).. to surround (used of

men only)

juri (n. a.)»... a friend jurin (r. re/.). to^fS^ociate with j n rhi >'<i (v. t.). to reconcile )utl (i: t.) ... to cohabit (a little

more polite than jagar) jut id (v.t.) ... to touch

kaln'd (adj.)... piebald kacheri (n. i.). a court kadal (n. «'.)... a plantain kakdru, kakru

(n. i.) ... a pumpkin kalgi (n. i.)... a big bowl or plate

made of leaves

kalkal (n. a.)., a jackal (small) kamdr (n. a.), a blacksmith kankua (n. i.). a pickaxe kantard (n. i.) jack fruit kapdji (v.

rec.) ... to converse, argue k<i/>rd (?i. z.)... ringworm karai (v. t.)... to replough karamclid

(n. a.) ... a fox or small jackal karcliu (n. a.), a flea karkad (n. i.). a toothbrush (made

of wood)

karpd(n.i.)... shoes, boots, sandals made of leather

kasrd (n. ».)... mango, itch i (r. £.)... to fast (n. a.) a crab katult (n. i.)... a finger kautxiit (/•. /.). to bo in a hurry kd (n. a.) ... a crow kd (part.) ... no kd (v. irrey.)... to say " no, " be un- %

willing, refuse

ktibd (n. i.) ... the handle of a plough kddsom (n. i.). cotton kde (n. z.) . . . phlegm kde (v. t.) ... to clear the throat kd-emo (adj.~). selfish kdji (n.i.') ... language, word, tale,

story, statement, deposition kdji (v. t.") ... to say, talk, speak kdjiurd (v. t.) . to answer, repeat kdkd (n.a.)... paternal uncle young- er than father ; step-father kdkald (v. t.).. to make a noise kdkdrambud

(n. a.) ... a chameleon kdki (v. t.) ... to chase, pursue kdkom (n. a.), a crab kdld (adj.) ... deaf kdlimiti (n. i.) chalk kdlom (adv.).. next year kd-mandting

(v. t.) ... to deny kdnchi (n. i.).. a big basket kdndom (n. i.) the brim of a vessel kdni (n. t.) ... a tale, story, riddle,

fable »

kdvrd,kdvri

(adj.) ... one-eyed, blirfd kdrtsd (n. /'.)... brass kdnti \ji. i.)... a nail kdpi (n. i.) ... an axe for killing , animals *

kdrd (v. t.) ... to harrow, level land

( 166 )

kdri (v. t.) ... to lend (for a short time, the thing lent, or its equi- valent, being returned. Distin- guish rin em)

kd-sdriolekd

(adj.) ... doubtful kd-sednakani

(n. a.) ... a minor kdse med (n.i.) a squint

dropped from the basket on to the ground. Done by men mostly)

kdtd (n. i.) . kdtdchamrd

(n. i.) . kdtd-rdmd

(n. i.) . kdtd-reneke

(n. i.) . kdtd-talkd

(n. i.) . kdted (n. a.), kdti (n. i.) .

leg, foot, paw

north

sole of the foot

the ankle

sole of the foot a rat

sharp blade attached to the natural spur for purposes of cock-fighting kdtu (n. i.) ... a knife kead (n. a.)... a parrot ked (v. t.) ... to call kechd (v. t.)... to break or tear into pieces (anything but wood)

kecho (n. i.)... tiles

kecho dal (v.t.) to put on tiles

ked (v. t.) ... to touch kedbatd, kebatd

(n. a.), ... snipe

kenesed /n. i.) an obstacle

ker (v. t.) ... to carry tales, inform

kerd (n. a.) ... a buffalo

kesed (v. t.)... to impede, prevent,

stop

1 keie (adj.) ... hard, solid, strong,

stout, stiff

keto (v. t.) ... to winnow (by means of a basket, the paddy being

kid (n. i.) kili (n. i.) ... kilimili (adj).. kilum (v. t.)...

hammer kimin (n. a.).. kindar-kuld (n. a)

the chin , a sept, tribe various, different to drive in with

a daughter-in-law a leopard

kipiring(v.rec.) to trade, bargain

kiri (adj.) ...

kiring (v. t.) .

kirki (n. i.) ...

kisti (n. i.) ...

kitd (n. i.) ...

kitdb (n. i.) ..,

kitd ddru

(n. i.) ko (n. a.) kodlion (n. a.), kodlu (n. i.)...

beam in a hut koche (adj.)... crooked kodd (v. t.) .. kode (n. i.) .. koe (v. t.) .. koeong (v. t.) koidi (n. a.)., kokor (n. a.), kolom (n. i.) ,

fat, stout' to uuy a window an instalment a date (fruit) a book

a palm tree

a crane, paddy-bird

a son

a beam, the cross-

to tattoo

a millet

to beg

to carry 'in the arms

a prisoner, convict

an owl

a threshing floor

komoro (n. i.). a blanket

konie (adj.)..

konrd (n. t.)..

konro (n. a.).

koned (n. a.).

kope (v. t.) ..

kordm (v. t.)

left

about £ seer

a duck

a bride

to swell out the cheeks

to strike with a spade

or hammer (e. g. tent pegs) kordmgoe(v.t.). to kill by hitting

with the back of an axe or the

head of a spade

( 167

(n. i.) ... a si|uinl

(y;. /'.).. Sandals made of WOO(1

/•••;•,./<» (/;. i.) .. a saw

k»t,i (r. /.) ... to shako straw after threshing to see whether anv grain is loft in it; to shake clothes or a carpet

kof'ifi (n. /'.).. a hammer

koto (n. /.) ... a branch, hough

hn (>./.), ... to cough

feuam (n. t.^... the chest

kui-liii (n. i.) .. aT)!l%, sack

knd (r. f.) ... to carry on the hack

kudd ddru

(«. /.) ... a jdmtin t roc

kudlatn (n. j.) a spade

/.-?// (n. a.) ... a woman

kuid (n. a.)... a kito

kid/ton (n. a.), a daughter

knkuru (n. i.). a bridge, culvert

kukuru (n. i.). a hollow tree

kuld (n. a.)... a tiger

knlde (n. a.) .. a hare, rabbit

knlgid (n. «.).. husband and wife (spoken of together)

knit (r. t.) ... to question, ask, enquire '

kuli (n. i.) ... a receptacle made of leaves in which silkmoths' eggs are placed ; resembles an enve- lope in appearance

kulpn (». ?'.) .. a lock

kitnui (n. a.}., a maternal uncle

ktt-»itiinl<i

(n. /.) ... a cough and cold

kvmbad(n.iS). a small bamboo re- ceptacle placed at the mouth of the dnjid <j. r., in which the fish are finally caught kinnt'/i (r. /.).. to steal

kumu (r. t.)... to dream

/ n n >l<i n< rr

(adv.) ... behin<l k,i,,rli (//.?.).. about 20 seers /•////,// ni,

(n. i.) ... terraced upland /.-unkal (/?.«.)•• a potter kit/ltd (n. a.)., a woodon post used

in house building. knpul (n. a.) .. a guest

(n. t.) ... tho jiortion of the lee between the knee and the

O

anklo ; the shin kitrkur (r.

imp.') ... to be angry knrkitrte net

(r. t.) ... to scowl

I us nd (y. t.}... to sob

kuti (n. i.) ... edge, bank, shore,

side

kutrd (n. i.).. a plate

lad (n. i.) . lad (r. «.) . lagdtingd (v.

irreg.} lagite, lagid

(post.) . lagrt durang

(n. z.) . laii (n. i.) .

'bread to bake

ought

for, on behalf of

a comic sorig the stomach f womb laii-dul (/?.?). cholera /arwpa (adj.).. used of a tree with

branches on all four sides lanatab (n. t.). scissors larai, lardi

(r. «.) ... to fight /aria (n. i.) ... first crop of silk cocoons

( 168 )

laud (v. t.) ... to powder, make into powder. Si la ud = to break up . earth properly as by a third ploughing

Id (v. i.) ... to increase, exceed Id (v. t.) ... to peel off the bark

of a tree , lab (n. i.) ... advantage, benefit,

gain, profit

Iddi (v. t.) ... to load Idgd (v. imp."), to be tired Idli (adj.} ... enough, sufficient Idndd (v. t)... to laugh, giggle; to

ridicule, deride Idndid (adj.) . . lazy Idr (adj.) ... light, easy ldtd(n.i.) ... cave, den, lair Idtab (v. t.)... to cut (as with

scissors)

Idtar (adj.)... low Idtar (n. i.)... the bottom Idtarre (adv.). under Idtoe (n. i.)... bamboo on which

cotton yarn is reeled ldtum(v. t.)... to keep in the mouth Idtum (v. t.).. to fold up led (v. t.) ... to mix with water lebe (adj.) ... soft lee (n. i.) ... the tongue lekd (adj.) ... like, similar lekd (v.t.) ... to count lekd (n. i,) ... an account lekd dgu(v. t.) to render an account len (v. t.) ... to press oil; to lie

or sit on a man lying on the

ground ; to hold down a man

on the ground lengd ti (n. i.) the left hand Lead (v. t.) ... to bend leser (v. £.)... to sharpen leser (adj.) ... sharp

lichkom (v.i.).. used of the first shooting of paddy while still in the ground. As soon as it appears above ground, omon is used

ligir (v. i.) .., to be elastic. Used particularly of the giving and refilling of sodden ground when walked on

lijd (n. i.) ... cloth, clothes.

lijdred od

(n.i.) ... a teqt

lijdsiku (n. i.). aVnite louce, bodv , '

louce

lijum (v.t.)... to chew the cud

likd (adv.) ... almost

likd likd (adv.) almost immediately

afterwards

lili (n. a.) ... a hornet lili dd (n.i.).. honey limbud(v.t.).. to catch by the

throat ; to strangle limitir (n. i.).. the palate lingi (v. i.) ... to flow slowly linijum (n. i.) . a ginning machine liti (v. t.) ... to boil paddy before

husking. Tiki is also used liud (adj.) ... pliable lo (post.} ... with lo (v. i.) ... to burn lod ddru (n. i.) a fig tree locho (n. i.) ... the lip ; also used of

an elephant's trunk and a pig's

snout

loe (n. i.) ... penis, male organ logor (v. t.) ... to growl, grumble loke (v. t.) ... to limp lolo (adj.) ... hot (extreme) longor ote

(n. i.) ... low-lying rice land lor (n. i.) ... a hill stream

( 169 )

(r. t.} ... to \vafcli, Im on the look-out for, lie in wait for «//* (//. i.) ... good luck

Ixinod (n. /.) ... had luck /<>.W (n. /.)... wet mud (a lot) /^<v (r. t.} ... to sprain /" iv. t.) ... to ladle linn (<ulj.) ... wet

<{ (r. £.) .. to leep with cowdung dl (_/>. /'.) .. a spoon I n n gam, lygam

(n. i.) ...^Ntfocoon ; silk

rhidit

(n. a.} ... a silkworm (n. i.) ... flour (n. i.)... the ear lutursdri (v.

hnj).) ... to buzz (ears)

M

machild gdndu

(n. i.) ... seat or stool with

rope seat madkam ddru

(n. z.) ... maliud tree maid (n. z.) . . . refuse remaining

after tnahud flower has been

pressed. mail (ii.i.} ... plant used to make

the shafts of arrows. maiom (n. i.).. blood maiom laii-dul

(n. t.) ... dysentery maite (adv.}... slowly malchi, marchi

(n. t.) ... a chillie mamarang (v.

imp.} ... to be proud mand (v. t.)... to prohibit, prevent mandting

(v.t.} ... to obey, confess

mandaJ (». i'.). a custard apple marang (adj.} big, large marang ddro-

king (n. i.} . middle and fourth

finger marang Mtu

(n. i.) ... a town marchi (n. i.).. a chillie mar sal (r. t.}.. to light a lamp tmaskal(adj.}.. bright maskal (n. i.}.. a lamp maskal (v. t.}.. to shine, to light a

lamp

UK/ (adv.} ... last year md (r. t.) ... to cut (a tree) Mdburu (n. a.} a village deity like

Desauli, q. v. rrdd (n. i.} ... bamboo mdeang (n. i.} the waist mdqe (n. i.}... obscene language.

v \ / O O

Hence the Mdge Parab, a time of licence both in speech and action.

mdji (n. I.}... a bug

nidndd (n. i.}.. a cold in the head

mtindd (n. i.}.. footprint of man or animal

mdndi (n. i.).. cooked rice

mdni (n. i.}... mustard

md)ig(adv.}... before

mdyrid (n.i.}.. a water-channel

mdp (v. t.) „.. to forgive, pardon

mdrau (v.t.}.. to breach sm embank- ment or the ail between two fields

nidrd (n. i.}... a peacock .

/mm (n. i.}... small-pox, chicken- pox

mdrwdr(n.a.} a scorpion

mdtd (v. i.}... to ripen

meang (adv.}.. day after tomorrow

med (n. i.} ... the eye

( 170 )

med (n. i.) ... iron medadakan

(adj.) ... blind med-dd (n. i.). tears med-kandom

(n. i.) ... the eyebrow med-mud (n. i.) the face med r akab

(v. t.) ... to look up med-rdjd ,

(n. i.) ... the pupil of the eye mej (n. i.) ... a table men (v. t.) ... to say, speak mend (v.

irreg*) ... to be mendo(conj.).. but mente (conj.).. because mer (adj.) ... bitter, as e.g. quinine merd (n. i.)... refuse remaining after mahud flower has been pressed

merel (n. i.)... myrabolams merom (n. a.)., a goat metai (n. i.)... sweetmeats miad, mi, mid

(num.) ... one miad ho (i.p.) a certain man miad taiom

miad (adv.). one after the other,

in turn mid, midge

(adj.) ... same, equal, level mid (v. t.$ ... to mix, to have sexual

intercourse ; to join together mid dipli

(adv,) ... once upon a time mido (v. />.)... to become one; to

meet, join

mido (n. a.)... a certain man mido mido

(adv.) ... one by one, in turn midre (adv)... together, unanimously

mindi (n. a.)., a sheep mindi-kuld

(n. a.) ... a wolf mir-mir (adv.). just before daylight or just before dark, i. e. twilight misd (adv.) ... once misd (v. t.) ... to mix misd misd (adv.) sometimes, seldom misdokd (adv.) not even once, never mm (n. a.) ... a sister (younger) misierd (n. a.) a sister (younger) miu (n. a.) ... calf mo (v. i.) ... to«*r,.ell moi (v. i.) ... to put out new blos- soms after the cold weather ; to bud. moid, moi

(num.) ... five mokardmd

(n. i.) ... a case, law-suit monduku

(v. imp.) ... to be depressed monrd (n.i.)... a dead body moroe (adj.) acid mosld (n.i.)... spices mual (n. i.) ... ridge on the top of a

house

mud (n. i.) ... the nose , mud-undu

(n. i.) ... the nostril mudai (n. a.) a complainant,

plaintiff

mugd (n.i.)... coral mugi (n. i.) ... a kind of ddl muin (n.a.)... a black ant mukd (n. i.)... measure of length equal to the distance between the elbow and the tip of the finger, i. e. about \ yard ; a settlement mukd (v. t.)... to measure, survey mukui (n.i.)... the knee mukuing (v. t,) to bother

( 171 )

///////' (adj.} ... straight

mill it (/<. i.) ... new moon

i (/;. /.). a ring if/ii (nil/.), rich dd (/<. «.). headman of a village

tnititffi (it. I.). . a clue iniintin (v. /.). used in connection with the completioD of a long journey or circuit, e. g. round a jungle. r>ed also to indicate a depth of water sufficient to cover any particular person's head mundrad (n. ij&uzgth from the el how to the closed hand

(ti. /.)... beginning. •mnmt,-cni = an original clearer of the soil

(«(/<•.). in the beginning mural (n. L). . receptacle made of

wood or mud to keep paddy in niu mi (H. /.)... a radish mnrki (n.i.)... u small earring worn

by men mur ddrn

("• i.) ... a palds tree musing betar

(adv.) ... once upon a time muskil (aft/.) difficult mittd (n. i.)... the nose niuid-undu

(n. i.) ... the nostril nniti (n. i.) ... a bundle of paddy

(small) nnit id (<«!/.')... every. Sirmd mutid =

every year nintitl («./.) ... a ridge-pole

N.

nail (n. i.) ... a creeper

null (». /.) ... wooden portion of plough, /. c. without plough- share and yoke

n. t.) a farrow naksd (n. i.) .. a picture, map nd (adv.) ... now ndai(adv.) ... after a little while

(longer than llhd li/.-ii) nde (adj.) ... near ndev (adv.)... eame &snd«i, </. ?•. ndge (n. i.) ... a kind of creeper ndkd (n. i.) ... kind of earth used in , place of soap to clean the head ndki (n. i.) ... a comb ndld (n. i.) ... hire, wages, salary ndldi (n.a.)... daily labourer, coolie ndldtani (n. a.) same as ndldi, q. v. ndlis (r. t.) ... to bring a case, to sue ndm (v. t.) ... to find, discover ; to get, obtain, receive ; to look for ndmd (adj.)... new ndrd (n. i) ... the stalks of paddy left in a field, after the crop has been cut, for cattle to graze on ned, ne(pron.) this nedlagite

(conj.) ... therefore, because nedmente

(conj.) ... therefore, because ne bdgekedte

(>.]>-) ... besides, in addition to nel (v. t.) ... to see, look nelat kdr

(v.t.) ... to try a purchase nelgod (v. t.) to catch a glimpse of nelo (v. p.) ... to appear, » be visible nelurum (v. t.) to recognise identify nepel-upurum

(n. i.) ... a mirror, looking- glass

ni (r. t.) ... to open mar (v. rej.).. to purify. Used of the purification undergone by both parents seven days after a child's birth

( 172 )

nidd (n. i.) ... night

niddo (v.p.)... to be benighted, over- taken by night

nidir (n. a.)... a white ant

nildm (n. «.)... a sale

nim ddru(n.i.) a mm tree

nir (v. i.) ... to run away, abscond

nir (v. t.) ... to run

nitir (v. t.) ,.. to scatter

noge ... an enclitic attached

to adjectives with the meaning of " fairly ", pretty ", etc. E. g. Jiambalnoge - fairly heavy, sibilnoge - pretty sweet

nogod (adj.)... sweet

nor-nor (v. t.) to grumble, growl

norom (adj)... soft

notum(n. i.)... a name

nu (v. t.) ... to drink

nubd (adj.} ... dark

nuksdn (v. t.) to destroy

numu (n. i.)... a name

nunuai (v. t.) to suckle

o.

o (adv.} ... too, also (used as a suffix only)

od (n. i.) ... a house, room

odren (adj.)... tame

odris (n. a.)... an heir

obor (v. i.) ... to creep, crouch, fall flat on the stomach. Mid obor jiling = a man's whole length with

arms extended (•

oborte giti(v.i.). to sleep on the stomach ochd, ocho

(inter.} ... take care. Conveys

a caution

' odad (adj.) ... wet

( od (v. t.) ... to break

oe (n. a.} ... a bird

oe (v. t.) ... to tear

to swim

a miser

to boil eggs

steam

to outcaste

to put on oil, to oil

who

what

what

where, in what direc-

e, in what place

e

where, to what place

oidr (v. t.) ... owl (n. a.) ... oiong (v. t.)... oiong (n. i.)... ojdti (v. t.) ... ojo(v.t.) ... okoe (pron.)... okon (adj.) ... okond (pron.) . okonpdre (adv.)

tion okonre (adv.)..

(rest) okonte (adv.)..

(motion) ol (v. i.) ... to rise

issue, ooze out

ol (v. t.) ... to takeout, bring out ol (v. t.) ... to write, record ombd (v. i.)... to go on the hands

and knees omon (v. i.)... to come up out of the

ground, shoot, germinate, sprout ondokdr (n. i.).. a person ( usually a

Hindu ) supposed to waylay

children and sacrifice them in

order to get a good harvest ondo (conj.)... and, again ondong (v. t.). to take out

ong (v. t.) ...

onol (n. i.) ..

of a dhoti

onol (v. t.) ..

onol (adj.) ..

onolb a # si

(n.i.) ..

ova (v. i.) ..

to blow with the mouth the coloured border

to paint, draw striped

a slipknot

used to express the bad feeling shown, say, by refusing to speak or visit after a trivial quarrel. Is essentially evanescent

( 1*3 )

( /(. /'. ).. :i bad omen t.) ... to pull after, drag, tjsed of the custom of taking wives forcibly from hdts, etc. (n. i.) ... same as araut q. v. v. t.) ... to bathe orony (r. t.}... to blow (e. <j. a horn

or flute)

otdr (adj.)... broad <^(j (r. t.) ... to press ote (n. ^) ... cultivated land, a

field, »a plot

ote-ruku (n. i.) itti'earthquake ot&l (n. i.) ... a water-channel otony (r. /.)... to follow. Otong topolko hujulend they came in Indian file.

otdng (v. £.)... to carry away ( used of the wind only)

P.

pabitd (n. i.) a papaid ( kind of fruit )

padd (v. t.)... to kick

pagrd (n. i.).. gold earring worn by women

pair (v. t.) ... to overflow, flow over

paiti (v. t.*)... to work

pajau (v. <.)... to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use

paldti clddu

(n. a.) ... a kind of worm simi- lar to the silkworm, but smaller. Used in the euro of epilepsy. Paldti is the name of the tree on which it feeds

pampal (n. a.) a butterfly, moth

panchd (n. i.) rent

panti ' (n. i.)... about 10 maunds

parau (v. t.)... to read

par id (adj.)... waste, fallow

l»trjd (a. a.)., a cultivator, raiyat jmskd \ r. /.)... to scratch. Used of

fowls, dogs, horses, cattle, etc.,

throwing up enrth with their feet. pate (n. i.) ... one bit of a * a g a r

(small cart) wheel pati (n. i.) ... two seers or four

pounds. «

patni (n. a.)... female moth that

emerges from silkworm cocoons.

patrd (n. t.;... plate or pot made of

stone patd (v. t.) ... fo entwine, e.g. the

branches of two trees or a snake pd (post.) ... indicates direction p ddu sim ,

sdndi (n. a.), the losing cock in a

fight pdevd (v. i.)... to clear up, e. g. the

weather after rain pdgd (n. i.)... rope, string (thick,

strong) pdlan (n. i.)... a saddle; the soft

covering put on pack animals pdlu lid sd

(n. t.) ... mica pdvl (n. i.) ... a ploughshare pdndoi (n. i.).. a pumpkin (white) pdndu ling

(n. a.) ... a cobra pan d u-b o

(adj.} ... grey-haired pdpari (adj.).. old (inanimate

objects only) '

pdrd (v. t.) ... to plant in a nursery or specially prepared portion of a field ; to plant closely pdrd (n. i.) ... quicksilver ,

pdripdri ,

(adv.} ... in turn, by turns pdrkom (n. t.) a bed pdte (v. t.) ... to fold round

( 174 )

pate numu

(n. i.) ... a nickname

pean (ad).} ... strong, stout, hard- working

pedji (n. i.)... an onion Penain (n. a.) a weaver

peo (v. p.} ... to be strong

pf.re (v. t.) ... to twist the tail

pere (v. t.) ... to fill

pereo (v. p.}.. to be full of, to be covered with

pero (n. i.) ... an egg ; the testicles

peto (n. i.) ... same as pero. Also " lay an egg ".

pi (n. i.) ... a plain, maiddn

pichd (v. t.)... to follow, pursue

pikd (n. i.) ... cigarette made of tobacco covered with leaves

pild (n. i.) ... the spleen

pilpai(n.i.)... a boundary pillar

pindd (n. i.) .. a dhoti

pindigi (n. i.). a verandah

pi ote (n.i.)... second class land known as bad

pit (n. i.) ... bile

pitol (n. i.) . . . brass

podsi (n. i.)... mist

pochd (v.t.)... to escape

pochod (n. i.).. force, violence

poild (n. i.)... about one seer

poisd (n. i.)... a pice

pold (n. i.) ... a ring

pord (v. £.)••• to skin

pord (n. i.) ... intestines

por so ddru

(n.i.) ... a jack-fruit tree

pu (n. i.) ... a cup made of leaves

pfidki (n. a.)., a sandfly

fCtkad (n. i.).. a fog

pukuri (n. i.) . a tank

pul (n. i.) ... a bridge, culvert

puli-arki (n. i.) strong country liquor

pundi(adj.)... white purd (adj. Sf

adv.) ... many, much , pur ni ma

(n. i.) ... full moon

pursat (n. i.) leisure

pursi (n. i.)... a pimple

pusi (n. a.) ... a cat

pustd (n.a.)... a kind of deer, small

with white spots

putam (n. ?'.) a door ,

putddd (n. i.) a spring '

puti (v. /'.) ... to Ha/V^ a swollen stomach

R.

rabang (adj.) cold

rakab (v. i.)... to climb a hill, ascend, increase

rakabted (n. «'.) a ladder

rambd (n. i.) urid

ranakab (n. i.) a steep slope upwards

randpid (n. i.) an eyelid

rapd (v, t.) ... to roast

rasid (n. i.) ... a receipt

ratang (n. i.) hoar frost

ran (v. t.) ... to take off a dhoti or sari

rau (u. t.) ... to break

rd (v. t.) ... to untie

rda (v. t.) ... to cry, bleat, neigh, low, crow, roar, etc. Used gener- ally of all sounds made by animals

rdchd (n.i.)... a courtyard

rdji (v. t.) ... to compromise, agree

rdj-rog (n. i.) consumption

rdli (n. i.) ... a root from which very useful medicine is made

rdmi (n. a.)... a maind

rdmtid (n. i.). sir g uj d (kind of oilseed)

)

: ( V, iin/>.) to ivjoirr. make

merry, In- joyful rdnd'^-t ni

(n. </.) ... a widow rdpi't (r. t.)... to wink, blink

(r. t.) to break i<> (r. p.) to burst rdf! (it. i.) ... soup, juice re (v. t.) ... to rob, snatch away red (adj.) ... cool rebed (r. /.)... to stick in a hole or

passage a«d be unable to get out ;•«/<> (conj.) ...irf* retf (n. i.) ... roots, medicine rel (n.i.) ... the railway /•<//'</<? (v.imp.) to be hungry renge(adj.) ... poor we (r. *.) ... to cut up (with a

knife or the teeth) ; to tear

with the teeth resed (adj.) ... narrow. Resed Iwrd-

a lane or path rid (v. t.) ... to grind with a pestle

and mortar or in a mill. J)dtd

ririd-to grind the teeth rikd (v. t.) ... to do rintil (n. i.)... a cloud ; the sky i-iinil-sdri .

(n. a.) ... thunder riri (n. i.) ... a loan n'c (v. t.) ... to owe rit? em (v. t.) to lend (for a long

period on interest) riv idi (v. t.)... to borrow ring (v. t.) ... to forget ringd (n. i.)... want, scarcity, famine ro (adj.) ... dry rod (n. i.) ... a spirit, ghost rod (v. t.) ... to plant, transplant rogo (n. i.) ... a disease rokd (adj.) ... fresh roko (n. a.) ... a fly

r»i<i ( a. i.) ... ft kind oi t !•<•(; 1 1 «iu ih" fruit of which ink ami medicine are made ; myrabolam-

roni (n. i.) ... sowing tim<-

rotod (n. i.)... coiffure as worn by Uriya men

ru (y. i.) ... to rest *

ru (v. t.) ... to beat a drum %

rud (v. i.) ... to return

rudurd (y. i.) to return

rub (v. t.) ... to poison (used only of killing fishes by poisoning the water) ; to take out by the roots, to uproot

rubd (y. t.) ... used of the action of animals climbing, or trying to climb, up a vertical object, e. g. a cat climbing up a tree

ruing (y. imp.), to have "pins and needles," i. e. the peculiar feeling caused by keeping a limb in one position too long ; to have cramp

ruji (n. i.) ... the female organ, the vulva

rukd (n. i.) ... a chisel

ruku (v. i.\ . . . to tremble, shake, shiver

rukuichi (y. t.) to shake

rul (v. t.) ... to take off the fire

rulbing (n. a.), a kind of snake that drinks milk. The Hos believe that it can stop the rain by blowing ; hence rulbiny ongtadde is the expression used for a rainbow •«

I'umul (v. t.) ,. to roar (tigers only)

rung (v. t.) ... to husk

rupd (n. i.) ... silver

rupu (n. a.)... a parrot

rusurusu (v. imp.) ... to have ague

( 176 )

rutu (n. i.) ... a flute

rutui (v. i.) ... to come out of the

egg ; to hatch ruung (v. t.)... to prod, thrust

S.

saben (adj.) ... all, whole

sabuj (n. i.) ... proof

sadai (adj.) ... common, usual

sac/en (v. i.) ... to put out new leaves

after the cold weather sagi (n. i.) ... a wheel ; a sagar or

small rough cart saiad-korong

(adj.) ... kind saijang (n. i.). a rib saitibd (v. t.) to keep, look after,

take care of saiu (n. i.) ... thatch saiu dal (v. t.) to thatch sajd (v. t.) ... to punish sakam (11. i.) a leaf ; paper sakod (n. i.) ... conch salandi {n. i.) a roof salangi (adj.) high, tall samang (n. i.) the forehead samd (i\t.) ... to chop with a

hatchet samba rau

(v. t.) ... to support samdi (n. a.) the father of one's

son-in-law sanang ,

(v. imp.} . , sananglekdte (adv.) i .

wishes

sandang (v. i.). to fall on the back, '' fall flat

sandangte giti

«•

(y. i.) ... to sleep on the back sangar (v. t.) to hunt

to wish, desire, intend according to one's

sanyil (v. t.)... to look up

sanging (adj.) far, distant

sankd (n. i.)... a kind of bracelet

worn by women only sapdrum dd

(n. a.) ... dew sar (n.i.) ... an arrow. Mid sar =

the distance an arrow can be shot sarai (v. i.) ... to collect paddy in

one place after cutting saram (n. a.), a kind of deer sarap (n. i.)... a road <

sard (v. t.) ... to gi^e the oath, swear sard (n. a.) ... a big monkey with

a black face and a long tail sardi (n. i.)... harvest time sare (v. t.) ... to leave behind, leave

remaining.

sareo (v.p.)... to remain, be left sarjom ddr u

(n. i.) ... the sdl tree from

which wood for houses is obtained sarsar (n. i.).. finger-nail, toe-nail,

claw. Mid sarsar - a finger's

breadth

sasang (n. i.).. turmeric sasanglekd

(adj.) ... yellow saun (n.i.)... the' sound made by

water when boiling sdb (v. t.) ... to catch, seize, take

hold of, apprehend, arrest sdbon (n. i.)... soap sdboro (n. i.). a crowbar sddom (n. a.)., a horse sded (v. t.) ... to breathe. Mid sded-

distance that can be covered in

one breath sdejang (n. i.) a rib sdgi (n. i.) ... a waterfall sdki (n. a.) ... a namesake. Is

looked on as a relation

( 177 )

sdkom (;/. i.) a bracelet s d k o in l> i n g

(n. ft.) ... a wateranaUp said (r. t.) ... to choose sal ute (n. i.) lowest lying rice land

known as berd

sdliikutl (n. i.) the lotus plant sdmamiityre

(adv.) ... before, in the

presence of sdmd (cujj.)... empty; useless;

gratis,> free of charge famdge (adv.). vmllout rhyme or

*reason

sd mate (adv.).. without rhynre or » reason

sdmom (n. i.).. gold

sdn (n. i.) ... wood

sdngd (n. i.)... potato, sweet potato,

yam ; any edible root sdngi (adv.)... very many sdr (n. i.) ... manure sdn (v. t.) ... to believe, trust sdri (v. p.) ... to sound, ring sdrige (adv.) .. really, truly, in

fact sdriolekd

(adj.) *... reliable sdriurd (v. i.). to echo sdsd (adj.) ... cold sating (v. t.) to bear, suffer (pain);

to stand abuse ; to have patience

with

se (v. t.) ... to beat in (rain) sedv (v. i.) ... to be capable of

judging well or thinking properly s e art akan i

(n. a.) ... an adult sebe (v. t.) ... to get accustomed to,

accustom, practise sekd (v. t.) ... to prepare, make

ready

seval (n. t.)... wooden or other receptacle in which paddy is placed for liu>king ; often merely a hole made in hard soil or stone

sen, seno (v. i.). to go, walk senbd (v. i.)... to roam seneor (n. i.).. a rafter sengel(n.i.)... fire lengelmdrmdr

(n. a.) ... a centipede sengelsing

(n. i.) ... nettle sengel ting

(v. t.) ... to light a fire senhord (v. i.). to journey senoean sirmd

(n. i.) ... last year seped (n. a.)... a young man ser (v. i.) ... to melt sereng (n. i.).. a rock or big stone

lying flat seta (n. a.) ... a dog

morning

to reach, arrive

to draw in the

setd (n. i.) seter (o. i.) sib (v. t.)

breath sibil (adj.) sid (n. i.) sid (v. t.)

string ) sidd (adj.)

sweet

x

cactus

to break ( rope or

first

siddre (adv.).. formerly, at first

siddsddd (adj.) simple, frank, open

siiu (n. i.) ... the smell emitted by raw fish or raw meat. $db st'ic- the ceremony of purification seven days after a child's birth

siki (n. i.) ... a four anna piece*

sikiv (n.a.)... mosquito

sikri (n. i.) ... a chain ; handcuffs

siku (n. a.) ... a louse

( 178 )

sikuar - b a i r (»i. z.) ... a siklid-bhangd used

for carrying loads on the

shoulders sili(n.i.) ... the white matter

often found in the corners of

the eyes on rising

silping (n. i.) a door made of wood sim (n. a.) ... a fowl ismpdrd (n. z.) the place where cockr

fighting takes place simrd (n. i.) . . . cockcrow simri (n. i.) ... a bean sim tol (v. t.) to cockfight with

artificial spurs

a boundary

a chain ; handcuffs

the backbone, spine to ornament, adorn,

the sun

simd (n.i.) .. smki (n. z.) . . sindurijang

(n. i.)

singdr (v.t.).. decorate singi (n. a.) .. sin gili asur

(n. z. ) ... the west singi maskalre

(adv.} ... in broad daylight singiol (n. z.) the east singi satub

(/i. z'.) ... the whole day sinipud (n. z.) bellows si pin g idi

(v. t.) ... to carry with both ha n c|s

sipud (v. /.)... to blow with the bellows (may be used of playing the harmonium or organ)

sir (n. z.) ... a vein

sirmd (n. z.)... a year

*sisir,(ti. a.) ... dew

^sitani (n. a.). . a cultivator « situad (n. a.)., wax

sitio, (n. a.)... a child

i

to plough, cultivat a cultivator

to smell

c

to fit, fix

to stab (with a sword

siu, si (v. t.).,

siui (n. a.) .

soan (v. £.) .

sob (v. £.)

sobo (v. £.) ., or knife)

soda (v. £.) .., used of the action of cocks in fighting. The reciprocal form sopodd is common

so'd (v. i.) ... to rot

soed ote (n. z'.) low-lying land between bgrd and bad (

sokd (n. a.) ... a «nK'hch-doctor (there are none in the Kolhan, but tliey are imported when wanted ; are supposed to be more profound than a deond)

sokod (n. z.)... a valley

solong (v. t.}.. to pass through, or put into, an aperture so that removal is possible, e. g. the arm in the sleeve of a coat, a stick between two ends of a rope so as to form a sort of slung seat

somdn ( adj. ) level

somsor (n. a.) a grasshopper

son (v. t.~) ... to hiss

son (n. z.) ... flax

sondoro (n. z.) matter, pus

song (v. t.} ... to measure rice in a paild or wooden measure

sonoro ( n. z. ) the bar across a door to keep it shut

sor (v. t.) ... to sniff

sord (n. z.) ... saltpetre

soso (n. z.) ... a kind of tree from the fruit of which lubricating oil is made

sosoi (n. z.) ... the sap of a tree

su (v. t.) ... to sigh

sudete (adv.).. slowly, softly

.<,//.).. lie-low, sitd (n. i.} ... a \vcll

//, /'.) ... a iireiHe- ^for

clothe- )

aui (c. t.) ... to sign sujd (n. i.~) ... a largo needle (for

.-«• \\inu; mats, etc.) stikri (H. a.)... a pig stiku (v. imp.) to be happy, pleased,

contented, willing suku (q, t.)... to like, 1 o v e ; be

pleated N\"jih ; agree sitku (n. /.)... ii>gjurd (small) sttAul (n. i.)... smoke ; tobacco sukul sib (v. t.) to smoke 'sukute (adc.). voluntarily aid (n. i.) ... dysentery sumad (adc.).. only, alone auma/ty (adc.) only, alone sun (v. i.) ... to dance sunum (n. i.). oil siniutu (n. a.), next younger brother

or sister, i. e. the one born after

the «ne referred to svpid (n. i.)... coiffure as worn by

women sujju (n. i.)... upper part of the

arm sur (v. i.) ... to take shelter from

the rain ; to drown surpang (n. a.), a wasp susun (v. i.) ... to dance sutam (n. i.)... yarn, thread, fibre sutdte (j i t i

(c. i.) ... to sleep on the side suti (v. i.) ... to recover con- sciousness after fainting from

lack of food or loss of blood, etc.,

or after a drunken stupor rutu (v. t.) ... to follow as a sort of

bodyguard sutui (n. i.)... coat, upper garment

T.

(r. t.) to enquire (//. /.)... a place

tain (v. i.) ... to stay, wait ; to livo taiom (post ).. after, behind t a i o m r e , i a i o m t e

(adr.) ... subsequently iniitfiuod (n.i.) a tent itamrds (n. i.). a guava taran (n.i.)... the shoulder tasad (n. i.)... grass t asadlekd

(adj.) ... green taui (v. t.) ... t o d r a w u p, e. </.

water from a well, to pull up ;

to milk

taukuld (n. a.) a jackal, fox tdbd (v. t.) ... to wrestle tdben (n i..)... pounded rice, flat

rice, churd

tden (n. a.) ... a crocodile tder (n. i.) ... cucumber tdgoe (v. t) ... to chew tdki (v. t.) ... to hit against an

object with the head or the

upper part of the body tdld (adj.) ... half, middle tdldre (adv.).. in the midst of tdli (n. i.) ... a plate tdm (v. t.) ... to strike, beat tdmbd (n. i.).. copper tdndd (c.t.)... to spread> the legs

apart ,

tdngd (v. t.)... to sort tdnyd (adj.) ... separate, different tdngi (v. t.) ... to wait for (short

time)

tdni (n. a.) ... a wild dog tdping (v. t.) .. to smack, slap, smite

the breast (with the flat of the

hand)

( 180 )

tdping chaprd

(v. t,) ... to clap the hands tdrdko (pron.) some of them t drdmdr d

(adj.) ... some tdrdsi ngi

(n. i.) ... afternoon fdri (n. i.) ... a plate tdrob ddru

(n. i.) ... a pidr tree tdsi (v. t.) ... to spread grain out tdtd (n. a.) ... a grandfather tebd (v. I) ... to reach, arrive tcgd(v.t.) •• to tread; to strike

with the paw (tigers) teld (v. t.) •«. to catch in the hand

(something which is falling) t embe (adj.} . . . shallow tend ho n

(n. a.) ... brother-in-law tend kui

(n. a.) ... sister-in-law ten (v. t.) ... used of putting a weight on anything to prevent it being carried away by the wind tendd (v. t.)... to pour off slowly

while covered tender (v. t.) to lean on teng (v. t.} ... to weave t en g d hon

(n. a.) ... brother-in-law engd k\ti

(n. a.)' ... sister-in-law ter (v. t.) ... to beat out a plough- share after it has been worn away by use ; to forge ter (v. t.) ... to throw ( a stone ) ter (n. a.) ... a thunderbolt <tetan g

(v. imp.) ... to be thirsty tetd dd (n. i.) clear water

tete (n. i.) ... moonlight. Tete nidd

* ~

a moonlight night ; chdndu tetetand-ihe moon is shinirv*

o

ti (n. i.) ... the hand, arm tiki (n. a.) ... a tick tiki (v. t.) ... to boil

(rice or vegetables) tikin (n. i.)... noon, midday tilming (n. i.). til, sesamum ( ting (y. t.) ... to burn (firewood) tingu (v. i.)... to stand Tintri (n. a.)., a worjcor 'In brass ;

the Thatera cfsW tiril (n. i.) ... a kind of tree, the

fruit of which is largely eaten tirub (v. t.) ... look down, bow, stoop tising (n. i.) . . . today ti-talkd (n. i.) palm of the hand tiu(v.t.) ... to snap up with the

fingers

toau(n. a.) ,.. a cuckoo tod (n. i.) ... milk ; the breast of a

woman, a teat todpere (u. t.). to fill with milk.

Used of the earliest appearance

of soft grain in the ears of the

paddy stalks

tobrd (n. i.)... alluvial deposit, silt tol (v. t.) ... to tie, bind, wrap;

usea also of the conversion of

silkworms into cocoons tolgoe (v. t.)... to hang

(death penalty) tondang (n. ?'.). brushwood, low

jungle, scrub tondom (n. i.) a knot topang (v. t.). to cut or chop wood

into pieces

tor (n. a.) ... a big lizard, iguana torai (n.i.)... a sword torang (adv.).. perhaps torkdlom(n. i.) year after next

tortd, t e r t d

(r. t.) ... to movo away tn (r. t.) ... to sting /// (/<. (/.) ... a squirrel (mini (n. /.)... a forked piece of

wood used in making fences tud (c. L) ... to take off clothes;

to take out of the ground fiiiiHf (r. (.)... to shoot. Mid tiling- distance that can be shot with a

bow and arrow tniu (n. ai) .„ a jackal, fox t u k a par d ^i* >

{n. a.) ... a locust tukd (n. /.) ... the nest of a bird 4uku (». ?'.) ... the wooden bar with

which the husking of paddy is

done

iuld (n. i.) ... scales for weighing t if I i (adj.) ... round (like the moon)

e. g. a cart wheel tuli chandu

(n. i.) ... full moon tumbalkct (n.a.) the person s who

collect paddy after it is reaped

and carry it to the threshing

floor

tumbd (n.i.y... a gourd (big) tumbid (v. t.).. to stumble tumbrub (adj.'). short tundd (v. t.)... to prod tundu(n.i.)... the end tundubdndid

(n. i.} ... leprosy tunu (n. i.) ... the sting (e. g. of a

tupu (P. «.) ... to dip in water tHjntri (n. i.) a hat tur (r. i.) ... to rise tvrtvngr (tump.)to feel the sun's glare turub (v. <.)... to prop, support (in a physical sense)

turuid, turui

(num.) ... six tilting (v. t.)... to put on clothes,

dress tutkun (adj.). cold (used of hail,

hoar-frost, etc)

T.

fa (n. i.) ... doubt. Jan td banod-

t there is no doubt

idkd (n. i.) ... money ; a rupee

tdkd-ldb (n.i.) avarice

tdkui (v. t.)... to spin

tdro(n.i.) ... an armlet

tel (v. t.) ... to snap the ringers

tik (adj.) ... right, proper

tikd (n. i.) . vaccination

tikd (n. i.) ... a form of mortgage in which land is cultivated for a fixed number of years, during which both principal and interest are liquidated by usufruct

tikurd(v.t.~)... to rectify

tip (n. z.) ... a thumb impression

tipan (v. £.)... to set silkworms' eggs

tird (n. a.) ... the small moth that emerges from silkworm cocoons

tiring (n. i.)... a bell hung round the neck of cattle etc. while grazing

to (v. t.) ... to hit the mark with an arrow or bullet ; to strike against

toe (v. t.) ... to crush between the nails (as with lice)

toiol (n. i.) ... a flag

toke (v. t.) ... to hit against any object with the foot or the lower part of the body . *

tonto (na.)... a black ant

topd (n. i.)... a small basket

topd (y. t.) ... to bury

( 182 )

topajang (n.i.) a funeral topo (v. rec) .. to adjoin tore (v. t.) ... to shoot (with bow

and arrow or a gun) totd (adj) ., totd (v. t.) .

sdri

tote (v. t.) .. 'toto (v. t) ., tunki (n. i.).,

naked

to take off a dhoti or

same as tore, q. v.

tp knock

a medium-sized bas-

ket such as is used in sowing

u.

u (v. i.) ... to fall down uai (v i .) ... to be well-known Z7az'a/(;an-well-known, notorious. Used of persons only ub (n. i.) ... hair ud (v. t.) ... to swallow ud (n. i.) ... a mushroom udrd (n. i.)... shafts of a sagar or

small cart

udub (v. t.) ... to show, reveal, ex- plain, inform

udur (v. t.) ui (v. t.) uiu (v. t.)

blanket uiu (n. i.) ukd (n. i.) uku (v. t.)

secrete

uld (v. t.)

' i,

ulidd (v.t.)

*• c '

ulidd (n. i.)

to push, shove

to jump, spring, skip

to cover with a

an abscess, boil

an elbow

to hide, conceal,

to vomit

to drivel, dribble saliva

uli ddru (n. i.) mangoe tree ultd (v. t.) ... to upset umbul (n. i.).. shade, shadow ; ghost, spirit

i (v. t.} ... to be well -known (facts, offences, etc.) (v. t.) ... to twist (into rope)

(n. i.)

hide

iinf (n. a.) undi (n. a.)

t

bark of a tree, skin,

(by

age

a camel

a brother (younger) undiboed (n.a.) brothers or cousins undiboko (n.a) brothers or cousins undu(n.i.)... a hole, cave, lair,

black ants' nest ungud ungud (adj.) ... doubled up

or disease)

unum (v. i.)... to dive , upan (n. i.) .. vpi (n. a.) .. upunid, upun

(num.) ur (v. t.) urgum (adj) . .

tepid

uri (n. a.) . . urn (n. a.) .. urub (v. t.) . .

a cockroach «•

four

to excavate

hot (slight), warm,

cattle

a beetle

to put into the fire

(already alight) urui (v. t.) ... to tie tightly; uruu (v.t.) ... to remember, be

careful uruulekdte

(adv.) ... according to one's

wishes, adcoiding as one likes usam (n. i.}... small temporary

shelter made in the open to watch

crops from

usu (adj.) ... lean, thin usur (v. imp.) to smart, burn, e. g.

salt in a cut utar ... is added to other

words to convey an intensive

meaning. Emutaraiding -I have

given it to him absolutely ;

Rdnclriutarrenko - the people of

Ranchi itself utrdo (n. i.) ... to shed the skin

\

( 183 )

n, /'.) ... cooked <l,il ; curry ututitd (n. i.) snmo as ntutod, q. v.

"/'*('•./'.) ... to rise, get up, wake nu (r. t.} ... to starve, die of

itt<ti,-hi (r. t.) to wake up, raise starvation

n tni nu (n. /'.) Athun's apple, gullet, nnrlii(n. i.) ... linseed throat

INDEX. A.

PAUA.

I. Difference between copula and m£iui ... ... 97

I ii-ril as postposition of «fcnitiv<« c;i ... ... 17 (\)*

I ii-.-.l as ropula or verbalising a<H-nt ... ... 44,45

.17 us.-d ;is past ti'ii-'-siitKx with indirect object ... ... ti2

Added postpositions ... ... ... «•• A 7

Adjectives, *9ftmparison of ... ... ••• 25

Formation of some ... ... ... 23

i

Invariability of ... ... ... 21

Transferability of ... .... ... 22

Adverbs of manner ... ... ... ... 128

place ... ... ... ... 127

quantity ... ... ... ... 127

time ... ... ... ... 327

Agglutinative language, Meaning of ... ... 2

Akad used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood,

active voice, of transitive verbs ... ... 45, 58

Akan used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood,

'active voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... 45, 66

used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood, passive

voice ... ... ... ... 45, 92

Alo used to express negation with imperative and subjunctive

moods ... ... .. ... 81

used to express prohibitions ... ... ... 79

An used in formation of adjectives ... ... ... 23

Animate objects, Distinction between and inanimate objects 12

in connection with gender ... ... 11» 12

Animate participial nouns, Formation and use of ...' 87, 8b

Approximations, Expression of ... ... ...* 117

Article, No in Ho ... ... ... ... 20

Atkdr, Impersonal use of ... ... ... 106

B.

J5a?«o, Conjugation and use of ... ... ... 100

Bare tense-form, Meaning of ... ... ... 45

( 186 ,

C. ''

PARA.

Cardinal numbers, Use of full and shortened forms of ... 112

Cases, Formation of ... ... ... ... 16

Caste names, Ho equivalents of common ... ... 136

Characteristics of Munda or Kolarian languages ... ... 3

Checked vowels ... ... ... ... 10

Chi used in asking questions ...

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Chronology among the Hos ....

Coins in Ho... ... ... ... .... 124

Comparison of adjectives... ... ... ^ *• 25

Compass, Points of the ... ...*•* ... 125

Compound added postpositions ... ... ... '17

demonstrative pronouns ... ... ... 23

verbs, Formation of ... ... ...108,109

verbs, Two kinds of ... ... ••• 107

Conditional clause, Position of ... ... ••• 74

mood, Conjugation of ... ... ••• 74

Conjugation of bano

conditional mood ... ... ••« 74

ed ... ... ... ... 103

future tense, indicative mood ... ... 53

hobdo

imperfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 51

impersonal verbs

intransitive verbs ... ... «•• 66

kd ... ... ... '..- 103

men ... ... ... ... 101

mend ... ... ... ... 98

metd ... ... ... ... 101

passive voice ... ... ... 92

past tense, indicative mood ... ... 60

perfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 57

pluperfect tense, indicative mood ... ... 64

present tense, indicative mood ... ... 48

reciprocal verbs ... ... ... 96

reflexive verbs ... ... ... 94

subjunctive mood ... ... ... 73

verbs generally ... ... ... 43

Conjunctions, List of ... ... ... ... 129

\

PARA.

participles, Formation and use of ... ... !>1

Consonants, Quantities of ... ... 8, 9

Copula, Use of as verbalising agent... ... ... 44,45

D.

n f/, Use of with transitive verbs ... ... ... 70

Use of future tense of ... ... ... 70*

D;iy, Divisions of the among the Hos ... ... 123

a of the week ... ?.. ... ... 122

Pi'denjion of nouns ... ... ... ... 18,19

* ^vypersonal pronouns ... ... ... 30

Demonstrative pronouns, Compound ... ... 33

Declension of ... ... 32

Formation of ... ... 32

' Direct object, Insertion of in conditional mood ... ... 74

future tense, indicative mood ... 54

imperfect tense, indicative mood... 51

past tense, indicative mood ... 61

perfect tense, indicative mood ... 58

pluperfect tense, indicative mood. 64

present tense, indicative mood ... 49

subjunctive mood ... ... 73

Direct abject-signs, Use of ... ... ... 47

Distributive numerals, Formation of ... ... 115

Divisions of the day ... ... ... ... 123

the year ... ... ... ... 120

Dold used In expressing invitations ... ... ... 80

Dual, Inclusive and Exclusive forms of personal pronouns ... 27

Dual number, formation of ... ... ... 13

Use of as a sign of respect ... ... 15

Dual suffix, Use of with inanimate nouns ... ... 14

Ean. used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active

voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... ... '45,46

used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, passive

voice ... ... ... ... ... 45, 92 t

Ete used as ablative case-ending ... ... ... 17 (vi) .

used in comparison of adjectives ... ... 25 *-

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

used in relation to time ... ... ... 17 (vi)

( 188 ) f

PABA.

Exclusive dual, Use of in personal pronouns ... 27

Exclusive plural, Use of in personal pronouns ... 27

F.

Fractions, Expression of ... ... ... H6

(Full forms of cardinal numerals, Use of ... ... 112

Full forms of personal pronouns ... ... ...26,28,29

personal pronouns uced as direct object-signs of

certain* transitive verbs ... ... 69,70,105

Future tense, Conjugation of ... ... ..,, 53

Idiomatic usage of ... ... * , ... 55

Insertion of direct and indirect objects in ... '54

Use of of dai ... ... ... 70

G.

Gender, Manner of indicating ... ... ... 11

Genitive case-ending ... ... ... ... 17(i)

H.

Hobdo, Use and conjugation of ... ... ... 102

Honang, Use of with redo in conditional sentences ...' 75

Use of with reo in certain conditional sentences ... 76

Hordte used as instrumental case-ending ... ... 17 (iv)

Hos, Origin and history of the ... ... ... 1

I.

Ichi used as a causative and permissive suffix ... ... 68

used in forming transitive from intransitive verbs ... 68

Imperative mood, Formation of ... ... ... 78

Imperfect auxiliary, Use of ... ... ... 71

Imperfect tense, Conjugation of ... ... ... 51

Insertion of direct and indirect objects in ... 51

Impersonal Verbs ... ... ... ... 104

Inanimate participial nouns, Formation and use of ... 89, 90

Inanimate objects in .connection with gender ... ... 11, 12

Inanimate object-sign, Insertion of in certain tenses ... 49

Non-insertion of in certain tenses ... 57

Inclusive dual, Use of in personal pronouns ... ... 27

PARA.

'usivo plural. Use of in personal pronouns ... ... 27

fjnitr pronouns. Formation of ...

[ndioative mood, Conjugation of future tense ... ... 53

Conjugation o! imperfect tense .... ... 51

Conjugation of intransitive verbs ... 66

Conjugation of past tense ... ... (50

< 'on {libation of perfect tense ... ... 57

Conjugation of pluperfect tense ... ... 64

Conjugation of present tense ... ... 48

% Tense-suffixes of ... ... ... 45

Indirecf »bject-signs, Use of— ... ... ... 47

Indirect object, insertion of in future tense, indicative mood ... 54

imperfect ... 51

past ... 62

perfect ... 58

pluperfect ... 64

present ••• 50

subjunctive mood ... 73

Instrumental case-ending ... ... ... 17(iv)

Interjections, List of ... ... ... ... 130

Interrogations, How expressed ... ... ... 82

Interrogative pronouns ... ... ... ... 34

Intransitive verbs, Conjugation of ... ... ... 66

Distinction between transitive and ... 67

Formation of transitive verbs from ... 68

Invitations, How expressed ... ••• ••• 80

Irregular verbs ... ... ... 97 et seqq.

l\ \\<(\& as sign of the subjunctive mood ... ... 73

Aa, Conjugation of ... ... ... ••• 103

Used to express negation A"-,/ U«M! as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active

voice, of transitive verbs ... ... ••• 45,60

AV// used as tense-suffix of past tense, indicative mood, active

voice, of intransitive verbs ... ••• ••• 45, t>b

il as transitive tense-suffix kill ; relationships among the Hos King used as dual suffix ... A"'-> u*ed as plural suffix ...

/f

( 190 ) i

PARA. Kol, Derivation of the word ... ... ... 1

Kolarian languages, Characteristics of ... .., , 3

Lagdtwgd used to express duty or obligation ... ... 102

Led used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative mood,

active voice, of transitive verbs ... ... 45, 64

Lekd used in forming compound demonstrative pronouns ... 33

used with demonstrative adjectives ... ... 33

Len used as past tense-suffix with certain verbs ... ... ( 66

used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative^^od',

active voice, of intransitive verbs ... ... 45, 66

used as tense-suffix of pluperfect tense, indicative mood,

passive voice ... ... ... ... 45, 92

Levirate custom among the Hos ... ... ... 133

Lo denoting association or combination ... ... 17 (v)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Locative case-ending of motion ... ... ... 17 (iv)

case-ending of rest ... 17 (ii), (iii), (vii), (x)

genitive case-ending ,.e ... 17 (xi), (xii)

M

Measures, How expressed in Ho ... ... ... 124

Men, Difference between and metd ... ... ... 101

Use and conjugation of ... ... ... 101

Mend, Conjugation of ... ... ... ,,.. 93

Difference between and copula a ... ... 97

Use of ... ... ... ... 97

Use of to express possession ... ... ... 99

Mente, Use of ... ... ... ... 101

Metd, Difference between and Men ... ... ... 101

Methods, of computing time in Ho ... ... ... 120

Miad used as an indefinite article ... ..'. ... 20

Months, of the year ... ... ... ... 119

Munda languages, Characteristics of ... ... 3

N

N used in formation of adjectives and nouns ... .., 23

Negation, How expressed ... ... ... 81

Neuter pronouns ... ... ... ... 31

PARA.

Nouns, Declension of ... ... ... ... 18, 19

Formation of From vwli- ... ... ... :.'."•

Instrumental and objective ... ... ... 89, 90

Participial (animate) or nouns of agency ... 87, 88 Number, Singular, dual and plural

Numerals, Cardinal ... ... ... ... 112

Distributive ... ... ... H-r>

Fractional ... ... ... ... 116*

Full and shorted forms of Cardinal ... 112

Ordinal— ... ... ... ... H3

•» Proportional ... ... ... 114

'•«

o

%

0 used as tense-suffix of future tense, indicative mood, passive

, * voice ... ... ... ... ... 45, 92

Object-sign, Insertion of inanimate in certain tenses ... 49

Non-insertion of inanimate in certain tenses ... 57

Use of— ... ... ... ... 47

Ordinal numerals ... ... ... ... 113

Otan used as tense-suffix of present tense, indicative mood,

passive voice ... ... ... ••• 45, 92

Otan taiken used as tense-suffix of imperfect tense, indicative

m,ood, passive voice ... ..." ... 45, 92

Pd used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 (iii)

Pdete used AS ablative case-ending ... ... 17 (ix)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Pdre used as locative of rest <.. ... ... 17 (vii)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Particles, List of miscellaneous ... ... ... 131

Participial adjectives, How formed and used ... -v 85

Use of to express relative clauses .... 86

Participial forms, Use and function of ... ... 84

Participial nouns, How formed and used ... ... t 87, 90

Partitive genitive case-ending ... ... ... 17 (i)

Passive voice, Use and conjugation of ... ... 92

Past tense, Conjugation of indicative mood ... ... ,60

Pdte used as locative of motion ... ... 17 (viii)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Perfect tense, Conjugation of indicative mood ... ... 57

R

( 192 )

PARA.

Personal Pronouns, Declension of ... ... ... 30

Full forms of ... ... ... 28

Inclusive and exclusive dual and plural of 27

Shortened forms of ... ... 28

Two forms of ... ... ... 2eJ

Use of full and shortened forms of ... 29

Pluperfect tense, Conjugation of indicative mood ... 64

Proper function of ... ... 64

Plural, Inclusive and exclusive fonns of personal pronouns ... , '21

Plural number, Formation of ... ... ... 13

Plural suffix, Use of with inanimate nouns ... .. 14

Points of the compass ... ... ... ... 125

Possession, How expressed ... ... ... 99

Possessive case-ending ... ... ... ... 17 (i)

Possessive pronouns, Formation of ... ... ... 36"-38

Three forms of ... ... ... 39

Postpositions, Formation and use of separate ... ... 126

Meaning and use of added ... ... 17

Present tense, Conjugation of indicative mood ... ... 48

Prohibitions, How expressed ... ... ... 79

Pronominal object-signs, Use of ... ... ... 47

Pronominal subject-signs, Use of ... ... ... 46

Use of with imperfect tense of indi- cative mood ... ... 51

Pronouns, Demonstrative ... ... ... 32, 33

Indefinite ... ... ... ... 35

Interrogative ... ... .... 34

Neuter— ... ... ... ... 31

Personal— ... ... ... ... 26-30

Possessive ... ... ... ... 36-40

Reflexive ... ... ... ... 42

Relative ... ... ... .- 41

Proportionate Numerals, Formation of ... 114

a

Quantities of vowels and consonants ... ... 4-9

Questions, Use of chi in asking

R

Re used as postposition of locative case ... ... 17 (i)

used in forming conjunctive participles

\

( L»3

i used as equivalent to " regarding," etc.

u«rd :i^ locative genitive case-ending

in forming conjunctive participle to indicate value, age, measure, etc. verbs. Conjugation of Formation of

> indicating realizable or probable condition

used as sign of the conditional mood JUeflexl'vo pronouns .^

Ketlexiu,' verbs, Conjugation of ...

* » T, Formation of ...

^^

Hclationship, How fo ascertain

Terms of— ... ...

Relative clauses, How expressed .--

Relative pronouns ... ...

I't-ii u.-ed as equivalent to" the wife of" used as locative genitive case-ending used to indicate value, age, measure, etc. Use of in certain conditional clauses

8

used in comparison of adjectives Separate'postpositions, Formation and use of Sept relationship among the Hos ... Shortened forms of cardinal numerals of personal pronouns Simple adde'd postpositions ...

Singular number, Forms of ...

Subject-signs, Use of pronominal ... Subjunctive mood, Formation and use of

I'AKA.

17(xiii) 17 (xii)

17(xiih

7.5 74

94

132 86

^1, 86

17 (xi)

17 (xi)

17 (xi)

76

... 25

... 126

135

... 112

26, 28, 29

... 17

73

/a used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 /iii)

Tiid used as tense-suffix of perfect tense, indicative mood, active

voice, of transitive verbs ... ... ... 7;;

used as an ablative case-ending ... ... ... 17 /xi)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

Taikt'tt used as imperfect auxiliary ... ... ; i

'I nil used as tense-suffix of present tense, indicative mood, active

voice, of all verbs ... ... ...45,48,66

PARA. Tan taiken used as tense-suffix of imperfect tense, indicative

mood, active voice, of all verbs ... ...45,51,66

Tare used as locative of rest ... ... ... 17 (x)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

used to indicate animate indirect object ... ... 17 (x)

Tdte used as locative of motion ... ... ... 17 (x)

used in forming conjunctive participles ... ... 91

used to indicate animate indirect object ... ... 17 (x)

Te used as instrumental case-endin-o- . 17 (iv)

o \ J

used as locative of motion ... ... ... 17 (iv)

used to signify price ... ... ..17 (iv)

used with dual and plural suffixes of nouns denoti.ig family

relations ... ... ... ... 43

Ted, Idiomatic use of with lionang ... ... ... 76

used to form inanimate participial nouns ... ... ° 89

used with adjectives of quality to form inanimate nouns ... 90

Tense-form, Meaning of bare ... ... ... J5

Tense-suffixes of indicative mood ... ... ... 45

Tenses, Formation of ... ... ... ... 43,44

Terms of relationship among the Hos ... .. 132

Use of possessive suffixes with ... 38,40

Time, How computed ... ... ... ...118,123

Torang, Use of where probability or doubt is indicated ... 73

Transitive verbs, Distinction between and intransitive verbs ... 67

Formation of from intransitive verbs ... 68

Tribal names, Ho equivalents of common » ... ... 136

Verbs, Compound ... ... ... ...107-110

Impersonal ... ... ... ...104-106

Irregular ... ... ... ... 97-103

Reciprocal ... ... ... ... 95,96

Reflexive ... ... ... ... 93,94

Vowels, Quantities of ... ... ... ... 5_7

W

Weights, How expressed ... ... ... 124

^ .f

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SUPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

Burrows, Lionel 4-54.7 Ho grammar

\